Ptr4300 Sme v11 Servicemanual

Plate Thermal Recorder
4300
SER
VICE MANUAL
SERVICE
PT-R4300/PT-R4000II/PT-R4000
2002 06-06
Ver1.1
2002 05-23
Ver1.0
Quality Promotion Department

Media Technology Company
For your safety

Caution labels are affixed to potentially hazardous parts or areas of the equipment for the
safety of the operators and maintenance staff. Caution labels are classified into two types
"WARNING" and "CAUTION" depending upon the degree of potential danger as shown
below. Please read, understand and heed the meanings of these labels to prote
yourself and to prevent unforeseen accidents.
:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided

or properly handled, could possibly result in death or serious
injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided

or properly handled, could possibly result in minor or moderate
injury or equipment damage.
The PT-R4XXX operators must thoroughly read this manual. Do not turn on the
machines power supply until all of the precautions have been read and understood. Very serious accidents may occur if this instruction is not observed.
Please keep the following premises and expectations in mind.

This service manual is only intended for engineers trained in service procedures and maintenance
personnel trained by qualified engineers. Readers are therefore expected to already appreciate
the potential hazards presented by this equipment and type of work, as well as understand all the
basic operations needed for equipment maintenance.
When exporting the machine
International transfer of this equipment, any of its parts, components and/or software must be
carried out in compliance with the relevant laws and ordinances of the country of export and the
country of equipment end-use. We do not assume any responsibility or liability for equipment
transferred without regard to proper export/import regulations or procedures.
Limits of responsibility
Please note that equipment specifications are subject to change without notice for updates and
improvements. This may cause inconsistencies between the contents of this manual and the
equipment you currently possess.
We shall not be held responsible for any damage caused by conditions beyond our control such
as customer modification, disassembly or misuse of our products, programs or software, or their
use in a defective or deficient environment.
Although great care has been taken in preparing this manual, if you find that certain points
seem unclear or in error, please contact Dainippon Screen Mfg. Co., Ltd.
We assume no responsibility or liability for any damage or consequential and/or indirect losses
resulting from any accident or malfunction that might occur during the operation of this
equipment.
Copyright
1999-2002: Dainippon Screen Mfg. Co., Ltd.
The copyright for this entire manual belongs to Dainippon Screen Mfg. Co., Ltd.
Copying, reprinting or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part in any media without our
express consent infringes upon the copyright and the rights of the publisher.
Contents
On safety
1. On Safety .................................................................................................................................. -1
1-1. When using the PT-R4XXX .............................................................................................. -1
1-2. Precautions for electricity ................................................................................................ -2
1-3. Precautions for equipment operation ............................................................................... -8
1-4. Maintenance .................................................................................................................... -9
1-5. Caution labels on the equipment ................................................................................... -10
1-6. Using the laser safety .................................................................................................... -14
1-7. Precautions during transport and installation ................................................................. -18
A. Outline
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................ A-1
1-1. For maintenance personnel .............................................................................................. A-1
1-2. Laser maintenance and safety ......................................................................................... A-3
1-3. Basic information .............................................................................................................. A-4
2. System overview ........................................................................................................................ A-7
2-1. System setup diagram ...................................................................................................... A-7
2-2. Recommended configurations .......................................................................................... A-7
3. Overall configuration chart and part names ............................................................................... A-8
3-1. Front view of the main unit ................................................................................................ A-8
3-2. Back view of the main unit ................................................................................................ A-8
3-3. Plate conveyor view of the main unit ................................................................................. A-9
3-4. Peripheral device connectors ........................................................................................... A-9
3-5. Inside of front cover ........................................................................................................ A-10
3-6. Inside of rear cover ......................................................................................................... A-10
4. Electrical wiring ........................................................................................................................ A-11
4-1. Block diagram ................................................................................................................. A-11
4-2. Function of board ........................................................................................................... A-12
5. Specifications .......................................................................................................................... A-14
5-1. Basic specifications ........................................................................................................ A-14
6. Comparison of PT-R4300, PT-R4000 and PT-R4000II .............................................................. A-16
7. Restriction of the plate size for the PT-R4300/4000/4000II ....................................................... A-21
B. Installation
1. Installation ................................................................................................................................. B-1
1-1. Information required for adjustments during installation .................................................... B-1
1-2. Installation schedule ......................................................................................................... B-2
2. Installation conditions ................................................................................................................. B-3
2-1. Dimensions of delivery path ............................................................................................. B-3
2-2. Dimensions when delivering the machine ......................................................................... B-4
2-3. Dimensions when the machine is installed ....................................................................... B-7
2-4. Installation space and layout position ............................................................................. B-13
2-5. Environmental conditions ............................................................................................... B-18
2-5-1. Temperature and humidity ....................................................................................... B-18
2-5-2. Floor load capacity .................................................................................................. B-19
2-5-3. Floor levelness ........................................................................................................ B-19
2-5-4. Vibrations ................................................................................................................ B-19
PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL
Contents
2-5-5. Room cleanliness .................................................................................................... B-19
2-6. Power requirements ....................................................................................................... B-20
2-7. Cable and hose lengths .................................................................................................. B-21
3. About transportation ................................................................................................................ B-22
3-1. Transporting the main unit using 1a forklift (or similar equipment) .................................. B-22
3-2. Transporting the main unit by hoisting it .......................................................................... B-22
4. Installation procedure ............................................................................................................... B-23
4-1. Packing list check ........................................................................................................... B-23
4-2. Assembly........................................................................................................................ B-23
4-2-1. Installation of the PT-R4300 ..................................................................................... B-23
4-2-2. Removing the transport fixing brackets ................................................................... B-24
4-2-3. Adjusting the levelness ............................................................................................ B-32
4-3. Connection ..................................................................................................................... B-33
4-3-1. Connecting the blower hose and gas suction hose .................................................. B-33
4-3-2. Connecting the blower unit control cable ................................................................. B-34
4-3-3. Connecting an auto loader to the PT-R4300(option) ................................................ B-37
4-4. Start of the machine ....................................................................................................... B-40
4-5. Initial settings ................................................................................................................. B-42
4-5-1. Outline for panel settings ......................................................................................... B-42
4-5-2. Setting the media type ............................................................................................. B-43
4-5-3. Setting the plate ...................................................................................................... B-47
4-5-4. Setting the printing machine information ................................................................. B-50
4-5-5. Setting the exposure conditions ............................................................................... B-55
4-6. Operation check and adjustment .................................................................................... B-57
4-6-1. Checking the registration ......................................................................................... B-57
4-6-2. Confirming plate winding and exposure ................................................................... B-61
4-6-3. Laser calibration ...................................................................................................... B-66
4-7. Exposure adjustment ...................................................................................................... B-67
4-7-1. Adjusting the focus value ......................................................................................... B-68
4-7-2. Adjusting the zoom value ........................................................................................ B-71
4-7-3. Adjusting the light intensity <Reference> ................................................................. B-74
4-7-4. Saving the data ....................................................................................................... B-75
4-7-5. Test exposure .......................................................................................................... B-76
4-7-6. Other test exposure methods .................................................................................. B-80
4-8. Other settings ................................................................................................................. B-83
4-8-1. Setting the exposure maintenance .......................................................................... B-83
4-8-2. User settings ........................................................................................................... B-85
4-9. Exposure check .............................................................................................................. B-97
5. Punch attachment(option) ........................................................................................................ B-98
5-1. Attachment ..................................................................................................................... B-98
5-2. Setting the punch name (Service menu) ...................................................................... B-100
5-3. Setting the punch name (Main menu) ........................................................................... B-102
5-4. Tilt correction method ................................................................................................... B-104
6. Relocation .............................................................................................................................. B-106
7. Installation check sheet .......................................................................................................... B-111
C. Replacement & Adjustment

1. Main belt replacement ............................................................................................................... C-1
ii
Contents
2. Encoder replacement ................................................................................................................ C-4
3. Adjusting the automatic balancer weight detection sensors ...................................................... C-7
4. Removing the trailing edge clamps ........................................................................................... C-9
5. Attaching the trailing edge clamps .......................................................................................... C-10
6. Replacement procedure for the trailing edge clamp arm drive motor(M20) ............................. C-13
7. Adjusting the trailing edge clamp arm origin and end sensors ................................................ C-15
8. Adjusting the leading edge clamp open/close sensors ............................................................ C-18
9. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the plate side edge detection sensors for side
alignment(PH61H, PH61A) ................................................................................................. C-20
10. Adjusting the trailing edge clamp hook sensor ...................................................................... C-26
11. Adjusting the hook lever switch ............................................................................................. C-29
12. Sensor for detecting an interleaf on the back of the plate(PH51) .......................................... C-31
13. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the plate top side detection sensors
(PH29H,PH29A) ................................................................................................................ C-32
14. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the drum vacuum pressure sensor(P1) ............ C-35
15. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the plate sensor(PH6)
(2 plate wind, or float)(Ser.No.-100) .................................................................................... C-36
16. Balancer weight replacement procedure ............................................................................... C-40
17. Balancer motor unit replacement procedure ......................................................................... C-41
18. Balancer sensor replacement procedure .............................................................................. C-41
19. Path driving motor replacement procedure ........................................................................... C-42
20. Squeeze roller height adjustment .......................................................................................... C-43
21. Loading Guide (1) Replacement and Adjustment .................................................................. C-46
22. PT-R4300 Ball screw for Sub-scanning Replacement Procedure .......................................... C-48
23. Countermeasure against registration deviation in PT-R4300 ................................................. C-53
24. Countermeasures for Registration Deviation on PT-R4300(additional information) ............... C-62
25. Procedure for replacing the PT-R4XXX transfer path spring .................................................. C-65
26. Procedure for replacing the LD block .................................................................................... C-68
27. Procedure for replacing and adjusting the power supply ....................................................... C-71
28. Procedure for replacing and adjusting the pulse motor driver ............................................... C-71
29. Procedure for replacing the AC servo driver(E1A) ................................................................ C-73
30. Procedure for replacing and setting the inverter (U8) for the suction blower ......................... C-74
31. Plocedure for replacing the RCP2 board ............................................................................... C-77
D. Operation panel
1. Screen flow diagram (PT-R4000:Ver) ........................................................................................ D-1
1-1. Main menu (when PT-R8600 is used independently) ....................................................... D-1
1-2. Main menu (when SA-L/MA-L is connected) ................................................................... D-4
1-3. Service menu .................................................................................................................. D-5
2. Startup of the main unit without performing initialization ......................................................... D-10
3. Detailed descriptions of the Service/Maintenance screens ..................................................... D-11
3-1. How to enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen .................................................... D-11
3-2. Service/Maintenance Menu screens ............................................................................. D-12
3-3. Sensor Test screens ...................................................................................................... D-14
3-4. Actuator Test screens .................................................................................................... D-19
3-5. Drum Test screens ........................................................................................................ D-24
3-6. Pulse Motor Test screens .............................................................................................. D-26
iii
Contents
3-7. Recording Head Unit Test screens ................................................................................ D-29
3-7-1. Zero Return screen for recording head unit/focus motor/zoom motor ..................... D-31
3-7-2. Positioning screens for recording head unit/focus motor/zoom motor ..................... D-32
3-7-3. Peltier Test screen .................................................................................................. D-33
3-7-4. Laser Calibration screen ........................................................................................ D-34
3-7-5. LD ON screen ........................................................................................................ D-36
3-7-6. Calibration Position screen ..................................................................................... D-38
3-7-7. Moving to Calibration Position screen ..................................................................... D-39
3-7-8. Temperature Display screen ................................................................................... D-40
3-7-9. Laser Power Measurement and Cable Disconnection Check screen ...................... D-41
3-7-10. Iop/-Iop screen ....................................................................................................... D-44
3-8. Input Parameter screen ................................................................................................. D-45
3-8-1. Correction Data Setting screens ............................................................................. D-47
3-8-2. Preset Plate Type Setting screen ............................................................................ D-49
3-8-3. Drum Base Position Setting screen ........................................................................ D-50
3-8-4. Drum Position Setting screen ................................................................................. D-52
3-8-5. Punch Adjustment screen ...................................................................................... D-54
3-8-6. Calibration Sensor Position Adjustment screen ...................................................... D-55
3-8-7. Punch Data Setting screen ..................................................................................... D-56
3-8-8. Recording Head Parameter Setting screens .......................................................... D-57
3-8-9. Drum Parameters Input screen .............................................................................. D-73
3-8-10. Miscellaneous Data Setting screen ........................................................................ D-80
3-8-11. Recording Head Data Control screen ..................................................................... D-81
3-8-12. Clamp Weight Setting screen ................................................................................. D-82
3-8-13. Cassette Data Setting screen ................................................................................. D-83
3-8-14. Password Setting screen ........................................................................................ D-86
3-9. Machine Option Selecting screen .................................................................................. D-87
3-10. I/O Reading and Writing screen ..................................................................................... D-88
3-11. Initialization screens ...................................................................................................... D-89
3-11-1. Data initialization .................................................................................................... D-90
3-11-2. Brand Name Selection screen ................................................................................ D-91
3-11-3. Consumable Timer screen ..................................................................................... D-92
3-12. Special Action screen .................................................................................................... D-94
3-12-1. Machine Initialization screen .................................................................................. D-95
3-12-2. Pickup Clamp, Trailing Edge Clamp Attachment screen ......................................... D-96
3-12-3. ORG-EZ Check screen .......................................................................................... D-97
3-12-4. Front Sensor Offset screen .................................................................................... D-98
3-12-5. Centering Test screen ............................................................................................. D-99
3-12-6. Adjust Displacement Sensor screen ...................................................................... D-100
3-12-7. NVRAM Backup screen .........................................................................................D-101
3-12-8. NVRAM Data Restore screen ............................................................................... D-102
3-12-5. Register Test screen .............................................................................................. D-103
3-13. Special Action 2 screens .............................................................................................. D-104
3-13-1. Machine Initialization screen .................................................................................D-105
3-13-2. Balancer Testing screen ........................................................................................ D-106
3-13-3. Mail Testing screen ................................................................................................D-107
3-13-4. Auto Loader Testing screen ...................................................................................D-108
3-13-5. Plate Pad Unit Testing screen ................................................................................D-110
iv
Contents
3-13-6. Interleaf Pad Unit Testing screen ...........................................................................D-111
3-13-7. Multi Auto Loader Testing screen ...........................................................................D-112
E. Reference
1. Sequence explanations (PT-R4300) .......................................................................................... E-1
1-1. Initialization sequence ...................................................................................................... E-1
1-2. Main processing of initializing ........................................................................................... E-3
1-3. Processing of trans pass initializing .................................................................................. E-4
1-4. Processing of punch sequence ........................................................................................ E-5
1-5. Processing of winding sequence ...................................................................................... E-6
1-6. Discharge sequence ........................................................................................................ E-8
1-7. Drumhigh speed rotating sequence ................................................................................ E-10
1-8. Auto Balance sequence .................................................................................................. E-11
2. Sequence explanations (PT-R4000II) ...................................................................................... E-12
2-1. Initialization sequence .................................................................................................... E-12
2-2. Main processing of initializing ......................................................................................... E-14
2-3. Processing of trans pass initializing ................................................................................ E-15
2-4. Processing of punch sequence ...................................................................................... E-16
2-5. Processing of winding sequence .................................................................................... E-17
2-6. Discharge sequence ...................................................................................................... E-19
2-7. Drumhigh speed rotating sequence ................................................................................ E-21
2-8. Auto Balance sequence .................................................................................................. E-22
3. Parts layout and sensor position .............................................................................................. E-23
3-1. Front side of main unit .................................................................................................... E-23
3-2. Back side of main unit .................................................................................................... E-25
3-3. Left side of main unit ...................................................................................................... E-27
3-4. Rite side of main unit ...................................................................................................... E-29
3-5. Top side of main unit ....................................................................................................... E-31
3-6. Transport unit of main unit .............................................................................................. E-33
3-7. Plate side alignment of main unit .................................................................................... E-34
3-8. Clamp arm unit of main unit ............................................................................................ E-34
3-9. Recording Head unit ....................................................................................................... E-35
3-10. RCP2 board ................................................................................................................... E-36
3-11. RB31 board .................................................................................................................... E-38
3-12. SPX32 board .................................................................................................................. E-39
3-13. PIO-PTR4(2) board ........................................................................................................ E-40
3-14. con-ptr4 board ................................................................................................................ E-44
3-15. Laser Head CPU board .................................................................................................. E-47
3-16. Laser Head Driver board ................................................................................................ E-48
3-17. Laser Head Mother board .............................................................................................. E-49
3-18. Laser Head Relay board ................................................................................................. E-50
3-19. Laser Diode Array Block ................................................................................................. E-52
4. Maintenance software RMLight4 .............................................................................................. E-53
4-1. Outline ............................................................................................................................ E-53
4-2. Requirements ................................................................................................................. E-53
4-3. Terminal setting .............................................................................................................. E-54
4-4. Installation of RMLight4 .................................................................................................. E-54
4-5. Connecting the terminal to the main unit ........................................................................ E-54
Contents
4-6. Procedure for downloading the PT-R firmware ............................................................... E-55
4-7. Procedure for downloading the PT-R panel data ............................................................. E-58
4-8. Uploading or downloading the PT-Rs machine specific value data ................................. E-61
4-8-1. Data types that can be uploaded or downloaded ..................................................... E-61
4-8-2. Procedure for data upload ....................................................................................... E-63
4-8-3. Procedure for data download ................................................................................... E-66
5. Power supplies and interlocks .................................................................................................. E-69
F. Error list
1. Error list (PT-R4300 : Ver.1.00) ................................................................................................... F-1
2. Error list (PT-R4000 : Ver.3.0X , PT-R4000II : Ver4.0X)) ............................................................ F-18
G. Supplement
1. Punch List ................................................................................................................................ G-1
2. Recommend parts list ............................................................................................................ G-12
vi
On safety
On Safety
1. On Safety
1-1.When using the PT-R4XXX
The following descriptions of safety precautions and operating

procedures are intended solely for the benefit of operators and
other personnel using the PT-R4XXX for its originally intended
purposes.
The intended purposes and usage of the PT-R4XXX are those
described in Introductory Note. We shall not be held liable or
responsible for any damage, losses or malfunctions caused by
using or operating this machine in ways other than those
described in this manual.
To the best of our knowledge, the various parameters and data
presented in this manual are reliable under the conditions
described. However, we shall not be held legally responsible for
the accuracy or relevance of this information. Furthermore, we
assume no responsibility or liability for any damage or
consequential and/or indirect losses resulting from any accident or
malfunction that might occur during the operation of the PTR4XXX.
The PT-R4XXX was designed and manufactured with special
attention to safety considerations. However, it is impossible either
to eliminate all potential sources of danger from such products or
to anticipate all possible hazards and misuses. It is therefore
critical that you both familiarize yourself, all your operators and
other relevant personnel with all of the noted precautions,
countermeasures and related procedures, and take maximum
care when operating the PT-R4XXX.
-1
On Safety
1-2.Precautions for electricity
1)
Power supply
Before connecting the PT-R4XXX power cable to your
switchboard, be sure to confirm that the power supply switch is
turned OFF.
When the PT-R4300 is installed overseas, perform proper
grounding in accordance with the regulations of the country of
installation.
If the power for the entire unit cannot be supplied, connect an
exclusive ground wire for the auto loader.
The PT-R4XXX incorporates high-voltage circuits. Touching any
part of your body to such circuits can cause serious injury and
even death. BE EXTREMELY CAREFUL not to touch these
circuits, especially with wet hands.
Whenever you install the PT-R4XXX in Japan, be sure to use the
power cable provided with it.
Power cables are not provided for machines to be shipped abroad.
Depending on the country of installation, be sure to use a power
cable which can handle AC300V or an equivalent rated voltage
and has 3 cable leads of at least 2.0 mm2.
However, if the diameter of each wire rod is 4 mm or larger, the
power supply cable cannot be connected to the power connecting
section of the PT-R4300.
2)
Switching operation of power supply

Before turning ON the power supply switch to the PT-R4XXX, be
sure to confirm the following:
1) The accessories (e.g. supply cassette) are properly mounted
and connection areas (e.g. supply unit) are connected properly
and securely.
2) Doors are completely closed, and covers are attached properly.
Be sure to turn OFF the power supply and fix the power supply
switch using a padlock etc. before you start maintenance, cleaning
or repairs. Switching the power switch to I turns the power ON
and switching it to O turns the power OFF.
-2
On Safety
ON
ON
PT-R4300
OFF
OFF
ON
Power supply switch
OFF
ON
OFF
Power supply switch

PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
-3
On Safety
3)
Power cables
If you find anything that might indicate power cable damage such
as unusual deformations or surface flaws, immediately turn OFF
the power switch and the circuit breaker of the switchboard, and
contact our nearest dealer or branch office.
Do not place heavy objects or articles with sharp edges anywhere
on the power cable or forcefully pull at it.
PT-R4300
4)
Processing after power failures

When a power failure in external electric power occurs,
immediately turn OFF the circuit breaker of the switchboard and
the power switch of the PT-R4XXX.
If a power failure, which is caused by a utility defect, occurs while
the safety interlock release key is being used, turn OFF the
switchboard breaker of the users site.
Since the PT-R4300 is reset in concurrence with shutdown of the
power supply, turn ON the switchboard breaker, which has been
turned OFF, and perform a normal initialization after the power has
been restored.
Be sure that nobody is touching the machine when you perform
initialization with the safety interlock release key ON.
-4
On Safety
5)
Interlocks
To ensure operator safety, the PT-R4XXX is provided with a
variety of interlocking safety devices. Do not deactivate these
devices except when service engineers are performing
maintenance. Operating the PT-R4XXX when these safety
devices are inactive could result in severe injury and/or damage to
the equipment.
If a cover is opened during exposure, the respective rollers stop
automatically. Always wait at least five seconds until the rollers
come to a complete stop before touching them.
Turning ON the safety interlock release key shuts down the power
supply to the laser. However, be aware that power is still supplied
to the moving parts.
While these doors are open, releasing interlocks or performing

control or adjustment procedures other than those specified in this
manual will cause dangerous laser radiation exposure.
Door switch
Door interlock switch
PT-R4300
Front cover interlock switch

Door switch
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
Front cover interlock switch

Door interlock switch
-5
On Safety
Drum slow-down
software switch
Back side cover

interlock switch
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
Right side cover

interlock switch
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
-6
On Safety
6)
Forced drum stop switch

The PT-R4XXX is equipped with a forced drum stop switch that
allows you to stop the rotation of the drum in an emergency.
Do not use this switch during normal operation. this switch is only to
be used if the duum needed to be stopped in case of an emergency.
(PT-R4000,PT-R4000II,PT-R4300)
-7
On Safety
1-3.Precautions for equipment operation
Do not turn on the PT-R4XXXs power supply or start operation

until this manual has been thoroughly read and fully understood.
All operators must wear appropriate work clothing.
Wear clothing that

will not become
caught in the machinery.
Hands are wet.

Long hair is tied
back.
Cuffs are open.
A necktie or necklace
is dangling.
Cuffs are buttoned.
Safety boots are

recommended.
Unneeded things
are carried.
Excessively long pants.
Slippers or sandals.
Whenever you notice anything abnormal, report it immediately to

your supervisor or manager so appropriate measures can be
taken quickly.
The PT-R4XXX cannot be guaranteed to operate continuously
without an operator in attendance. In order to immediately deal
with emergencies, an operator trained for initial corrective action
should always be in attendance.
Training courses for Dainippon Screens products are provided at
any time at the nearest Dainippon Screen Technical Center. We
recommend that all users of the PT-R4XXX receive proper training
before using the equipment. Please contact our branch office or
the dealer for an application for the training courses.
When the PT-R4XXX0 is not operated for a long period of time, be
sure to turn OFF the circuit breaker of the switchboard.
During operation, do not open any protective covers attached to
the equipment. Opening these covers may be hazardous to the
safety of operators and other persons working in the vicinity, and
may also hinder the equipments normal functioning.
Never allow open flames, spark sources, etc. in the vicinity of the
PT-R4XXX.
Do not operate the PT-R4XXX if you feel in any way sick,
nauseous or unsteady.
-8
On Safety
1-4.Maintenance
Maintenance must always be performed by specially trained and

authorized maintenance engineers.
Never turn the machines power on while maintenance engineers
are working on the equipment.
-9
On Safety
1-5.Caution labels on the equipment
Caution labels are attached to potentially hazardous parts or areas

of this machine for the safety of the operators and maintenance
staff.
Be sure to observe the following precautions when you perform
operation or maintenance of the PT-R4XXX.
Be sure to follow the instructions on these labels.
If a label has faded or fallen off, replace it immediately with a new
one.
Do not peel or tear off labels or erase their markings.
For replacement labels, contact your nearest Dainippon Screen
dealer or branch office.
Do not block the visibility of labels by covering or placing anything
in front of them.
Label indicating the power supply specifications of the PT-R4XXX.
(PT-R4000,PT-R4000II,PT-R4300)
Label indicating that the PT-R4XXX complies with CDRH

Regulations. (for U.S.A. only)
-10
On Safety
Label indicating that the PT-R4XXX is a Class 1 laser product.
(PT-R4000,PT-R4000II,PT-R4300)
Label indicating that the PT-R4XXX complies with FCC and

VCCIRules.
(PT-R4000,PT-R4000II,PT-R4300)
Label indicating that the PT-R4XXX complies with CE standards.
(PT-R4000,PT-R4000II,PT-R4300)
-11
On Safety
Label indicating the class, power, and wavelength of laser beam. (n/
a in USA)
(PT-R4000,PT-R4000II,PT-R4300)
Label indicating that this unit contains laser radiation.
(PT-R4000,PT-R4000II,PT-R4300)
Label showing the location of an ground terminal.
(PT-R4000,PT-R4000II,PT-R4300)
Label indicating the technical classification of the laser head (for

U.S.A. only).
(PT-R4000,PT-R4000II,PT-R4300)
-12
On Safety
Label calling attention to a nearby laser aperture.
(PT-R4000,PT-R4000II,PT-R4300)
Label warning that opening this cover may expose you to dangerous
laser radiation.
(PT-R4000,PT-R4000II,PT-R4300)
Label warning that this equipment contains a high leakage current

and mustbe grounded.
(PT-R4000,PT-R4000II,PT-R4300)
-13
On Safety
1-6.Using the laser safety
Notices concerning the safe use of the unit.
These must be following to avoid injuries and accidents.
1)
LASER SAFETY
This PT-R4XXX is certified as a Class4 laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation
Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health
and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the recorder does not
produce hazardous laser radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the PT-R4XXX is completely confined
with in protective housings and external covers. The laser beam can
not escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.
2)
CDRH REGULATIONS
The Center for Devices and Radiological Heanh (CDRH) of the U.S.
Food and Drug Adminstration implemented regulations for laser
pfoducts on August 2.1976.These regulations apply to laser products
manufactured from August1. 1976.
Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United
States.
The label shown in the figure indicates compliance with the CDRH
regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the
United States.
Ordinafy operation will not release laser radiation into the work
environment. Do not remove any of the safety covers for this product
or release any of its interlock switches.
Laser radiation may cause injuries to your body (e. g. weakened
eyesight, skin cancer).
3)
For European model

PT-R4XXX is classified as a CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT in
accordance with IEC Pub 1. 1 825 1984.
Ordinary operation will not release laser radiation into the work
environment. Do not remove any of the safey covers for this product
or release any of its interlock switches.
Laser radiation may cause injuries to your body (e. g. weakened
eyesight, skin cancer).
-14
On Safety
INTERNAL LASER REGULATIONS
Max. radiation power------------------------------32W
Wavelength---------------------------------------830nm
The rating for the semi-conductor laser is 1W X32 pieces and is
classified as Class 1.
You will not be exposed to laser beam radiation during ordinary
operation.
If the doors shown in the figure below are opened, the interlock
switches located in the respective positions (six places) are
activated to intercept laser beams.
-15
On Safety
-16
On Safety
-17
On Safety
1-7.Precautions during transport and installation
1)
Transport and installation

The PT-R4XXXs transport and installation must always be handled
by engineers and contractors authorized by Dainippon Screen. We
shall bear no responsibility whatever for any equipment breakage,
damage or malfunctions caused by or during transport or installation
performed by anyone other than the above specified personnel.
Whenever the PT-R4XXX must moved, transferred or re-installed,
please entrust all procedures to our nearest branch office or dealer.
(See list at the end of this manual.)
2)
Installation environment
Installing the equipment in the following locations may cause
machine damage or malfunctions. Do not install the machine
anywhere that is exposed or subject to:
direct sunlight;
electrical interference such as voltage fluctuations or line noise;
sudden, drastic temperature changes;
a nearby heat source;
high temperature and/or humidity (adequate temperature:21C to
25C (73.4F 3.6), adequate humidity: 40 to 70 %RH);
excessive dirt, grime or dust;
strong and/or persistent vibration;
dew condensation;
nearby flame or spark sources;
corrosive chemical vapors, mists or gasses;
limsy or uneven flooring.
High Temperature and humidity
-18
Vibration
On Safety
3)
Grounding connection
Be sure to connect the ground line before connecting the power
supply, since leakage current is over 3.5 mA in the PT-R4XXX.
To help prevent electric shocks, be sure to independently ground
the AC outlet in the specified manner (grounding resistance: 100
or less). Wire the power separately from other equipment.
The cable connecting the machine to the outlet should have
sufficient capacity to prevent voltage drops in either the steadystate current or the starting current.
To forestall other possible problems in the PT-R4XXXs electrical
system, always use fuses and circuit breakers that match its
specifications.
Please ask your electrical contractor or authorized personnel to
help select appropriate parts and wiring configurations.
When the PT-R4300 is installed overseas, perform proper
grounding in accordance with the regulations of the country of
installation.
If the power for the entire unit cannot be supplied, connect an
exclusive ground wire for the auto loader.
4)
Power supply
Please entrust all wiring, connections and other electrical work to
an authorized electrician.
The PT-R4XXX requires a dedicated power supply that should not
serve any other machines or devices.
Always provide circuit breakers for the power supply switchboard.
The permitted fluctuation range in the power supply voltage is
10%.
If you anticipate a greater range of fluctuation than this, stabilize
the power supply with an appropriate voltage regulator.
Be sure to install the ground leakage breaker in the power supply
switchboard.
Use the ground leakage breaker for 5 mA leakage (dark current) in
accordance with the rated current of the PT-R4XXX.
Check that the ground leakage breaker turns ON before starting
operation after weekends or vacations.
However, if the diameter of each wire rod is 4 mm or larger, the
power supply cable cannot be connected to the power connecting
section of the PT-R4300.
-19
A. Outline
A.Outline
1. Introduction
1-1.For maintenance personnel
1) Basic cautions
Before doing any electrical work, be sure to turn OFF the power supply
switch and fix the power OFF status by using a padlock, etc., in order to
prevent accidents such as electrical shock.
Pay attention to your surroundings when working with this unit.
Do not touch any moving parts during operation.
2) About laser safety
Make sure the interlock safety devices are all in place when the user is
operating this unit.
Tell the user not to attempt to modify the laser for any reason.
All responsibility for any changes in safety standards due to changes to
the class of laser used are the responsibility of the party who altered the
machine.
For example, if the user has altered the laser, the user bears
responsibility. If the CS department of a branch office altered the laser,
the CS department bears responsibility.
3) Cautions about chemicals
Be sure to handle lens cleaners and isopropyl alcohol properly.
4) Cautions concerning static electricity
Use an anti-static wristband and anti-static bags to prevent the buildup of
static electricity when handling or transporting parts such as circuit
boards or laser diodes, which can easily be damaged by static electricity.
5) About the laser diode
The PT-R4XXX uses a high-output semiconductor laser. If procedures
and safety guidelines are not followed correctly, the radiation from the
laser diode may injure your eyes. Note that the laser diode can be
damaged by static electricity.
The laser diode is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Damage to

it from static electricity may result in a shortening of the lasers
service life.
A-1
A.Outline
6) Safety measures to prevent static electricity buildup
Before turning on the power supply, always make sure the power supply
is properly grounded.
Wear an anti-static wristband to avoid any buildup of static electricity on
your body.
Wear semiconductor laser radiation shaded safety goggles (glasses) to
protect your eyes.
7) Safety and static electricity buildup prevention equipment
To maintain safety and prevent the excessive buildup of static electricity,
make sure you have the following tools.
Anti-static wristband.
Semiconductor laser radiation shaded safety goggles (glasses)
Laser type : Laser Diode
Wavelength : 790 to 850
NOTE!
In the PT-R4300, PT-R4000, and PT-R4000II, there are no operations
that require the use of safety goggles.
A-2
A.Outline
1-2.Laser maintenance and safety
1) Under normal conditions
When all of the metal plates encasing the PT-R4XXX are in place, the
entire machine can be thought of as a single area. Anything within that
area is within the laser work area, while anything outside it is outside the
laser work area.
All of the metal plates are fitted with interlock devices that shut off
power to the laser if the plates are removed, preventing the laser from
turning on unexpectedly. This means that only the mildest laser safety
standards, Class 1, are required.
2) While performing maintenance with metal plates removed
After removing the covers and disabling the interlocks, the entire room in
which the PT-R4XXX is housed should be considered a laser work area.
This means that laser safety standards for CLASS 4 units must be
followed.
NOTE!
In the PT-R4300, PT-R4000, and PT-R4000II, there are no exposure
operations that are performed while the metal plates are removed
and the interlocks are released.
3) When working with the laser and related parts
When focusing or optically adjusting the laser, follow the rules indicated
below.
Do not bring any flammable objects into the laser work area.
Do not place any objects with a reflective surface near the path of
the laser beam. (e.g. rings, watches, glossy or shiny plated Allen
wrenches)
In order to shrink your pupils, make the room as bright as possible.
Use semiconductor laser radiation safety goggles (glasses).
Display a sign limiting entry to the laser area to those working on
the laser, in order to prevent accidents to other personnel.
NOTE!
In the PT-R4300, PT-R4000, and PT-R4000II, no laser operations are
performed while the power is being supplied.
A-3
A.Outline
1-3.Basic information
1) Not if or when, but which . . .
Dainippon Screen has developed the CTP products and introduced them to
the market in 1999. These products have gained wide market acceptance
because of their superior quality as well as their user-friendliness, and we
have shipped more than 1100 of the PT-R8000 and PT-R4000 units within
two years.
For the PT-R4000 units, not only is there a thermal CTP market in Japan
but the sale ratio of these units has also been significantly expanded over
seas.
The PT-R4000 unit that is compatible with the SM-74CD sheet-fed press
that is used in the package industry in U.S. is needed in order to expand
product sales. Therefore, we have improved the specifications of the
PT-R4000II and developed the PT-R4300 advanced thermal 4-page plate
recorder.
2) The perfect recorder for thermal
Though CTP started with light-sensitive plates, thermal plates are clearly
the up and coming media of choice. They offer crisper, sharper dots,
dont require darkroom processing, and support longer run lengths.
PlateRite 8600 is the perfect recorder to reap all the benefits of thermal
imaging.
3) Reap the thermal advantage with PlateRite 4300
While visible-light CTP requires a dark room or special processing,
thermal plates are imaged with heat rather than light so they can be
handled under yellow or ultraviolet-filtered white light. PlateRite 4300s
advanced optical and clamping system images thermal plates with
superior productivity, versatility and ease of use. Its advanced plate
securing and auto-balance features allow for extremely fast rotation
speeds and high productivity. And PlateRite 4300s ease of use,
automation and user friendly interface make it a snap to use.
4) Try speed
Weve broken the mold. Our external drum spins not just a little faster,
but many times faster than conventional external drum plate recorders.
PlateRite 4300s plate securing system allows much faster spin speeds.
Automatic variable positioning of trailing edge clamps means that a wide
range of plate sizes can be accomodated automatically.
A-4
A.Outline
5) Fast external drum with multi-channel recording
Because of the level of heat required to image thermal plates, the light
source has to either have a lot of power or be very close to the plate.
External drum recorders can position the light source close to the plate,
but up to now, drum speeds have been limited by the difficulty of
securing the plates well enough to tolerate higher rotation speeds.
But now weve built on our expertise in external drum recording and
precision clamping technologies to bring you a 32-channel external drum
recorder with a difference - the drum spins many times faster than
conventional external drum plate recorders. Thats how we can offer
thermal plate output productivity of 20 plates per hour at 2,400 dpi.
An advanced, automated, light-weight clamping and vacuum system is
the secret of PlateRite 4300s superior speed and productivity. This
system keeps plates fully secure even at the PlateRite 4300s rapid
rotation speeds. As the drum spins at up to 1000 rpms, the laser images in
32-channels creating the ultimate in thermal productivity.
6) Auto-balance to fit different plate sizes
The PlateRite 4300 is designed to fit smoothly into your workflow. Autobalance enables recording of different sized plates with no manual
adjustment. All you do is input or select the type of plate you want to use
and the PlateRite 8600 automatically makes the necessary adjustments to
create perfect drum balance for each plate size you use. It can handle a
wide variety of plate sizes, from 370 x 500mm (14.6" x 19.7") all the way
up to 940 x 1,160 mm (37" x 45.6"), making it easy to tailor plate output
to the job at hand.
7) Automatic internal punch
The PlateRite 4300 can even punch your plates for you just before
imaging, with your choice of optional internal punch block systems that
provide exceptional repeatability. You can mount four punch blocks and
select punches based on plate sizes and press type. A variety of suitable
punches are available. The PlateRite 4300 can change between two
punch configurations automatically as required by the automatic media
settings.
8) Inline system to extend automation
An inline system can be configured which fully automates the stages
involved from plate loading and exposing, through to developing.
The SA-L4300 single-cassette auto loader can hold up to 100 plates. It
automatically detects interleaves between the plates and discharges them.
Also, each plate is secured on its back side when being transferred,
therefore, the sensitive emulsion side of the plate is not damaged.
A-5
A.Outline
The MA-L4300 multi-cassette auto loader contains three cassettes and
each cassette can hold up to 100 plates. It achieves a continuous operation
of multiple jobs that require the use of different sizes of plate.
The AT-T4000 transfer system that bridges the PT-R4300 unit and the
processor is also provided as an option of this system lineup.
A-6
A.Outline
2. System overview
2-1.System setup diagram
F-PIF
Trueflow
Taiga SPACE
HQ-510
The PT-R4300 is connected to the host computer by means of a F-PIF cable. For Macintosh
systems, page files (PS data) created by software on the computer are converted to bit map data
using a software RIP such as HQ-510, and transmitted on-line to the PT-R 4300.
2-2.Recommended configurations
[Trueflow]
Ver. 2.01
[Taiga SPACE]
Ver. 4.3 Rev.k or higher (T-RIP600)
[HQ-510]
Ver. 5.5
[AD-810]
Ver. 1.03
For details on the specifications of each RIP, refer to the respective installation
guides.
A-7
A.Outline
3. Overall configuration chart and part names

3-1.Front view of the main unit
Operation door
Operation panel
Front cover
External cover filter
3-2.Back view of the main unit
Punch debris outlet

Rear outlet
Peripheral
device
connectors
Vacuum hose connector

Attachment hook for punch
debris receptacle
Rear cover
Power cable connector
A-8
A.Outline
3-3.Plate conveyor view of the main unit
Positioning label
Operation door
Ejection guide
Plate conveyor rollor
Ejection table
Power switch
Plate table
Positioning label
3-4.Peripheral device connectors

F-PIF connector(serial)
F-PIF connector(image)
Service connector
Blower control connector

AT unit connector
Power supply connector
for blower
A-9
A.Outline
3-5.Inside of front cover
Recording drum
Recording head unit
Front cover attachment hooks
3-6.Inside of rear cover

Cleaning roller
Punching unit(Standard)
Rear cover attachment hooks
Recording drum
Rear cover attachment hooks
A-10
A.Outline
4. Electrical wiring
4-1.Block diagram
C O N -P T R 4
P IO - P T R 4 (2 )
or
P IO - P T R 4
PC
R S -2 3 2 C
A C S e rvo
D r iv e r
R S -2 3 2 C
RCP2
C al
R S -2 3 2 C
B o a rd
Laser
H ead
U n it
P IF 2
RB31
HOST
CPU
D RV 4pc
P IF 1
SPX
32
R S -2 3 2 C
P anel
A-11
A.Outline
4-2.Function of board
1) RCP2 board
The RCP2 board contains the CPU and its peripheral devices. It also
controls the secondary-scanning stepping motor. The secondaryscanning stepping motor can operate in two different modes; the
synchronous mode (in which the secondary-scanning stepping motor
operates synchronously with the primary-scanning servo motor when the
image is being exposed) and high speed positioning mode (in which the
secondary-scanning stepping motor moves to a position at a high speed
independent of the operation of the primary-scanning servo motor). The
RCP2 board also contains the devices to implement various adjustments
synchronously with the signal from the encoder and generate various
timing signals for exposing image on plate.
2) RB31 board
Receives the image data via the F-PIF. When the board receives enough
data to rotate the drum once, it transmits the data to the high-power laser
recording head along with the standard signal for exposure. The board
also contains the devices for using the machine setting test patterns and
applying automatic burn-out to plate.
3) SPX32 board
This board helps compensate for image inclination during spiral
exposure. This board allows you to switch PIF signal transmissions
between 8 and 16 bit signals.
4) PIO-PTR4(2) board / PIO-PYR4 board
Controls the primary-scanning servo motor, each sensor and actuator.
The control section for the primary-scanning servo motor operates in one
of two modes; the drum rotation mode (at high speed) used while
exposing the image and the drum positioning mode (at low speed) used
when loading and unloading a plate on the drum. The I/O control section
controls each stepping motor (which is used to transfer a plate), the input
signals (for switches and sensors) and the output signals (for driving
solenoids and punch system).
5) CON-PTR4 boards
Relays the signals to and from each sensor and actuator. This board also
converts the actuators control signal into 24V.
A-12
A.Outline
6) Laser head CPU board
Equipped with circuits for controlling the high-power laser diode. This
board also controls the zoom and focus of the recording head, and the
temperature of the Peltier unit.
7) Laser head driver board
Feeds back the light intensity output from the high-power laser to the
laser head CPU board.
A-13
A.Outline
5. Specifications
5-1.Basic specifications
A-14
A.Outline
A-15
A.Outline
6. Comparison of PT-R4300, PT-R4000 and PT-R4000II
A-16
A.Outline
A-17
A.Outline
A-18
A.Outline
Reference) Parts code of the leading edge clamp
PT-R4300 (standard 15 mm type)
U1254046-00
U1254058-00
Refer to the next pate.

PT-R4300(optional 12 mm type)
100030544V00
NOTE! The leading edge clamps for the PT-R4000/4000II are the same as to those
for U1254046-00 of the PT-R4300 (15 mm type).
Reference) Leading edge clamp and clamp pin unit
PT-R4000/4000II
Pin diameter : 3.5mm
15mm/12mm
15mm
8.925mm
PT-R4300(15mm Type)
Pin diameter : 3mm
12mm
Cut
15mm
8.125mm
PTR4300(12mmType)
Pin diameter : 3mm
12mm
Cut
12mm
8.125mm
A-19
A.Outline
Reference) Plate stopper unit
For 15 mm type
(PT-R4300/4000/4000II)
For 12 mmtype
(PT-R4300)
A-20
A.Outline
7. Restriction of the plate size for the PT-R4300/4000/4000II
- When the ends of a plate reach the grooves for securing the trailing edge clamps on the drum, an
imaging failure may occur in the effective image area of the plate at the circled positions in the
figure below (each corner of the leading and trailing gripper margins). Therefore, the size of plate to
be used is restricted, as below. (Common restriction to any thickness of the plate)
Restricted plate sizes:
420 mm to 442 mm
702 mm to 722 mm
The plate size is restricted only in the secondary scanning direction and the size in the primary
scanning direction is not restricted.
- We have confirmed that none of those presses in the following list use plates with the restricted
sizes.
A-21
A.Outline
List of the presses that are compatible with the PT-R4000 (sheet-fed presses)
A-22
A.Outline
A-23
A.Outline
A-24
A.Outline
A-25
B. Installation
B.Installation
1. Installation
1-1.Information required for adjustments during installation
The specification of the standard of the leading grip margin and the trailing grip margin of PTR4000(II) and PT-R4300 is as follows.
The leading grip margin : 15mm
The trailing grip margin : 12mm
However, PT-R4300 can set the leading grip margin to 12mm as a factory option.
Before installing the machine, check the items listed below.
Manufacturer
Plate information
Punch system
Plate length (L)
Plate thickness
BACHER (single)/BACHER (double)/KOMORI/DS/PROTOCOL/

custom specification
Pitch of pin (P)

Edge of plate (E)
Leading grip margin (G1)
Trailing grip margin (G2)
Printing machine
Manufacturer and model
of printing machine
Printable area
Manufacturer
Plate information
Punch system
Plate width (W)
Plate width (W)
Plate length (L)
Plate thickness
BACHER (single)/BACHER (double)/KOMORI/DS/PROTOCOL/

custom specification
Pitch of pin (P)

Edge of plate (E)
Leading grip margin (G1)
Trailing grip margin (G2)
Printing machine
Manufacturer and model
of printing machine
Printable area
L
G2
Image
G1
B-1
B.Installation
1-2.Installation schedule
Installation:
Approx. 3 hours
Wiring and connection:

Machine stand-alone operation checks:
Approx. 1 hour
Approx. 1 hour
Exposure adjustment:
Approx. 3 hours
Check and adjustment of connection with host computer:Approx. 6 hours
B-2
Explanation of operation and safety:

Punch attachment (option)
Approx. 2 hours
(Approx. 2 hours)
Total:
Approx. 2 days
B.Installation
2. Installation conditions
2-1.Dimensions of delivery path
A delivery path of at least the following dimensions is required when delivering the machine to
the installation site.
Width
1760mm or more
1760mm or more
1405mm or more
1405mm or more
PT-R4000(II)
PT-R4300
SA-L/MA-L4000
SA-L/MA-L4300
Depth
1150mm or more
1150mm or more
1185mm or more
1230mm or more
Height
1185mm or more
1185mm or more
1020mm or more
1065mm or more
It is the above-mentioned dimensions at the standard installation. Refer to the following

page for the minimum dimensions of the machine.
2-2.Dimensions when delivering the machine

The following gives the dimensions of the main unit and the blower unit when delivering the
machine to the installation site.
Main unit
Blower unit
Main unit
Blower unit
PT-R4000(II)
PT-R4300
SA-L4000
MA-L4000
Loading unit
Cassete Unit
(Weight contains
three cassettes.)
SA-L4300
MA-L4300
Loading unit
Cassete Unit
(Weight contains
three cassettes.)
Width(mm)
1750
600
1750
600
1395
1395
Depth(mm)
1140
429
1140
429
1175
1175
Height(mm)
1173
361
1173
361
1010
1010
Weight(kg)
Approx. 630
Approx. 30
Approx. 645
Approx. 30
Approx. 340
Approx. 375
1195
1175
695
Approx. 390
1395
1395
1217
1217
1055
1055
Approx. 340
Approx. 375
1195
1175
695
Approx. 390
In order for PT-R4000/PT-R4000II to prevent parts becoming useless, the order method
of PT-R was as follows.
In PT-R4000 stand alone, please order PT-R4000 and a coating apron (onerous).
However, when connecting PT-R4000 and SA-L/MA-L4000, it is not necessary to order a coating apron part. (s/n:101 onward)
Since there are few parts which become unnecessary when connecting PT-R4300 SAL/MA-L4300, there are no above order forms.
B-3
B.Installation
The following gives the minimum dimensions of the machine when delivering the machine to
the installation site.
PT-R4000(II)
PT-R4300
SA-L/MA-L4000
SA-L/MA-L4300
Width(mm)
1750
1750
1330(*4)
1130(*4)
Depth(mm)
905(*1)
905(*1)
1160(*4)
1160(*4)
Height(mm)
1000(*2)
1000(*3)
990(*4,5)
990(*4,6)
1) The depth given above is for when the front cover, the rear cover, the apron and the
hoist attachments are removed from the machine.
The depth when removing only the hoist attachments is as follows,
PT-R4000(II) : 1030mm
PT-R4300 : 1030mm
2) The height given above is for when the operation panel, the casters and adjustment
bolts are removed from the machine.
3) The height given above is for when the operation panel, the operation door, the
casters and adjustment bolts are removed from the machine.
4) When removing all covers around of the machine.
5) The height given above is for when the casters and adjustment bolts are removed
from the machine.
6) The height given above is for when the paper cover(top), the casters and adjustment bolts are removed from the machine.
When moving the machine, the main unit must not be tilted.
There is a punch unit in the rear of a machine. Therefore, when you installate a PTR4000/4300, please do not remove a back cover.
B-4
B.Installation
1140
1750
1030
1178
1000
905
(mm)
Dimensional drawing of PT-R4000/PT-R4000II(At the time of installation)

1140
1750
1030
1178
1000
905
(mm)
Dimensional drawing of PT-R4300(At the time of installation)
429
361
600
Dimensional drawing of Blower unit (At the time of installation)

(Common to PT-R4000, PT-R4000II, and PT-R4300)
B-5
B.Installation
1395
1217
The paper cover

(top)
1160
990
1055
1330
Dimensional drawing of SA-L4300/MA-L4300 Loading unit (At the time of installation)
1175
1195
695
1185
MA-L4300 Cassete unit (At the time of installation)
B-6
B.Installation
2-3.Dimensions when the machine is installed
PT-R4000(II)
Width:
1750 mm
Depth:
1030 mm
Height (* 1): 1178 mm (* 2 Max. 1550 mm)
1) The height given above is from the casters.

2) This dimension is the maximum height when the door is open.
Main unit power

cable connection
(mm)
1178
125
235
160
1750
1500
75
125
Main unit power cable insertion port
125
240
400
Blower hose
connection
240
Cable connection
1030
97.5
655
107.5
350
1550
Dimensional drawing of PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
B-7
B.Installation
PT-R4300
Width:
Depth:
1750 mm
1030 mm
Height (* 1): 1178 mm (* 2 Max. 1537 mm)
1) The height given above is from the casters.

2) This dimension is the maximum height when the door is open.
(mm)
1178
335
Main unit power

cable connection
125
250
145
Optional power
cable connection
Main unit power cable
insertion port
200
Optional power cable

insertion port
1750
1500
125
75
160
125
240
400
Blower hose
connection
240
Cable connection
1030
97.5
655
107.5
350
1537
Dimensional drawing of PT-R4300
B-8
B.Installation
Blower unit (Common to PT-R4000, PT-R4000II, and PT-R4300)
Width : 429 mm, Depth : 600 mm, Height : 391 mm
600
429
361
Blower hose connection
Blower control cable connection
40
130
210
Blower unit power cable connection

(mm)
Dimensional drawing of Blower unit
SA-L4300
1395
1775
1217
389
1055
1175
230
920
550
600
52
1044
130
Dimensional drawing of SA-L4300
B-9
B.Installation
81
1044
640
52
1175
1217
1775
389
MA-L4300
135
135 305
575
1055
695
550
1040
600
2590
216
1325
1038
71
1175
Dimensional drawing of MA-L4300
B-10
B.Installation
SA-L4000
MA-L4000
B-11
B.Installation
(when attaching/
detaching)
AT-T4000
B-12
B.Installation
2-4.Installation space and layout position
Be sure to secure spaces as follows so that the machine can be operated and maintenance can be
performed.
429
200
Blower unit control cable (2m)

Blower unit power cable (2m)
Blower hose (2m)
800
1750
1000
1000
1030
800
600
200
200
(mm)
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II layout
429
200
Blower unit control cable (2m)

Blower unit power cable (2m)
Blower hose (2m)
800
1750
1000
1000
1030
800
600
200
200
(mm)
PT-R4300 layout
B-13
B.Installation
835
1080
[Reference]Stocker
[Reference]PD-T1094
AT-T4000
10
1120
32
1130
1750
PT-R4000
518
860
6300
10
190
1175
275
SA-L4000
80
610
Min.800
Min.1500
1110
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II, SA-L4000 layout
B-14
B.Installation
835
1080
[Reference]Stocker
[Reference]PD-T1094
518
1115
PT-R4000
860
6330
10
190
AT-T4000
965
10
1120
32
1130
2865
MA-L4000
1175
275
640
Min.1000
Min.
1000
1110
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II, MA-L4000 layout
B-15
B-16
275
1750
1110
1080
B.Installation
190
80
Min.1500
PT-R4300, SA-L4300 layout
Min.800
965
610
1175
1217
SA-L4300
518
860
10
985
PT-R4300
6300
10
32
835
1120
AT-T4000
[Reference]PD-T1094
1130
[Reference]Stocker
275
Min.1000
1110
2865
1080
190
B.Installation
1115
PT-R4300, MA-L4300 layout
Min.
1000
965
640
1175
1217
MA-L4300
518
860
10
985
PT-R4300
B-17
6330
10
32
835
1120
AT-T4000
[Reference]PD-T1094
1130
[Reference]Stocker
B.Installation
2-5. Environmental conditions
2-5-1.Temperature and humidity
Operating temperature range:
18C to 26C (with no sudden temperature change

within a short period)
Optimum operating temperature range: 21C to 25C

Operating humidity range:
40% to 70% (with no condensation)
Storage temperature range:
Storage humidity range:
10C to 40C
25% to 75% (with no condensation)
The following describes the calorific values of the machine. Refer to the following values when
arranging air conditioning facilities for the room where the machine is located.
Including SAL/MA-L
Including blower
unit
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
PT-R4300
14.4J(3440kcal/13.6kBTU)
10.9kJ(2600kcal/11.4kBTU)
10.9kJ(2600kcal/11.4kBTU)
SA-L4000/4300 : 3612kJ (860kcal, 3400BTU)

MA-L4000/4300 : 2604kJ (620kcal, 2460BTU)
AT-T4000
: 251kJ (60kcal, 238BTU)
During the coldest and hottest seasons, the room environment may deviate from the
above conditions when air conditioning facilities are not run at night or during medium
and long-term intermissions. In such cases, turn ON the air conditioning facilities and
power to the machine, and warm up the machine one or two hours prior to operation.
The power to the machine must be turned ON, because the air conditioning facilities
alone cannot circulate air inside the machine.
Follow the procedure below to prevent condensation with sudden temperature change.
Two hours before machine operation, set a timer and start operating the air conditioning facilities.
An hour before machine operation, turn ON the power to the machine.
If the air conditioning facilities to be used are equipped with a humidifying function,
turn ON the power to the machine first.
B-18
B.Installation
2-5-2.Floor load capacity
Weight
The floor minimum load

capacity
The weight of the load

on one adjustment bolt
PT-R4000(II)/PT-R4300
Approx. 630 kg
3920 N/m2 (400 kgf/m2)
MAX approx. 160 kg
SA-L4000/4300
Approx. 340 kg (*1)
2784 N/m2 (284 kgf/m2)
MAX approx. 85 kg (*1)
Whole unit
Approx. 765 kg
(*1,2)
5145 N/m2 (525 kgf/m2)
Loading unit
Approx. 375 kg
MAX approx. 94 kg
Cassete unit
Approx. 390 kg (*1,2)
MAX approx. 98 kg
(*1,2)
MA-L4000/4300
1) When not setting plates.

2) When setting three cassets.
2-5-3.Floor levelness
Choose an installation site with the most level floor. Six adjustment bolts are attached to the
machine for level adjustment; these bolts can be adjusted to within 10 mm.
2-5-4.Vibrations
The following are the vibration criterion for machine installation in both the vertical direction
and horizontal direction.
0.03 m/s2 (3.0 Gal) or less (Within DC to 60 Hz)
2-5-5.Room cleanliness
The installation site must be well ventilated and relatively dust-free.
B-19
B.Installation
2-6.Power requirements
The following describes the power requirements for the machine.
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
Including blower Single-phase 200 to 230V 10% 15A
unit
(50/60Hz)
Including SAL/MA-L
PT-R4300
Single-phase 200 to 240V +6%,-10% 15A
3.0kW(50/60Hz)
Single-phase 200 to 240V +6%,-10% 20A
4.0kW(50/60Hz)
For safety, power to the SA-L/MA-L should be turned OFF when the power to the main
unit is turned OFF. Therefore, PT-R4300 is changed so that the power supply of SAL4300/MA-L4300 can be connected.
<Reference>
SA-L4000/MA-L4000
Single-phase 200 V to 230 V 10% 5 A 1.0 kW (50 Hz/60 Hz)
SA-L4300/MA-L4300
Single-phase 200 V to 240 V +6%,-10% 5 A 1.0 kW (50 Hz/60 Hz)
AT-T4000
Single-phase 100 V to 120 V 10% 1.1 A (50 Hz/60 Hz)
Single-phase 200 V to 230 V 10% 0.55 A (50 Hz/60 Hz)
The machine requires a dedicated power supply. Be sure to ground the AC outlet in
the specified manner (grounding resistance: 100 W or less) for machines designed to
Japanese specifications. For overseas specifications, follow the manner that specified
in standard of each country.
Only connect devices designated for use with the main unit.
If you anticipate a greater range of fluctuation in the power supply voltage than the
range described above, stabilize the power supply with an appropriate voltage regulator.
Make sure that the power supply voltage fluctuations are moderate, i.e., there are no
spikes or noise.
B-20
B.Installation
2-7.Cable and hose lengths
The following describes the lengths of cables and hoses that are to be attached to the main unit
and blower unit.
Main unit
Power cable: 10 m (CAUTION 1)
Blower unit
Power cable: 2 m
Blower hose: 2 m
Blower unit control cable: 2 m
1) About power cable

The power cables of the main unit and the blower unit are only provided for machines with Japanese specifications, not with overseas specifications. For machines with overseas specifications, power cables must conform to the given
countrys standards, must be able to handle AC 300 V, and must have three cable
leads of at least 2.5 mm2.
However in case of PT-R4300, as a part of cable comes in power terminal when
connecting, you can not connect power cable if the thickness of power cable itself is
more than 4mm.
6 to 7mm
4mm or less
2.5mm
2) About lengths of blower hose and gas suction hose

Depending in the installation conditions, the blower unit hose can be cut and shortened. However, whenever you cut the hose at the customer site, be sure to refasten
the hose end to its cuffs with silicon adhesives to prevent any air leakage.
B-21
B.Installation
3. About transportation
3-1.Transporting the main unit using the forklift (or similar equipment)
When lifting the main unit using equipment such as a forklift, be careful about the positions of
casters and hoist brackets.
Make sure to insert the forks of equipment into the back of the main unit, as shown below.
If the forks are not inserted into the back of the main unit, the frame of the main unit may
be damaged.
Forks of equipment
Forks of equipment
3-2.Transporting the main unit by hoisting it

When hoisting the main unit, attach the hoist attachments in PT-R4300. The belt should not
touch the main unit using the side board currently used for packing of PT-R.
The side board currently
used for packing of PT-R
B-22
B.Installation
4.Installation procedure
4-1.Packing list check
Be sure to check the packing list (included with the equipment packaging) to determine if there
are any missing items.
4-2.Assembly
4-2-1.Installation of the PT-R4300
1) Hoist attachment removal
There are two hoist attachments on both the front and rear sides of the main unit. First
remove the connecting beam and then remove the hoist attachments.
Hoist attachment (front) (Label No. 8)
Hoist attachment (rear) (Label No. 8)
B-23
B.Installation
2) Installation of the main unit
Install the main unit using leveling bolts. The unit's casters should be set at 11 mm above the
floor surface as shown in the figure. Adjust all leveling bolts uniformly so that they touch
the floor surface evenly.
11
95
Be aware that if the distance between the bottom of casters and the floor surface exceeds 22 mm, the leveling bolts may detach from the main unit.
(mm)
4-2-2. Removing the transport fixing brackets

The number of the transport fixing brackets for each PT-R unit is as follows. Note that the
number for the PT-R4300 varies with the serial number.
PT-R4000, PT-R4000II:
17 transport fixing brackets (including the hoist attachments mentioned earlier)
PT-R4300 (s/n: 1 to 6, 8):
17 transport fixing brackets (including the hoist attachments mentioned earlier)
PT-R4300 (s/n: 7, 9 onward): 19 transport fixing brackets (including the hoist attachments mentioned earlier)
In addition, five cushioning materials are used. These transport fixing brackets are common to
the PT-R4000, PT-R4000II, and PT-R4300.
Ensure that all of them have been removed finally.
The tag shown below is attached to each transport fixing bracket. Note, however, that it is not
attached to the cushioning materials.
B-24
B.Installation
1) Open the operation door.
The method to open the operation door while the power to the main unit is OFF varies with
the PT-R4000 (II) and the PT-R4300.
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
Removing the fixing brackets from the clamp roller Insert a thin rod (e.g., a hexagonal
wrench) into the door-releasing hole for the operation door, which is located at the bottom
surface of the plate table, to open the operation door.
PT-R4300
Insert a thin rod (e.g., a hexagonal wrench) into the door-releasing hole for the operation
door, which is located at the right section of the plate table, and lower the rod. This will
open the operation door.
2) Remove all covers from the main unit.
B-25
B.Installation
3) Remove the fixing brackets, shown below, from the front of the main unit.
Fixing bracket for the recording head board unit.
(Label No.3)
Away side on the front side

(Label No.5)
B-26
Home side on the front side (Label No.7)
B.Installation
For the PT-R4300 (s/n: 7, 9 onward), remove the fixing brackets shown in the following
figures in addition to those in the above figures.
B-27
B.Installation
4) Remove the fixing brackets, shown below, from the back of the main unit.
Transfer unit fixing bracket
(Home) (Label No. 9)
Transfer unit fixing bracket

(Away) (Label No. 12)
Cleaning roller fixing

bracket (Home)
(Label No. 10)
Squeeze roller side plate

fixing bracket (Home)
(Label No. 16)
Clamp section fixing bracket

(Home) (Label No. 13)
B-28
Cleaning roller fixing

bracket (Away)
(Label No. 11)
Squeeze roller side plate

fixing bracket (Away)
(Label No. 17)
Clamp section fixing bracket

(Away) (Label No. 14)
Blower fixing bracket

(rear side)
(Label No. 4)
Base fixing bracket (rear side)

(Label No. 15)
B.Installation
5) Remove the fixing brackets, shown below, from the right side of the main unit.
Recording head unit fixing
bracket (Home)(Label No.6)
6) Remove the fixing brackets, shown below, from the left side of the main unit.
Recording head unit fixing

bracket (Away)(Label No.2)

(Label No.4)
Fixing bracket for the ball

screw. (Label No.1)
B-29
B.Installation
7) Remove the cushioning materials, shown below, from the front and rear sides of the main
unit.
Discharge tray
Remove
Remove these cushioning materials to

remove the discharge tray.
Remove
Protection material for the discharge roller
B-30
B.Installation
Fixing bracket list
The PT-R4300 uses the fixing brackets listed below. Be careful not to lose any of them,
including their attachment screws. For the PT-R4300 (s/n: 7, 9 onward), two more fixing
brackets are used in addition to the following ones. (Refer to page B-27.)
Frame fixing
bracket
(1 type, 3 pcs.)
Transfer unit fixing

bracket
(3 types, 4 pcs.)
Clamp drive section fixing bracket

(6 types, 6 pcs.)
Recording head
unit fixing bracket
(3 types, 3 pcs.)
Ball screw fixing

bracket
(1 type, 1 pc.)
Squeeze roller and

cleaning roller fixing brackets
(4 types, 4 pcs.)
<Reference>
When the PT-R4300 needs to be moved after
installation, shift the recording head to the 365
mm point where the fixing brackets can be
roughly adjusted. Use a lateral feed motor
knob for the recording head position fine adjustment.
Recording head
blower fixing
bracket
(3 types, 3 pcs.)
Hoist attachment
(2 types, 4 pcs.)
B-31
B.Installation
8) Remove the exterior apron jig and attach the apron and door lock system.
Next, close the door to ensure that the door lock system functions properly. If the door does
not lock properly, adjust the door lock bracket.
(This operation is required for the PT-R4000/PT-R4000II with serial numbers 0101 and
onward.)
The exterior apron jig
Door lock system
Apron
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
4-2-3.Adjusting the levelness

Although the PT-R4300 does not require leveling, adjust all leveling bolts uniformly so that they
evenly touch the floor surface.
B-32
B.Installation
4-3.Connection
4-3-1.Connecting the blower hose and gas suction hose.
Connect the blower hose, blower communication cable, and power supply cable between the
blower unit and the PT-R main unit. Then, secure the blower power supply cable with a tie band.
When connecting a blower unit to the main unit using hoses, be sure to confirm that a
cuff (joint portion) is firmly attached to each hose end.
If a cuff is not adequately fastened to the hose, air leakages are likely to occur.
Always install the blower unit in the room where the PT-R4300 is installed.
Tie band
Blower power supply

cable connection
Blower control cable

connection
Blower
Blower control cable

connection
Blower hose connection
Blower power supply

cable connection
Tie band
Main unit
B-33
B.Installation
4-3-2.Connecting the blower unit control cable
The connection terminal of the PT-R4000/4000II differs from that of the PT-R4300.
Therefore, their power supply cable connection methods are different.
The ground connecting position of the PT-R4000/4000II differs from that of the PTR4300.
1) PT-R4300
Main unit power supply Ground line

cable connection
connection
Optional power
supply cable
connection
Power supply cable connections
Main unit power

supply cable insertion port
Optional power supply cable insertion

port
Power supply cable insertion ports
Cable stripping
6 to 7 mm
4 mm or less
B-34
2.5 mm
B.Installation
Wiring connection. Please follow as below.
1: Insert screw driver obliquely for operation

slot.
2: Insert till the end with

screw driver
straightly.
3: If it is correct operation, a entrance of

that can be opened.
4: Insert the wire in

round hole like drawing. At that time if wire
is inserted along
round hole, that will
be smooth.
5: If the wire is inserted

till the end, please pull
screw driver out with
pushing the wire.
6: For confirming, pull

the wire slightly.
B-35
B.Installation
2)
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
Main unit power supply cable connection
Ground line connection
Power supply cable connections
B-36
Main unit power supply cable

insertion port
Power supply cable insertion port
B.Installation
4-3-3.Connecting an auto loader to the PT-R4300 (option)
For the PT-R4000/4000II, the exterior apron unit needed to be ordered separately in
order to prevent any components from being wasted. This order system is not required
for the PT-R4300, as there are fewer components to be wasted when connecting the
SA-L4300 to the PT-R4300.
1) Remove front cover of PT-R4300.
2) Open operation door of PT-R4300. A hole to open the door manually is right side of operation door.
3) Remove front cover at apron unit of PT-R4300. (4 screws)
Front cover of apron unit.
B-37
B.Installation
4) Remove apron unit of PT-R4300. (6 screws)
2 screws,right side and left side
2 screws at center of apron unit
5) Remove plate insert guide 3 of PT-R4300.(4 screws)
Condition after removing front cover of apron,

apron unit and plate insert guide3.
6) Install positioning plate in PT-R4300. (2 pieces)
B-38
B.Installation
7) Connect SA-L/MA-L4300 to PT-R4300.
Easy to connect if apron side covers at left and right is loosened not take out completely
otherwise hard to fix again.
(2 screws inside machine fix them.)
Apron side covers
8) As the rest of procedure to connect is the same as that of PT-R4300 and SA-L/MA-L4300.
So please refer to their service manual.
Nothing changes for shipping brackets though their shape is a little different.
The shape of bridge and external cover is different but nothing changes regarding
shipping bracket.
9) The power source of SA-L/MA-L4300 is to be shared from PT-R4300.

The way to connect power source at PT-R4300 is changed. Please connect Grand (earth)
onto power terminal not machine frame.
Power terminal is also changed. It is quite new type so that please refer to attached procedure.
For information on cable connections and how to connect the power supply cables, refer to
4-3-2 Connecting the blower unit control cable on page 34.
10) When you connect SA-L/MA-L to PT-R, set height of guide at PT-R and that at Bridge unit
to be parallel .
If they are not paralell each other, thin and small plate will not be transported well.
B-39
B.Installation
4-4. Start of the machine
Before turning ON the power to the main unit, check one more time whether all transport
fixing brackets removed.
1) Turn ON the power to the main unit to start up the main unit.
PT-R4300
PT-R4000/4000II
B-40
B.Installation
2) The screen on the left appears on the panel of the
main unit, and the PT-R4300 memory check starts.
Memory check progress!!
Please wait.
If an error occurs during the memory check, the

screen on the left will be displayed.
Memory check error
Please download control program.
If this screen is displayed, be sure to download

the system software from the host computer.
3) When the memory check is completed, the screen on
0101
the left appears.

Press [START] to start the initialization of the PT-
P T- R 4 3 0 0
R4300.
Please press [START]
START
02.05.01
V1.00
The screen on the left is displayed during the initial-
0200
ization.
Initializing ! !
Please wait.
The Online (Ready) Screen appears after the machine initialization is completed.
0200
Ready
1 : 1: Plate 1
OFFLINE
OPEN
B-41
B.Installation
4-5.Initial settings
4-5-1.Outline for panel settings
The information settings in the PT-R4300 have the following configuration. This information
must be set before a plate can be loaded in the PT-R4300 and exposed.
Printing machine information
Plate information
Comments
Comments
Plate information number

Grip direction
Front and trailing grip margins
Centering
Offset when centering is OFF
Media type information number

Size
Punch number
Positioning punch ON/OFF
Fine adjustment of image position
Comments
(Punch block number)
(Punch interval)
Punch information
Media type information

Comments
Thickness
Positive type/negative type
Balancer constant setting
Light intensity for each resolution
Rotational speed for each resolution
Focus for each resolution
Zoom for each resolution
Primary scanning length correction
for each resolution
Exposure conditions
Mirror
Negative/positive
Layout
Offset for multi-output
(1) Media type information (Same meaning as plate type information.)

This sets information regarding the plate manufacturer, model number, and thickness. Fifteen type can be registered. In addition to the fifteen types (Nos. 1 through 15) that can be
registered, there are also fifteen types (Nos. 31 through 45) that have been preset, and these
can be copied to Nos. 1 through 15.
(2) Plate information
This sets the plate size and media type information number. Fifteen types can be registered.
(3) Printing machine information
This sets the plate information number, grip, centering, and punch information. Fifteen
types can be registered.
(4) Punch information
This stores punch comments. Nine types can be registered. (Note that there is limit to the
number of punch units that can be attached.) A service technician sets the punch block
number and punch interval when he installs an optional punch mechanism.
(5) Exposure conditions
Only one type can be registered. These settings are effective regardless of the printing machine information selected.
Set the information in the following order: media type information, plate information,
printing machine information, and then exposure conditions.
When you instruct the host computer to output to the PT-R4300, the plate data set in
the printing machine information that was selected when the plate was loaded is automatically selected, and output takes place according to the conditions set in the printing machine information.
B-42
B.Installation
4-5-2.Setting the media type
As many as 15 types of detailed information concerning the output media can be registered. The
procedure for setting the information is as follows:
Select a media type number.
(Copy preset media type information.)
Enter comments and select negative or positive.
Set the plate thickness and the balancer constant.
Select the light intensity and the drum rpm.
Set the focus value.
Set the zoom value and the absolute precision correction value.
0300
1) In the offline screen, select [Set media type] and
Set printing machine
press [OK]. The media type setting screen will appear.
Set plate
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE
OK
NEXT
2) Select a number to set the media type and press
1150
Media Type 1
Media Type 2
Media Type 3
Media Type 4
Media Type 5
ESC
OK
[OK]. The screen shown in step 3) will appear.

Pressing [NEXT] in the screen on the left moves you
to the next media type setting screen. Pressing [ESC]
returns you to the offline screen.
NEXT
3) Press [Copy form]. The screen shown in step 4) will

appear.
1100
Comment
Media Type 1
Posi
ESC
Nega
OK
Copy form
B-43
B.Installation
4) Select the preset media type to be copied. Press
1057
31
FUJIFILM LH-PI 0.24mm
32
33
FUJIFILM LH-NI 0.24mm
34
35
KODAK IR 0.24mm
ESC
OK
[NEXT] several times to display the screen that includes preset media types from No. 31 onward.
If the information (manufacturer, model number,
and thickness) in one of the preset media types is the
NEXT
same as the media you intend to use, press that number and then [OK].
The selected media type information will be copied
to the media type number that you selected above,
and then the screen shown in step 5) will appear.
36
KODAK IR 0.30mm
If the media type that you intend to use is not in the

screen on the left, press [ESC]. The screen shown in
37
Media Type 37
step 5) will appear.
38
Media Type 38
39
Media Type 39
40
Media Type 40
1058
ESC
OK
NEXT
5) Press [Comment]. The screen shown in step 6) will
1100
appear.
Comment
Media Type 1
Posi
Nega
ESC
OK
Copy form
ESC
6) Enter a comment of media type in the screen on the

left.
CLR
SPC
Flips through the entry screens for upper

case letters, lower case letters, and symbols/numbers.
BS
BS
ENT
CLR
SPC
Moves the cursor.

Deletes the letter to the left of the cursor.
Clears the entered comment.
Enters a space.
Returns to the screen shown in step 5).

After entering a comment, press [ESC]. The screen
ESC
shown in step 7) will appear.
B-44
B.Installation
7) Select [Posi] (positive) or [Nega] (negative) for the
1100
media type, and press [OK]. The screen shown in

step 8) will appear.
Comment
Media Type 1
Posi
Nega
When positive plate is exposed, the section exterior to the image will be burned out.
ESC
OK
Copy form
1101
CLR
0.24 mm
Thickness
Front offset
0.00
Displancement offset
-9.99 mm
ESC
Thickness: Plate thickness (mm)

Allowable range: 0.00 to 9.99
Front offset: Offset value for the leading edge sensor
Allowable range: -50.0 to 50.0
Refer to page B-62 for the adjustment method.
Displacement: Offset value for the displacement
ENT
OK
8) Specify the following values in the screen on the left.
sensor
Refer to page B-63 for the adjustment method.
Press [OK] at the end, and the screen shown in step
9) is displayed.
When you have copied data in step 4), confirm that
the value displayed in this screen is correct.
1101
CLR
Distance limit
20
ESC
Distance limit: Threshold value of the displacement

sensor
Allowable range: 20 to 100
Do not change the input value as it is fixed.
ENT
OK
9) Specify the following value in the screen on the left.
Press [OK] at the end, and the screen shown in step

10) is displayed.
1102
dpi
CLR
1200
[%]
80.0
[rpm]
1000
2000
81.0
1000
2400
82.0
1000
4000
83.0
1000
2438
84.0
1000
2540
85.0
1000
ESC
OK
ENT
10) Enter values into the following fields in the screen

on the left.
: Light intensity (%)
: Drum rpm (rpm)
Press [OK]. The screen shown in step 11) will appear.
If you copied the preset data in step 4), check that the
displayed information is correct.
B-45
B.Installation
1103
dpi
CLR
[pulse]
1200
1930
2000
2000
2400
1930
4000
2000
2438
1910
2540
1860
ESC
dpi
CLR
1200
[%]
[pulse]
0.000
6700
2000
1400
0.000
2400
6700
0.000
4000
1400
0.000
2438
7250
0.000
2540
8550
0.000
ESC
ENT
SAVE

Press [OK]. The screen shown in step 12) will ap-
1104
shown on the left.

: Focus value (pulse)
pear.
ENT
OK

shown on the left.
: Zoom value (pulse)
R
: Correction value for primary scanning direction length (%)

Example)
If this value is initially 0 and an image is exposed
that is 800 mm in the primary scanning direction, but
the exposed image is actually 799 mm, entering a
correction value of
(800 - 799)/800 x 100 = 0.125 (%)
will cause the correct length to be exposed.
Press [SAVE]. The screen shown in step 13) will appear.
13) Press [YES] and then [OK] to save the data.
If you want to cancel the save, press [NO] and then
1158
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
B-46
NO
[OK].
Pressing [ESC] returns you to the screen shown in
step 12).
OK
B.Installation
4-5-3.Setting the plate
As many as 15 types of output plate information can be individually registered. The procedure
for setting the information is as follows:
Select a plate number.
Enter comments and select the media type.
Set the plate size.

0300
1) Select [Set plate] and press [OK]. The plate setting
screen will appear.

Set plate
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE
OK
NEXT
2) Select a number to set the plate setting and press
1050
Plate 1
Plate 2
Plate 3
Plate 4
Plate 5
ESC
[OK]. The screen shown in step 3) will appear.
OK
NEXT
3) Press [Comment] in the screen on the left. The

screen shown in step 4) will appear.
1000
Comment
When you intend to copy the data from the preset

plate settings, press [Copy form]. In the screen that
Plate 1
Media
appears, select the desired plate setting number and

press [OK]. The screen shown in step 3) will appear.
Media Type 1
ESC
OK
Copy form
Then press [Comment]. The screen shown in step 4)

will appear.
B-47
B.Installation
ESC
4) Enter a plate setting comment in the screen on the

left.
CLR
SPC

BS
BS
ENT
CLR
SPC
Moves the cursor.

Enters a space.

ESC
The comment entered here will appear in the

screen that asks you to set a plate and the screen
that asks you to select a plate to be set. We recommend that you enter the size name, size, and
thickness (and the media type name when using
multiple media types) as shown in the following
example.
Kiku-Han 650 x 550 0.3 mm LH-PI
5) Press [Media] in the screen on the left. The screen
1000
Comment
Plate 1
Media
Media Type 1
ESC
OK
Copy form
6) Select the desired data number from the preset media

types and press [OK]. The screen shown in step 7)
1150
Media Type 1
Media Type 2
Media Type 3
Media Type 4
Media Type 5
ESC
B-48
OK
will appear.
The media type information that you selected in the
NEXT
screen on the left will be linked to the plate that is

being set.
B.Installation
7) Press [OK] in the screen on the left. The screen
1000
Comment
Plate 1
Media
Media Type 1
ESC
OK
Copy form
1001
CLR
Size [mm]
830.0
645.5
ESC
ENT
SAVE
Plate width (mm)

Plate length (mm)
1158
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
8) Enter values into the following fields.
NO

[OK].
step 8).
OK
B-49
B.Installation
4-5-4.Setting the printing machine information
When outputting a plate with the PT-R4300, output conditions such as the media type, leading
grip margin, trailing grip margin, and image centering can be linked and saved as printing machine information. As many as 15 types of printing machine information can be individually
registered. The procedure for setting the information is as follows:
Select a printing machine number.
Enter comments and select the plate.
Set the grip direction.
Set the leading and trailing grip margins.
Set the image centering method.
Set the image position offset.
Set the punch.
Fine adjust the image position.

0300
1) Select [Set printing machine] and press [OK]. The
printing machine setting screen will appear.

Set plate
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE
OK
NEXT
2) Select a number to set the printing machine setting
0000
Printing machine 1
Printing machine 2
Printing machine 3
Printing machine 4
Printing machine 5
ESC
B-50
OK
and press [OK]. The screen shown in step 3) will appear.
NEXT
B.Installation
3) Press [Comment] in the screen on the left. The
0900

When you intend to copy the data from the preset
Comment
Plate 1
printing machine settings, press [Copy form]. In the

screen that appears, select the desired printing ma-
Plate
Media Type 1
ESC
OK
Copy form
ESC
@
CLR
SPC
chine setting number and press [OK]. The screen

shown in step 3) will appear. Then press [Comment].
The screen shown in step 4) will appear.
4) Enter a printing machine setting comment in the
screen on the left.
Moves the cursor.
BS
BS
ENT
CLR
SPC
ESC

Enters a space.

5) Press [Plate] in the screen on the left. The screen
0900
Comment
Plate 1
Plate
Media Type 1
ESC
OK
Copy form
6) Select the desired data number from the plate set-
1054
Plate 1
Plate 2
Plate 3
Plate 4
Plate 5
ESC
tings and press [OK]. The screen shown in step 7)

will appear.
The plate setting that you selected in the screen on
the left will be linked to the printing machine that is
OK
NEXT
being set.
B-51
B.Installation
7) Select the grip direction and press [OK]. The screen
0901
Spiral/Step

: Allows you to set horizontal gripping (at the
top and bottom) of the plate.
: Allows you to set vertical gripping (at each
Grid direction
side) of the plate.

ESC
OK
0902
Grip [mm]/
After Grip
CLR
7

: Leading grip margin/Grip (mm)
Allowable rage: 0.0 to 999.9
0.0 mm
: Trailing grip margin/After Grip (mm)

0.0 mm
ESC
OK
Allowable rage: 0.0 to 999.9

ENT
9) Select the desired centering method and press [OK].

0903
Centering in primary scanning

direction: OFF
Centering in secondary scan-
Centering
ning direction: ON
ESC
OK

direction: ON
Centering in secondary scanning direction: ON
direction: OFF
Centering in secondary scanning direction: OFF
direction: ON
Centering in secondary scanning direction: OFF
If multi-output is set in the exposure condition
settings, the settings for image centering in the
secondary scanning direction and the image offset in the secondary scanning direction described below will be ignored.
B-52
B.Installation
0904
CLR
Offset H
0.0 mm

R
primary scanning direction (mm)
ENT
secondary scanning direction (mm)
Offset V
0.0 mm
R
ESC
OK
: Offset for edges of plate and exposure area in

R
: Offset for edges of plate and exposure area in
The above values are only effective for the direction in which centering is set to OFF. When centering is set to ON both in the primary scanning
direction and the secondary scanning direction,
the screen on the left will not appear.
If multi-output is set in the exposure condition
settings, the settings for image centering in the
secondary scanning direction and image offset in
the secondary scanning direction will be ignored.
11) Press [Punch] in the screen on the left. The screen
0905
Punch
Off
ESC
OK
12) Select the desired punch type number from the registered punch types and press [OK]. The screen shown
0000
OFF
1
Punch 1
Punch 2
Punch 3
Punch 4
ESC
in step 13) will appear.

The punch type that you selected in the screen on the
left will be linked to the printing machine that is being set.
OK
NEXT
When you do not want to use punching function,

press [OFF].
B-53
B.Installation
0906
CLR
Paper Position H
0.0 mm

on the left.
R : Correction value for the image output position
on the plate (secondary scanning direction)
(mm)
Paper Position V
R
ESC
0.0 mm
ENT
SAVE

: Correction value for the image output position
on the plate (primary scanning direction)
(mm)

1061
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
B-54
NO
[OK].
step 14).
OK
B.Installation
4-5-5.Setting the exposure conditions
Set the exposure conditions for mirror image output, positive/negative output, and layout
method when outputting on the PT-R4300.
0300
1) Select [Set exposure mode] and press [OK]. The exposure condition setting screen will appear.

Set plate
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE
OK
NEXT
2) When the SA-L/MA-L is connected, the screen on

the left will appear. Select the plate loading method.
: Automatic plate loading (transferred from
SA-L/MA-L)
: Manual plate loading
3) When units including the auto processor are connected, the screen on the left will appear.
: Unloads the plate to the rear side (for example the auto processor side) of the main
unit.
: Unloads the plate to the front side of the
main unit.
B-55
B.Installation
4) Select the desired commands from the following and
0702
Mirror
press [SAVE].
Mirror
Posi/Nega
Layout
: Normal image output (Select this for usual

operation.)
1
ESC
123
: Mirror image output

Posi/Nega
: Positive output (Select this for usual opera-
SAVE
tion.)
: Negative output
Layout
: Single output (Outputs one image onto one
1
plate.)
(Select this for usual operation.)
123
: Multi-output (Outputs plural images onto

one plate.)
1.Caution for Posi/Nega settings

Normally Posi is selected and the host computer outputs a positive image. The PT-R4300
checks whether the media type is set to positive or negative and then adjusts exposure so that a
positive image is output.
If the image output from the host computer is a negative image, select Nega in the exposure
condition setting screen.
2.Caution for
(multi-output) of Layout
After exposing one image, when the image size that is to be exposed next is smaller than the
123
unexposed area, the plate will be exposed without being unloaded. When the image size that is
to be exposed next is larger than the unexposed area, the plate will be unloaded and exposure
starts after loading the next plate.
If centering in the secondary scanning direction is set to ON in the printing machine settings,
exposure of the initial image will begin at a position 5 mm from the edge of the plate (or the
leading grip margin). A 5 mm gap is automatically inserted between each image.
When performing multi-output using a positive-type plate, the 5 mm gap before the first image, the 5 mm gap between images, and the gap from the edge of the last image to the edge of
the plate will be burned out. The burn-out after the last image is executed before unloading.
0704
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
B-56
NO
[OK].
step 2).
OK
B.Installation
4-6 Operation check and adjustment
4-6-1 Checking the registration
Once initialization of the machine has completed correctly, check the registration accuracy according to the following procedure.
If you notice any deviations, adjust them according to Chapter C Replacement & Adjustment.
Registration accuracy should be checked at the same time as the operations described in 4.6.2
Confirming plate winding and exposure.
1) Ensure that when the transfer path is located at the
lowest position, it makes contact with the stopper,
which is located on the PT-R4300 side.
Transfer path
Stopper
<Procedure>
Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
Enter the Actuator test screen.
Recording drum
Lower the transfer path. (By pressing the Down

button twice)
Ensure that the
lower section of
the transfer
path contacts
the stopper.
Ensure that the recording head is positioned on

the Home side.
Reference) The transfer path must be positioned at 0.5
mm or less from the stopper. (In effect, these
two should contact each other, however a 0.5
mm clearance between them can be tolerated.)
2) Next, check the position the plate attaches to the
drum using a plate of the maximum size used by the
Nip roller
Transfer path
Shutter
Leading edge clamp
Plate
user.
<Procedure>
Lower the nip roller.
Open the shutter.
Feed a plate to check the position it attaches to the
recording drum.
Reference) According to factory adjustment, maximum
sized plates (830 x 645, thickness: 0.3) attach to a position nearly under the leading
edge clamps.
Be aware of plate slack. The thinner the plate
is, the more it slacks.
B-57
B.Installation
0 .5 to 1 .0 m m
P la te
3) Ensure that the plate makes contact with the drum

from the registration pin side and that it is inclined
with respect to the lateral groove on the recording
drum.
<Procedure>
Place a plate on the transfer path.
L a te ra l g ro o ve o n th e
re c o rd in g d ru m
Lower the transfer path to its lowest position.

Lower the nip roller.
R e g is tra tio n p in s
F ra m e o f th e P T -R 4 3 00
E n g in e b a s e
Open the shutter.

Rotate the recording drum by hand and execute
Servo ON when the lateral groove comes close to
the squeeze roller.
Feed the plate to check the inclination of the plate
with respect to the lateral groove on the recording
T h e d is ta n c e b e tw e e n th e
H o m e s id e d ista n c e a n d
A w a y s id e d ista n c e
s h o u ld b e 1 to 1 .5 m m .
162m m
163m m
drum.
Reference) When the plate is correctly placed, with respect to the Home side, its Away side tilts
from 0.5 to 1.0 mm near the registration pins.
R e c o m m e n d e d e n g in e b a s e tilt
Also check that the engine base tilts with respect

to the frame. According to factory adjustment, the
engine tilts 1 mm with respect to the frame. (The
recording head is positioned on the Home side.)
4) Check that the plate has been correctly positioned in
the lateral direction with respect to the registration
pins on the recording drum.
Plate
Registration pin
Ensure that both plate punch centers align
with the centers of the registration pins.
permissible for these punch hole centers to be
slightly shifted (within 0.5 mm) to the right
It is
.
Ensure that the centers of both punch holes on the

plate align with the centers of the registration pins. It
is permissible for these punch hole centers to be
slightly shifted (within 0.5 mm) to the right.
<Procedure>
Remove the punch debris guide from the Home side
(so that the registration pin area is clearly visible.)
Place a plate on the transfer path.
Set the transfer path to the middle position.
Center the plate and then make punch holes.
(Note 1)
If the plate punch centers are

significantly shifted to the left or
right, plate misregistration will result.
B-58
Rotate the recording drum to the plate winding

position and open the leading edge clamps.
Move the transfer path to the lowest position and
open the shutter.
B.Installation
Feed a plate and check the positions of the regisApproximately 3 mm
from the pin
tration pins and the holes punched in the plate.
Plate
Note 1) A personal computer is required to carry

out this operation.
Registration pin
Ensure that the bearings of the centering unit
Ensure that the nip roller is released when

the plate reaches a point approximately 3
mm from the registration pins.
contact the respective edges of the plate during

punching.
5) Check the timing when the nip roller is released.
<Procedure>
Remove the plate and initialize the machine.
Load a plate onto the drum.
Ensure that the plate stops for an instant when the
leading edge clamps open and the plate is fed to a
point approximately 3 mm from the registration
pins.
Plate
6) Once the head adjustment has been completed, execute test exposure of the grid pattern over the full
surface of a plate of the size used by the user. At least
four plates are required for the test exposure.
On the reference plate (first plate), overlay another
plate and cut out its leading edge corners on the
Home and Away sides. Then, measure the difference
between the grid lines in the Y direction on the plate
and the grid lines on the reference plate.
Cut
out
Bacher register
pins (6.35 dia)
<Required items>
6.35 dia. register pins (2 pcs.)
(Reference)
Name: Register pin
Parts code: 030100072
Loupe
<Exposure condition>
2400 dpi
Grid pattern exposure
B-59
B.Installation
Criterion for judgment)
At 2400 dpi, the line width is approximately
30 m. Registration in the PT-R4300 is considered to be accurate when the corresponding grid lines are aligned to within one grid
line width at the points specified in the figure.
Approximately
30 mm
Check for misalignment of

grid lines in these areas.
Y direction
7) Restore all parts removed, such as the cleaning roller

and punch debris guide.
B-60
B.Installation
4-6-2.Confirming plate winding and exposure
Confirmation of plate winding load a plate and check the winding.
<Preliminary check>
Make sure that none of the plates the customer will use
are wrapped, bent or dented.
1) Check the following items during the plate loading.
When the plate is being punched, the cam followers of the centering unit touch the plate sides.
The cam followers do not press against the plate
Plate
Centering unit
sides too hard.

The plate top side detection sensors are properly
operating.
2) Check the following items for the wound plates.
Leading and trailing edge grip margins
(Leading edge grip margin = 13.2 mm, Trailing
edge grip margin = 7 mm 0, +0.1 mm)
The values mentioned above are used for 0.3 mm
plates. The thinner the plate is, the longer the trailing edge grip margin length will be.
The plate must touch the registration pins.
Registration pin
Trailing edge clamp
B-61
B.Installation
3051
3) Adjust the front sensor offset
Input parameter
Machine option select
This adjustment is not necessary for the LH-PI
I/O Read/Write
plates, as it has been done at the factory.
Initialize data
Special action
ESC
OK
NEXT
4451
Centering test
Execute Front sensor offset.

Select the plate type.
Adjust Displacement sensor

NVRAM backup
Press [START] to execute.

The offset value for the plate will be set.
NVRAM restore
OK
Load a plate on the drum to confirm the plate edge

hits the registration pins completely.
Go to the service maintenance mode.
Special action
Front sensor offset
ESC
<Front sensor offset adjustment>

Initialize the machine.
NEXT
Adjust the offset if the thickness is different just in

case even though the same type of plate.
1150
0.15
0.20
0.24
0.30
Media Type 5
ESC
B-62
OK
NEXT
B.Installation
0300
4) Adjust the displacement sensor offset

Set plate
This adjustment is not necessary for the LH-PI
Set media type
plates, as it has been done at the factory.
Set exposure mode

User maintenance
ONLINE
OK
NEXT
1150
<displacement sensor offset adjustment>

Initialize the machine.
Input -9.99 on Displacement offset.
(This is the mode to get the offset.)
Load a plate.
0.15
0.20
0.24
0.30
Media Type 5
Adjust the offset if the thickness is different just in

case even though the same type of plate.
ESC
OK
NEXT
1100
Comment
Media Type 1
Posi
Nega
ESC
OK
Copy form
1101
CLR
Thickness
0.24 mm
Front offset
0.00
Displancement offset
-9.99 mm
ESC
OK
ENT
B-63
B.Installation
5) Y-lengthSince the sensor is at the rear side of the plate loaded on the drum, the sensor need
not be re-adjusted to accommodate different types of plates used with the machine.
Therefore, you do not need to re-adjust the sensor when the machine is installed.Readjust
this sensor only when an error occurs with the plate length in the Y direction during plate
loading on the drum, when the sensor is replaced with a new one, or when the position or
angle of the sensor is adjusted.
Even if the sensor has been adjusted (or the plate length has been recognized by the machine) properly, a plate length deviation within a 2.4 mm range is still allowed.
0300
<Memorize the plate length>

Measure the plate length by scale and input this

Set plate
value at the plate setting.

Go to the user maintenance mode.
Set media type
Test exposure
Hidden command (RH) for service engineer
Set exposure mode

User maintenance
ONLINE
OK
NEXT
Input the password.

Hit OK key.
2000
ETC.
ESC
OK
2100
focus
zoom
RH
ESC
OK
2180
CLR
Pass Word
ESC
B-64
OK
ENT
B.Installation
2181
No-Plate
Off
RH
Off
Full size
Off
ESC
OK
2182
Plate Length
CLR
0.0 mm
When you want to calibrate the plate length sensor,

input the value of the correct plate size for Y direction. And load the measured plate.
Normally save "zero".
ESC
Input the actual measured value at the memory
view.
SAVE
Wind the plate.
ENT
SAVE
The plate is loaded on the drum without the registration punch when memorizing the length. At
this moment,, the front sensor might get error. In
this case change the parameter referring to the
2185
following procedure.
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
NO
OK
Go to the service maintenance mode.

Input parameter
Drum position
Change the value of Front sensor. ( Increase
about 5 pulses.)
(The drum front check position shifts to
counter clock wise when the Front sensor
value is increased.)
Confirm the sensor lights are off after executing Front check position on Drum.
Memorize the plate again.
Set back the front sensor value.
B-65
B.Installation
4-6-3.Laser calibration
1) Write down the Iop values set for exposing images at 2000 and 2400 dpi.
2) You do not need to write down the values for resolutions whose Iop values have already
been described in the factory set electric current data sheet.
3) Check whether the difference between the average operating current value (Iop value) set at
the factory and the calibrated average operating current (calibrated Iop value) above is less
then 50 mA.
There is no problem when these values are almost equivalent. However, if the difference is
significant, the optical axis may have deviated during transportation or condensation may
have occurred.
It is recommended that you should note down the calibration values when the service work
is performed. This allows you to check the variation in the current values since the machine
has been installed and helps you to find out the LDs that need to be replaced.
4) If there is no problem with the calibrated operating current, execute the calibration for the
resolution at which the customer will expose images.
B-66
B.Installation
4-7.Exposure adjustment
0300
1) In the offline screen, select [User maintenance] and


Set plate
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE
OK
NEXT
2) Select
2000
(test exposure) and press [OK]. The
ETC.
ESC
OK
3) Select the desired test exposure in the screen on the

left, and perform exposure adjustment.
2100
focus
zoom
RH
ESC
OK
focus
zoom
: Performs a test exposure to adjust the focus.

(Refer to 4-7-1.)
: Performs a test exposure to adjust the zoom.
(Refer to 4-7-2.)
: Performs a test exposure to adjust the light intensity. (Refer to 4-7-3.)
Be sure to load the plate manually before performing a test exposure.

The printing machine and exposure condition settings are ignored when a test exposure or test pattern exposure is performed.
The start position for exposure in the primary scanning direction is approximately 25
mm from the bottom edge of the plate and the end position is approximately 25 mm
from the top edge. Both positions are fixed.
When a positive-type plate is exposed, burn-out is not performed.
B-67
B.Installation
4-7-1.Adjusting the focus value
1) Load the plate manually.
2100
2) Select
focus
focus
in the screen on the left and press [OK].
zoom
RH
ESC
OK
Resolution key
Currently set value
2130
CLR
2400dpi
(1920)
Inital Value:[pulse] 2000
10
Inc.Value: [pulse]
Count:
0.0
Start Point:[mm]
(0.0 - 830.0mm)
ESC
OK
ENT

[Resolution key]
Sets the resolution for the test exposure. The
resolution changes each time the resolution key is
pressed. Press the key until the desired resolution
appears.
[Currently set value]
Displays the focus value (in pulse) currently set
in Set media type data selected when the plate
was loaded in the PT-R4300.
For the focus adjustment, perform the test exposure
with the following settings.
[Initial Value]
[Inc. Value] (incremental value)
: Currently set value -100

: 10
[Count]
: 21
[Start Point] (exposure start point) : Press [OK]. The screen shown in step 4) will appear.
[Initial Value]
The first focus value used in the test exposure.
[Inc. Value]
The amount of change from the initial value. Allowable range: 1 to 4000
[Count]
The number of times the test exposure is to be performed. Allowable rage: 0 to 9999
[Start Point]
B-68
B.Installation
The exposure start point is the distance from the plate edge to the point where the test
exposure begins. This value is updated (moved to the next possible exposure position) each time a test exposure ends. (In this sequence, the exposure starting point is
automatically recalculated by adding 5 mm to the last exposure end point.)
When performing a test exposure, the settings for the media type registered in the
plate data that is selected when the plate is loaded are used for settings other than the
initial value, incremental value, and count.
4) Check the displayed information and press
[START]. The test exposure begins using the set in-
2131
2400dpi
(1920)
Initial Value:
Inc.Value:
Count:
Start Point:
ESC
2000 pulse
10
pulse
3
0.0
mm
START
CANCEL
formation.
When the test exposure is completed, the test exposure selection screen reappears.
The test exposure exposes the width that you set

in [Plotting Width] and automatically inserts a 5
mm gap between exposures.
5) Manually unload and develop the plate.
Check the exposure pattern strips with a magnifying
glass and designate the focus value that satisfies the
following conditions.
When using a positive plate:
Shows the clearest Dot 0%.
Shows the sharpest Hor L&S 1.
Shows no unevenness for Dot 50%.
When no differences can be found among the patterns, designate the focus value for the strip of the
exposure patterns located at the median as the optimum focus value. Ten is subtracted from the optimum value to attain the actual set value to be used.
When using a negative plate:
Shows the highest density for Dot 100%.
When no differences can be found among the patterns, designate the focus value for the strip of the
exposure patterns located at the median as the optimum focus value. Ten is subtracted from the optimum value to attain the actual set value to be used.
For details of the names and the types of each

exposure pattern, refer to 4-7-5 Test exposure.
B-69
B.Installation
The actual set value of the focus should be rounded
up to the nearest multiple of 5.
6) Following the same procedures, designate the focus
values for the other resolutions and plates.
Factory set value
B-70
B.Installation
4-7-2.Adjusting the zoom value
2) Select
2100
focus
zoom
zoom
RH
ESC
OK
Resolution key
Currently set value
2140
CLR
2400dpi
(1000)
Inital Value: [pulse] 900
Inc.Value:
[pulse]
ESC
10
Count:
Start Point:[mm]
(0.0 - 830.0)

[Resolution key]
0.0
OK

appears.
Displays the zoom value (in pulse) currently set
ENT
in Set media type data selected when the plate

was loaded in the PT-R4300.
For the zoom adjustment, perform the test exposure
with the following settings.
[Initial Value]
[Inc. Value] (incremental value)
: Currently set value -350

: 50
[Count]
: 15
[Start Point] (exposure start point) : Press [OK]. The screen shown in step 4) will appear.
[Initial Value]
The first zoom value used in the test exposure. Allowable range: 201 to 9970
[Inc. Value]
The amount of change from the initial value. Allowable range: 1 to 9970
[Count]
[Start Point]
B-71
B.Installation
2141
2400dpi
(1920)
Initial Value:
Inc.Value:
Count:
Start Point:
ESC
2000 pulse
10
pulse
3
0.0
mm
START
CANCEL
formation.

B-72
B.Installation
Horizontal lines are
consistently straight.
Ch29
Ch30
Ch31
Ch0
Ch1
Ch2
There are not many vertical lines which are uneven or of inconsistent
thickness.

Check the exposure pattern strips with a magnifying
glass and designate the zoom value that satisfies the
following condition.
Shows the most straight lines for Hor L&S 2.
When no differences can be found among the patterns, designate the zoom value for the strip of the
exposure patterns located at the median as the zoom
set value.
For details of the names and the types of each
exposure pattern, refer to 4-7-5 Test exposure.
The actual set value of the zoom should be rounded
up to the nearest multiple of 5.
6) Following the same procedures, designate the zoom
values for the other resolutions and plates.
<Positive plate>
C1 pattern
B-73
B.Installation
4-7-3.Adjusting the light intensity <Reference>
Use the light intensity value that is set for each media type (manufacturer, model number, thickness).
2100
2) Select
focus
zoom
RH
ESC
OK
Resolution key
Currently set value

[Resolution key]
2110
CLR
2400dpi
(80.0)
5.0
Inc.Value:[%]
Count:

appears.
0.0
Start Point:[mm]
(0.0 - 830.0)
ESC
50.0
Initial Value:[%]
OK
ENT
Displays the light intensity value (in %) currently

set in Set media type data selected when the
plate was loaded in the PT-R4300.
For the light intensity adjustment, perform the test
exposure with the following settings.
[Initial Value]
: 40 onward
[Inc. Value] (incremental value) : 5
[Count]
: 13

[Initial Value]
The first light intensity value used in the test exposure. Allowable range: 10.0 to 100.0
[Inc. Value]
The amount of change from the initial value. Allowable range: 1.0 to 100.0
[Count]
[Start Point]
B-74
B.Installation
automatically recalculated by adding 5 mm to the last exposure endpoint.)
2111
2400dpi
(80.0)
InitialValue: 50.0 %
5.0 %
Inc.Value:
3
Count:
0.0 mm
Start Point:
mm
Plotting Width: 20
ESC
START
formation.
CANCEL

Check the strips of exposure patterns with a magnifier and designate the light intensity set value that
satisfies the following condition.
Multiply the value of the strip of test patterns that
shows the clearest Dot 0% by 1.4 to 1.6 times.
The actual set value of the light intensity should be
rounded up to the nearest whole number.
6) Following the same procedures, designate the light
intensity values for the other resolutions and plates.
4-7-4.Saving the data

Following the procedures in 4-5-2 Setting the media type, save the focus, zoom and light
intensity values that are designated in 4-7-1 to 4-7-3 for each media type.
B-75
B.Installation
4-7-5.Test exposure
To check the data that are saved, perform a test exposure.
2100
2) Select
focus
zoom
RH
ESC
OK
Test pattern
selection key
Resolution key
2170
CLR
2400dpi
Pattern:
C1
Plotting Width:
(5.0 - 830.0 [mm])
Start Point:
(0.0 - 830.0 [mm])
ESC
50.0
0.0
OK
ENT

[Resolution key]
Sets the resolution for the test exposure. The resolution changes each time the resolution key is pressed.
Press the key until the desired resolution appears.
[Test pattern selection key]
Selects the test pattern. The test pattern changes
each time the test pattern selection key is pressed.
Press the key until the desired test pattern appears. For the type of test pattern, refer to the description below.
[Plotting Width]
The exposure width of the test pattern.
[Start Point]
The exposure start point is the distance from

the plate edge to the point where the test exposure begins. This value is updated (moved to
the next possible exposure position) each time
a test exposure ends. (In this sequence, the
exposure starting point is automatically recalculated by adding 5 mm to the last exposure
end point.)
When performing a test exposure, the settings
for the media type registered in the plate data
that is selected when the plate is loaded are
used for settings other than the initial value, incremental value, and count.
B-76
B.Installation
Press [OK]. The screen show in step 4) will appear.
2171
2400dpi
[START]. The test exposure begins using the set information.
C1
Pattern:
Plotting Width: 50.0
0.0 mm
Start Point:
ESC
START
CANCEL

Check if there is any problem with the exposed results.
B-77
B.Installation
Test pattern list
Pattern name
Dot 0%
Dot 3%
Dot 5%
Dot 10%
Dot 15%
Dot 50%
Dot 85%
Dot 90%
Dot 95%
Dot 97%
Dot 100%
Grid
C1
D1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
CHO-31
Hor L&S 1
Hor L&S 2
Ver L&S 1
Ver L&S 2
B-78
Dot%
0%
3%
5%
10%
15%
50%
85%
90%
95%
97%
100%
Dot angle
45
Line number/pitch
4000 dpi: 250 line/inch
Remarks
Pseudo dots
4000 dpi: 1.63 1.52 mm

Grid pattern
2400 dpi: 2.71 2.54 mm
2000 dpi: 3.25 3.05 mm
1200 dpi: 5.42 5.08 mm
2540 dpi: 2.56 2.40 mm
2438 dpi: 2.67 2.50 mm
Continuous exposure of C1 pattern
Continuous exposure of C1 pattern
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
To allow verification of the light intensity balance of each laser channel (ch 0
through ch 31), a solid is exposed with each channel.
Horizontal direction 1 line - 1 space
Lines and spaces
Horizontal direction 2 lines - 2 spaces
Vertical direction 1 line - 1 space
Vertical direction 2 lines - 2 spaces
B.Installation
a
256pixel
240pixel
Pseudo dots
a
Grid pattern
Lines and spaces

(1 line, 1 space)
Primary scanning direction

Lines and spaces
(2 lines, 2spaces)
15
23
31
14
22
30
13
21
29
12
20
28
11
19
27
10
18
26
17
25
16
24
Expose original point

Secondary scanning direction
Ch0 through ch31 pattern exposure
C1 pattern
D1 pattern
B-79
B.Installation
4-7-6.Other test exposure methods
In addition to the test exposures described above, test exposures for simultaneous adjustment of
focus and zoom, and for simultaneous adjustment of light intensity and drum rpm can be performed in the PT-R4300.
1) Select
2100
or
in the screen on the left and press
[OK].
: Test exposure for simultaneous adjustment of
focus
zoom
focus and zoom

: Test exposure for simultaneous adjustment of
RH
light intensity and drum rpm

2) When
is selected, the screen on the left appears.
ESC
OK
When
appears.
Currently set
value
Resolution key
2160
CLR
2400dpi
(2280, 6450)
Initial Value: 2000 4985
[puls]
Inc.Value:
50
20
[puls]
8
7
Count:
Start Point:
(0.0 ~ 1030.0 [mm])
ESC
0.0
OK
ENT
is selected, the screen on the next page
Enter values into the following fields.

[Resolution key]
appears.
Displays the focus value (in pulse) and the zoom
value (in pulse) currently set in the Set media
type data selected when the plate was loaded in
the PT-R4300.
[Initial Value]:
The first focus value and zoom value used in the
test exposure.
[Inc. Value] (incremental value):
The amount of change from initial values
[Count]:
The number of times the test exposure is to be
performed.
Allowable rage: 0 to 9999
[Start Point]
B-80
B.Installation
Resolution key
Currently set value
2150
CLR
2400dpi
(700, 75.0)
Initial Value:
650 50.0
[rpm],[%]
Inc.Value
25 2.0
[rpm],[%]
Count:
9
10
Start Point:
0.0
(0.0 ~ 1030.0 [mm])
ESC
OK
ENT
[Resolution key]
appears.
Displays the light intensity value (in %) and the
drum rpm (in rpm) currently set in Set media
type data selected when the plate was loaded in
the PT-R4300.
[Initial Value]:
The first light intensity value and drum rpm value
used in the test exposure.
[Inc. Value] (incremental value):
The amount of change from initial values
[Count]:
The number of times the test exposure is to be
performed.
Allowable rage: 0 to 9999
[Start Point]
Please note the following whenever you enter a parameter value.

Set the initial value higher than the lower limit for each parameter.
Values calculated by the formula Initial Value + Inc. Value x (Count - 1) should be
lower than the upper limit for each parameter.
Values calculated by the formula Start Point + 35 x (Count set for the secondary
direction - 1) should be less than the plate size in the secondary direction.
Values calculated by the formula Start Point + 100 x (Count set for the primary direction -1) should be less than the plate size in the primary direction minus 40 mm.
B-81
B.Installation
3) When
2161
2400dpi
(2280)
(6450)
Initial Value: 2000 puls 4985 puls
50 puls 20 puls
Inc.Value:
8
7
Count:
Start Point:
0.0 mm
ESC
START
is selected, the upper screen appears.
When
is selected, the lower screen appears.
Check the displayed information and press
[START].
CANCEL
2151
2400dpi
(700)
(75.0)
Initial Value: 650 rpm 50.0 %
25 rpm
Inc.Value:
2.0 %
9
Count:
10
Start Point:
0.0 mm
ESC
START
CANCEL
Zoom is
incremented.
Drum rpm is
incremented.
30mm
30mm
6050pulse
650rpm
95mm
5mm
5mm
Focus is
incremented.
6000pulse
5mm
2000pulse
2020pulse
: Test exposure for simultaneous adjustment of focus and zoom
B-82
95mm
Light intensity is
incremented.
600rpm
5mm
50%
55%
: Test exposure for simultaneous adjustment of light intensity and drum rpm
B.Installation
4-8.Other settings
4-8-1.Setting the exposure maintenance
0300


Set plate
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE
OK
NEXT
2) Select
2000
and press [OK] in the screen on the left.
ETC.
ESC
OK
and press [OK] in the screen on the left.

3) Select
2100
RH
focus
zoom
RH
ESC
OK
2180
CLR
Pass Word
ESC
OK
4) Enter the password shown below in the screen on the

left.
Password: 4000 or 4300
ENT
B-83
B.Installation
5) Set the following commands.
2181
No-Plate
Off
RH
Off
Full size
[No-Plate]
Allows you to check all the exposure sequences
without loading a plate into the machine.
For usual operation: OFF
Off
ESC
OK
The commands set here are effective only when

they are executed from the host computer. The
commands are ignored during test exposure in
the PT-R4300.
RH
:
Allows you to operate the PT-R4300 without
lighting up the LD (laser diodes) in the recording
head.

[Full size]:
Allows you to perform exposures including the
grip margins.
2182
Plate Length
CLR
0.0 mm
When you want to calibrate the plate length sensor,

input the value of the correct plate size for Y direction. And load the measured plate.
Normally save "zero".
ESC
ning direction and the secondary scanning direction.

For details about teaching the PT-R4300 the plate
length and width for plate detection, refer to page B65.
Save Data ?
YES
B-84
fields so that the PT-R4300 will recognize the length

and width when detecting plates in the primary scan-
ENT
SAVE
2185
ESC
6) Enter values into the plate length and plate width
NO

[OK].
step 6).
OK
B.Installation
4-8-2.User settings
0300


Set plate
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE
OK
NEXT
2) Select [ETC.] and press [OK] in the screen on the
2000
left. The screen shown in step 3) will appear.
ETC.
ESC
2200
OK
3) [Set Date Time]

Sets the date and time.
Set Date Time

Punch for cleaning
[Punch for cleaning]

Operates the punch.
Consumable Timer
[Laser calibration]
Calibrates the laser in the recording head.
Language
Laser power measure
ESC
OK
NEXT
[Consumable Timer]
Checks the running time of the PT-R4300 and
sets the consumable timers.
[Language]
Sets the language used in the display.
[Laser power measure]
Measures the laser power.
[Cancel calibration]
Cancels the calibration results and restores the
original status.
B-85
B.Installation
2201
[Laser calibration]
Laser calibration
Calibrates the laser. Refer to 3-7-4 Laser Calibration screen in chapter D. The screen is shared
Cancel calibration
Calibration info.
by the User Maintenance and the Maintenance

screens.
Return error to host

Option setting
ESC
OK
NEXT
[Calibration info.]
Displays the calibration information.
[Return error to host]
Sends the error information to the host computer.
[Option setting]
Allows the setting of the options that can be accessed by customers.
(1) Set Date/Time

2200
1) Select [Set Date Time] and press [OK] in the screen
Set Date Time
on the left. The screen shown in step 2) will appear.

Punch for cleaning
Consumable Timer
Language
Laser power measure
ESC
OK
NEXT
2210
CLR
Year/Month/Day
2001
2) Check or enter the date and press [SAVE]. The

Time
10: 10
ESC
ENT
SAVE
2215
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
B-86
NO

[OK].
step 2).
OK
B.Installation
(2) Punch for cleaning
2200
1) Select [Punch for cleaning] and press [OK] in the

screen on the left. The screen shown in step 2) will
Set Date Time

Punch for cleaning
appear.
Consumable Timer
Language
Laser power measure
ESC
OK
NEXT
2) Press [OK] to start operating all punches. Pressing

[ESC] or [Cancel] returns you to the screen shown in
2270
step 1).
Start OK ?
ESC
OK
Cancel
B-87
B.Installation
(3) Cosumable Timer
2200
1) Select [Consumable Timer] and press [OK] in the

Set Date Time

Punch for cleaning
appear.
Consumable Timer
Language
Laser power measure
ESC
OK
NEXT
2) Check or enter values into the following fields.

Running time:
2240
Running time
0h
Actual running time
The total time the power has been ON.

Actual running time:
0h
Exposure time
0h
The time the PT-R4300 has actually been in operation.
Plate winding cycles

0
ESC
SAVE
NEXT
Exposure time:
The amount of time exposure has been performed.
Plate winding cycles:
NEXT
The number of times plates have been loaded.

Exterior cover filter:
2241
Exterior cover filter

(Max:1000h)
78 h
Clamp cycles
(MAX:20000)
786
Plate winding cycles/ye
786
RESET
The usage time of the external cover filter. When

the running time reaches the maximum time
(1000 hours), a message appears telling you to replace the external cover filter. After replacing the
external cover filter, press [RESET] to reset the
usage time to 0 h.
ESC
SAVE
NEXT
2242
Punch cycles
(Max:10000)
Punch cycles
(Max:10000)
Punch cycles
(Max:10000)
Punch cycles
(Max:10000)
No.1
ESC
SAVE
Clamp cycles:
The number of the clamp operations. When the
accumulated count reaches the maximum
(20000), a message appears telling you to replace
78
No.2
the clamps.
Plate winding cycles/ye:
78
No.3
78
No.4
The number of plate winding operations within a

year.
78
NEXT
Punch cycles No. 1 to 8:

The number of punch operations. When the accumulated count reaches the maximum (10000), a
message appears telling you to replace the
punches.
B-88
B.Installation
2245

[OK].
Save Data ?
YES
ESC

step 2).
NO
OK
(4) Language
2200
1) Select [Language] and press [OK] in the screen on
Set Date Time
the left. The screen shown in step 2) will appear.
Punch for cleaning

Consumable Timer
Language
Laser power measure
ESC
OK
2250
NEXT
2) Select the desired language and press [OK]. The
English
Japanese
AUX
ESC
OK
2255
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
NO

[OK].
step 2).
OK
B-89
B.Installation
(5) Laser power measure
2200
[Laser power measure]
Set Date Time
Measures the laser output.

Select [Laser power measure] and press [OK] in
Punch for cleaning

Consumable Timer
the screen on the left. The screen to select the

resolution will appear.
Language
Pressing [ESC] returns you to the upper layer

Menu screen.
Laser power measure

ESC
OK
NEXT
Select the resolution for measuring the laser

power and press [OK].
2260
Resolution
ESC
1200
dpi
2000
dpi
2400
dpi
4000
dpi
2438
dpi
2540
dpi
The screen for laser output measurement will appear.
OK
Press [OK] to execute the laser power measurement.
2261
Start OK ?
ESC
OK
During the laser power measurement, the screen
2262
shown on the left is displayed.

Once the laser output measurement has been
Processing Now.
Please wait !
B-90
completed, the screen shown next will appear.
B.Installation
After completing the laser power measurement,
2263
0ch
1ch
2ch
3ch
4ch
5ch
6ch
7ch
100% 8ch
100% 9ch
100% 10ch
100% 11ch
100% 12ch
100% 13ch
100% 14ch
100% 15ch
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
16ch
17ch
18ch
19ch
20ch
21ch
22ch
23ch
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
24ch
25ch
26ch
27ch
28ch
29ch
30ch
31ch
the screen shown on the left is displayed. This

screen indicates, in percentage, the laser power of
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
each channel with respect to the target light intensity.

The standard target light intensities are as noted
below.
OK
These values have been specified in the Laser

power setting screen, which is accessible by selecting Service Maintenance Input parameter
RH parameter.
1200 dpi: 240 mW/ch
2400 dpi: 240 mW/ch
2000 dpi: 270 mW/ch

2438 dpi: 240 mW/ch
2540 dpi: 230 mW/ch 4000 dpi: 240 mW/ch

The measured values are indicated in mW in the
service mode screen.
Pressing [OK] brings up the screen shown on the
left. In this screen, you can check whether the
2264
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
cables running from the main unit to the recording head are not disconnected.
OK
: When the measured light intensity is 50% or

more of the target light intensity.
: When the measured light intensity is less
than 50% of the target light intensity.

The measured values are indicated in % in the
service mode screen.
1) Operation conditions
The screen to check for the disconnection of image signal cables between the RB31
board and the recording head is displayed when the following conditions are satisfied.
The firmware version of the main unit is:
PT-R4000 : Ver. 3.06 or higher
PT-R4000II : Ver. 4.04 or higher
A plate has been loaded.
The Machine Type 2 parameter (Service Maintenance Set misc. data) has
been set to 4. (Factory set value: 0)
The 16 ch exposure mode has not been set.
1) There is no disabled or lowered light intensity LD.
2) The 16 ch exposure mode has not been selected in the Service Maintenance
Machine option select screen.
B-91
B.Installation
2) Description of the operation
The cable disconnection is checked by issuing a pseudo-image signal from the
RB31 board to light up the LDs. The light intensity of each LD is measured using the
calibration sensor. When the measured LD power is insufficient, the sensor identifies it as a cable disconnection.
The check for cable disconnection can be performed only when the recording head
is in the calibration position.
3) Timing of the check
The cable disconnection check timing is:
After the regular light intensity measurement
1) Before exposing the first plate after turning ON the power supply
2) Before exposing a plate after completing exposure of 24 plates (default value)
Note that if the output laser power of any of the LDs is out of the 5% (default value)
range of the target output value, the cable disconnection will not be checked.
4) When the disconnection of any cable between the RB31 board and the recording
head is detected:
If the output laser power of any of the LDs is less than 50% of its target value, the
following error will be issued.
Ex839
The cable between RB31 board and recording head is disconnected.
When this error is issued, the exposure operation is canceled and it can be resumed
after resetting the error and performing an initialization.
B-92
B.Installation
(6) Cancel calibration
2201
[Cancel calibration]
Laser calibration
It cancels the laser calibration result and returns

to the original status.
Cancel calibration
Calibration info.
In User Settings screen, select [Cancel calibration] and hit [OK], and then the resolution selec-
tion screen is displayed.
Option setting
[ESC]
ESC
OK
NEXT
Returns to User Settings screen.

Select the resolution that you would like to cancel
2280
Resolution
1200
dpi
2000
dpi
2400
dpi
4000
dpi
2438
dpi
2540
dpi
ESC
the calibration, and hit [OK].

The calibration cancellation screen is displayed.
OK
2281
The date when the calibration is performed and

its status are displayed past 5 times.
9/20 15:35 32ch 100%
9/10 10:15 32ch 100%
8/20 13:35 32ch 100% E0816
Select the calibration number that you would like

to return and hit the key. The confirmation of
8/15 19:35 32ch 100%
calibration cancellation screen is displayed.
ESC
OK
Press [OK] to execute the laser power measure-
2282
ment.
Start OK ?
YES
ESC
NO
OK
The left screen is displayed during performing.

It returns to User Settings screen after the pro-
2283
cessing is completed.
Processing Now
Please wait !
B-93
B.Installation
(7) Calibration info.
2201
1) Select [Calibration info.] and press [OK] in the

Laser calibration
Cancel calibration
appear.
Calibration info.
Option setting
ESC
OK
NEXT
2) The calibration information will appear. Pressing

[ESC] returns you to the screen shown in step 1).
[Calibration period]
Displays the total time from the start of exposure until automatic calibration is performed. (Usually every 16 hours)
[Time to next calibration]
Displays the exposure time remaining until the next automatic calibration.
[Reso]
Displays resolutions.
[Channel]
32ch:
0 to 15ch:
Indicates that the 32 laser diode channels are calibrated for exposure.
Indicates that laser diode channels 0 to 15 are calibrated for exposure as
some of channels 16 to 31 cannot be calibrated to a specific light intensity.
16 to 31ch: Indicates that laser diode channels 16 to 31 are calibrated for exposure as
some of channels 0 to 15 cannot be calibrated to a specific light intensity.
[Pow.]
Displays the percentage of light intensity to which the laser diodes have been calibrated
relative to the preset light intensity value, which is regarded as 100%. Usually the calibrated value should be 100%. When the value displayed here is less than 100%, it indicates that there are some channels that cannot be calibrated to the same value as the
preset light intensity and so the channels are calibrated to a lower light intensity than the
preset light intensity. However, the laser diodes are calibrated to a higher light intensity
than the value preset in the media type setting, therefore this will have no effect on
exposure quality. When ??? is displayed, it indicates that the calibration is not performed normally.
B-94
B.Installation
[Cal.]
Displays [req.] until calibration is performed after exposure is completed for the time
displayed in [Calibration period] and also when calibration is required. Displays [done]
when calibration is performed.
[Warning]
Displays the code of any warning/error that occurs while calibration is being performed.
Displays nothing when calibration is performed normally.
(8) Return error to host
Exposure cannot be interrupted from the host computer. Therefore, the interruption command is
sent to the host computer when the power of the main unit is turned OFF during exposure.
2201
1) Select [Return error to host] and press [OK] in the
Laser calibration

appear.
Cancel calibration
Calibration info.
Option setting
ESC
OK
NEXT
2) Press [OK] to send an error to the host computer.

Pressing [ESC] or [Cancel] returns you to the screen
2270
shown in step 1).
Start OK ?
ESC
OK
Cancel
B-95
B.Installation
(9) Option setting
2201
1) Select [Option setting] and press [OK] in the screen

on the left. The screen shown in step 2) will appear.
Laser calibration
Cancel calibration
Calibration info.
Option setting
ESC
OK
NEXT
2) Press [SAVE] to save the data. Pressing [ESC] returns you to the screen shown in step 1).
[Buzzer while trans]
Buzzer for rear unloading
ON/OFF /LOUD
[Mistake plate]
Plate that is loaded incorrectly
Remove/Discharge
[Inter leaf warning]
Warning of interleaf discharge
OFF/10 sheets/.../90 sheets/100 sheets
[Preload button]
ON/OFF/COUNTER
[Empty warning]
Warning that no plates remain
ON/OFF
B-96
B.Installation
4-9.Exposure check
1) Perform a test exposure with the plate sizes to be used by the customer following the illustration below.
Use the test patterns 0% and 50% from the Home side to the Away side, and set [Full size]
to ON.
Make sure that there is no plate looseness and also check the grip margins. The following
illustrates the use of a positive-type plate. (For details of adjustment procedures.)
50%
0%
100mm
50%
100mm
2) Perform a full size plate exposure using the Grid pattern and check for any slanting of the
image. (For details of the adjustment parameter.)
3) Perform an exposure via the RIP and check the exposed image with the items described
below.
Starting point for image exposure (For details of the adjustment parameter.)
Image position relative to plate (For details of the adjustment parameter.)
Checking of effective image area (grip margins 12 mm/8 mm) (For details of the adjustment parameter.)
4) When attaching the punch system for printing machine (optional punch), check the edge of
plate and the horizontal position of the punch.
B-97
B.Installation
5.Punch attachment (option)

5-1.Attachment
The PT-R4300 can optionally incorporate up to four punches, including five punch types in
addition to the registration punch. Customers should attach the optional punches.If optional
punches are provided with the PT-R4300, attach them following the procedure described below.
<Punch types>
Bacher 220, 425
DS
400, 500
Protocol 458
Heidel
Komori
425, 393
550
Maximum attachable punch number: 4 punches

1) Punch set check
Confirm that all required parts, such as punches,
bases, parallel pins, attachment screws and tilt pins,
are set.
(The figure on the left shows a Heidel punch set.)
2) Punch attachment to the base

After confirming the punch front margin the customer uses, insert parallel pins into the base holes
and mount a punch block on them.The base can be
used with either side up. A base whose upper surface
shows an H mark should be used on the Home
Parallel pin
Magnet sensor
side, and one with an A mark should be used on

the Away side.
3) Magnet sensor attachment
Attach punch magnet sensors facing the marked side
up.
Be sure to insert the magnet sensors to the furthest end.

Ser.NO
Punch No.
When you adjust the sensor, ensure that the

punches are not extended by executing an Actuator test.
B-98
B.Installation
4) Punch attachment to the main unit
Make sure that no dirt or scratches are found on the
main units punch attachment bases before attaching
Pins
the punches.When attaching the punches, make sure

that they touch the pin stoppers on the main unit side.
Check the type of optional punch that the cus-
No dirt or scratches on the attachment surface (also on the

punch side)
tomer will use as the required margin at the

edge of a plate may vary depending on the
punch type.
Always turn OFF the power to the main unit
during the punch attachment.
When the punch is attached (Home side)
When the punch in attached (Away side)
5) Connecting connectors
Connect the connectors for motors and sensors. The
connectors are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 from the
Home side. (Registration punches are always connected to Nos. 3 and 4.)
Be careful not to misunderstand the relationships between actual punch attachment positions and connector numbers.The motor connectors are marked
M.
PT-R4300 with punches attached
B-99
B.Installation
5-2.Setting the punch name (Service menu)
Punch settings can be made on the main unit with the
procedure described below.
0301
1) Turn ON the power to the main unit, select

[Service] and then press [OK]. (Password:
Infomation
Set punch name
4000or 4300)
Service
ONLINE
3051
OK
NEXT
2) Select Machine option select and press [OK].
Input parameter
I/O Read/Write
Initialize data
Special action
ESC
3706
OK
NEXT
3) Set Punch to ON and press [SAVE].
Punch adjust
Calibration position
Set punch data
RH parameter
Drum parameter
ESC
B-100
OK
NEXT
B.Installation
3880
No.1
Block
0
Width
0
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
No.7
No.8
No.9
ESC
3880
SAVE
No.1
Block
0
Width
0
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
No.7
No.8
No.9
ESC
CLR
punch number and enter the connector numbers

to which the punches are connected, then press
the [ENT] key.For example, when you wish to
attach the punches to the connectors Nos. 2 and
5, enter 25.
Enter 25 in this field, for example.
ENT
CLR
SAVE
4) Move the cursor to the Block field next to the
5) Enter the punch width in the Width field and

press the [ENT] key, then press [SAVE].
Enter 425 in this field, for example.
ENT
B-101
B.Installation
5-3.Setting the punch name (Main menu)
If optional punch units are installed in the PT-R4300, service personnel will register the name of
each punch unit as one of the punch options (from 1 to 9) on the screen so that you can select and
use it more easily.
The punch name-setting screen also displays the punch units registered pitch in the Maintenance screen.
Although a punch option can be used without registering its name, be sure to register a name for
each option to facilitate punch unit selection during printing machine setting.
0300
1) In the offline screen, press [NEXT]. The screen

Set plate
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE
OK
NEXT
2) Select [Set punch name] and press [OK]. The punch
0301
name setting screen shown in step 3) will appear.

Infomation
Set punch name
Service
ONLINE
OK
NEXT
1200
Punch 1
780 mm
Punch 2
425 mm
Punch 3
0 mm
Punch 4
0 mm
Punch 5
0 mm
ESC
OK
3) Select the number that you intend to set a punch

name and press [OK]. The screen shown in step 4)
will appear.
NEXT
Punch pitch
B-102
B.Installation
ESC
@
CLR
SPC
4) Enter a name for a punch (e.g., Bacher 780 mm) in

the screen on the left.
BS
BS
ENT
CLR
SPC
Moves the cursor.

Enters a space.

ESC

1158
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
NO
[OK].
step 3).
OK
B-103
B.Installation
5-4.Tilt correction method
Required items
Bacher register pins
Parts code: 030100072
Name: Register pin
P la te
6
.3 5
Loupe
1) Have two plates with punched holes ready. Turn
OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and remove the rear
cover.
E m u ls io n
s u rfa c e
2) Set these plates with their emulsion surfaces facing

each other as shown in the figure on the left and slide
the Bacher register pins into the registration pin
B a c h e r re g is te r
p in ( 6 .3 5 )
holes (round).
3) Using a loupe (10x), measure the difference between
the layered outer punch holes (indicated as A in
the figure on the left) to check the deviation of these
plates.
Correct the measured deviation (A) following the
procedure described below.
S to p p e r p in
S to p p e r p in
4) Assume that the measured deviation (A) was 50 m.

As the deviation can be corrected by shifting the
Home-side punch by 50 m, remove the punch on
which the Home-side option punch is attached and
S id e s to p p e r p in
T e m p la te
replace the parallel pins (stopper pins) with tilt pins

with a 4.9 mm outer diameter.
A w a y-s id e o p tio n p u n c h
4 .6
H o m e -s id e o p tio n p u n c h
S id e s to p p e r p in
Set the tilt pins to the surface of the punch so
4 .9
4 .8
4 .7
that the end of the pin with the required outer

diameter is facing upward.
S h a p e o f tilt p in s
Be careful not to use an incorrectly sized tilt pin

as the diameters vary depending on the shape
of the tilt pin, as shown in the figure on the left.
Use of a tilt pin allows you to shift the punch
position in increments of 50 m.
B-104
B.Installation
Punch
5) Restore the option punch to its original position.

E n s u re th a t
th e p u n c h
e d g e to u c h e s
th e tilt p in s .
T e m p la te
T ilt p in
When restoring the punch, always ensure that

the punch edge touches the tilt pins.
6) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and make
punch holes on the plate. Then check the plate deviation following step 3) above.
B-105
B.Installation
6.Relocation
This section describes the procedure for relocating the PT-R4000II/PT-R4300 and the relevant
operational precautions.
1) Prior to removing the power cable
Move the recording head using the Service/Maintenance Menu screen so that the recording head fixing bracket can be attached.
Enter the Recording unit test screen.
Enter the RH positioning screen.
Move the recording head by 365 mm.
(The point where the recording head fixing bracket is attached.)
Ensure that the transfer path is in a horizontal position. (If not, the transfer path fixing
bracket cannot be attached.)
Confirm that there is no plate loaded on the recording drum and then confirm that the
trailing edge clamps are located at the clamp driver section.
2) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and remove the power cable, signal cable, blower
power cable, blower signal cable, and blower hose.
3) Cleaning
Remove the external cover and clean the inside of the machine.
<Points to be cleaned>
Feed guides (front and rear of the nip roller)
Nip roller, discharge roller
Discharge guide
Punch sections (If the punches have been used for a long time, some aluminum particles
will be left around them.)
Surface of the recording drum
Recording head (cover top and objective lens)
4) Attaching fixing brackets
Attach the fixing brackets according to the following procedure.
1.
Squeeze roller fixing brackets

(HOME side)
Cleaning roller fixing brackets
Attach the fixing brackets to the squeeze roller

and the cleaning roller.
The fixing brackets for the squeeze roller and

the cleaning roller should be located symmetrically.
Each fixing bracket for the squeeze roller is secured with a nut. Be careful not to drop the nut.
<HOME side>
B-106
<AWAY side>
Ensure that the fixing brackets for the squeeze

roller properly touch the squeeze roller shaft.
B.Installation
Make sure that the end of each fixing brackets

screw touches the bearing section of the cleaning
roller.
<Fixing screws>
Squeeze roller fixing brackets
Spring washer and thick washer (for M4)
Nut (for M4)
Cleaning roller fixing brackets
M4 x 10 cap bolt
2.
Attach the fixing brackets to the transfer path.
The fixing brackets should be located symmetrically.

Transfer path fixing brackets
<Fixing screws>
M4 x 10 cap bolt
M5 x 12 cap bolt
M6 x 15 cap bolt
<HOME side>
<AWAY side>
Squeeze sideplate fixing brackets

3.
Attach the fixing brackets to the clamp arm and

the squeeze sideplate.
The fixing brackets should be located symmetrically.

<HOME side>
<AWAY side>
Clamp arm fixing brackets
Note that if a longer screw is mistakenly used

for securing the fixing brackets for the squeeze
sideplate, it will contact the clamp driver frame.
Firmly secure the clamp arm.
<Fixing screws>
Clamp arm fixing brackets
M5 x 12 cap bolt
M6 x 15 cap bolt
Squeeze sideplate fixing brackets
M5 x 8 cap bolt
B-107
B.Installation
4.
Attach the fixing brackets to the engine base.
Be sure to secure the fixing screws in the order shown in the figure below. If you mistakenly secure the screws on the frame side first, the engine base may move during transportation of the machine, which could result in misregistration and front sensor error.
Home side on the front side
Away side on the front side
Center of the rear side
<Fixing screws>
M10 x 25 cap bolt
<Procedure for securing the engine base fixing brackets>
a. First secure the four screws by hand.
b. Gradually tighten the four screws using a hexagonal wrench. (Tighten the screws in 60 degree
increments.)
c. Finally, tighten the screws on the engine base side and then tighten those on the frame side.
While tightening the screws, check the contact between the engine base and the fixing bracket.
1
E n g in e b a se s id e
E n g in e b a se fixin g
b ra c ke t
3
G ra d u a lly tigh te n e a ch
s cre w in 6 0 d e g re e
in c re m e n ts . (4 p la c e s)
F in a lly , s e c u re th e
s c re w s in n u m e ric a l
o rd e r (fro m 1 to 4 ).
F ra m e sid e
Recording head fixing brackets
5.
Attach the fixing screws for the recording head.

The fixing brackets are attached to the recording
head base and the electrical system section.
Left side
Right side
If the fixing bracket positions have shifted laterally, adjust them by turning the knob for the lateral feed motor.
Do not touch the ball screw or rail. (This can
cause rust.)
Electrical system sec- For PT- R4300 (s/n:

7, 9 onward) only
tion fixing brackets
B-108
Reference) Rust preventive lubricant for the rail

ThreeBond 1804
Upper side
B.Installation
<Fixing screws>
Recording head fixing brackets
M6 x 15 cap bolt
Electrical system section fixing brackets
M5 x 12 cap bolt
Ball screw
fixing bracket
6.
Attaching the fixing bracket to the ball screw

<Fixing screws>
M4 x 10 cap bolt
7.
Attaching the fixing bracket to the blower

<Fixing screws>
M10 x 25 cap bolt
M6 x 15 cap bolt

Cushioning material for nip roller
8.
Attaching the cushioning materials

Open the door of the PT-R4300 and remove the
discharge tray. Attach each piece of cushioning
material with tape to the positions indicated in
the figure.
Left side
Right side
Cushioning material for discharge tray
Next, replace the discharge tray, attach cushioning materials for the discharge guide with tape,
and then tape the fixing screws for the discharge
guide.
Fixing screws
Left side
Right side
Discharge tray
B-109
B.Installation
Iinterleaf
9.
Protecting the discharge roller

Cover the discharge roller of the transfer path with
interleaf or other material.
If you do not cover the discharge roller, it may

press tightly against the lower roller and an abnormal sound may be heard when a plate is disFilter
charged.
10. Attaching the filter protection tape
Tape the filter onto the left side cover of the PTR4300.
Tape
11. Packing the punch debris receptacle

Punch debris
receptacle
Remove the punch debris receptacle from the rear

cover and pack it.
12. Attaching the hoist attachments

Attach the hoist attachments and the connecting
beam to the lower section of the machine.
Hoist attachments
connecting beam
13. Others
Protect the operation panel, connector connecting
sections, and other parts with vinyl bags.
B-110
B.Installation
7.Installation check sheet

Installation data:
Person in charge:
Mfg. No.: PT-R4000/PT-R4000II/PT-R4300 (s/n:
Firmware: Ver.
Customer name:
Customer address:
Option: SA-L4000/MA-L4000/SA-L4300/MA-L4300/AT-T4000/Others (
Media type and plate size to use:
Optional punch:
Work descriptions
Check items
Minimum delivery Width: 1760 mm or more,
path dimensions Depth: 1150 mm or more,
Height: 1185 mm or more
Floor load capacity 3920N/m2 (400kgf/m2)
Power supply
Single-phase 200 V to 240 V +6%
-10%, 15 A
Single-phase 200 V to 240 V +6%
-10%, 20 A
Components
Check the items on the packing list.
Installation of
main unit
Removal of the
Transport fixing bracket: 17 pcs.,
transport fixing
cushioning material: 5 pcs.
brackets
Level adjustment
Blower connection
Power connection
to main unit
Energization
Version check
Main unit, panel, recording head
Initial settings
Plate type
Plate
Printing machine information
Exposure conditions
Operation checks Lowest position of the transfer path
mm (Margin
mm)
Remarks
Check
Main unit only (common to the PT-R4000 (II) and

PT-R4300)
SA-L/MA-L included
Ensure that the distance between the transfer path

and the stopper is within 0.5 mm.
Plate loading position onto the drum Ensure that the largest size plate comes into contact
with the drum around the area below the leading
edge clamp position.
Positional relationship between the Ensure that the Away side of the plate is inclined
plate and the registration pins while 0.5 to 1.0 mm with respect to the Home side of the
the plate is being transferred.
plate. (Up to 420)
Plate side alignment
Ensure that the centering unit bearing is in touch
with the plate.
Left/right position of the plate with Ensure that the center of the registration pins aligns
respect to the registration pins of the with the center of the plate punches or are slightly
recording drum
shifted to the right (within 0.5 mm).
Timing when the nip roller is
Ensure that, during plate winding, the plate momenreleased
tarily stops approximately 3 mm before reaching
the registration pins.
Plate winding condition
Ensure that the plate is in touch with the registration pins.
Operation of the leading edge
detection sensors
Front sensor offset value
Displacement sensor offset value
B-111
B.Installation
Work descriptions
Check items
Operation checks Leading edge clamp grip margin
Trailing edge clamp grip margin
Teaching of plate lengths in the Y
direction
Laser calibration
Registration punch positions
Processor setting Mitsubishi: 30 C, 20 S; Fuji: 30 C,
checks
12 S; KPG: 30 C, 25 S
Exposure adjust- Focus, zoom, light intensity
ment
Exposure checks Exposure of the line and space
pattern on the entire plate
Any scratches on unexposed plates
Exposure of tint images
Exposure of the grid pattern
Installation of the
punch system for
printing machine
RIP connection
Exposure checks
from the RIP
B-112
Remarks
13.2 mm (for the standard 15 mm type)
7 mm
Ensure that an error occurs when the plate length is
2.5 mm of the specified length.
Check
Modify the Punch adjust value, if necessary.
Checking for the plate looseness (all sizes)
Checking positive plates by exposing 85% (0%)

tint and negative plates 100% tint.
Checking for tilt of the exposed grid pattern and
confirmation of correct exposure size and plate registration
Checking the margins and left/right

positions
Effective image area

Grip margins and left/right exposure
positions
Screen gradation
Checking the resolution (dpi) and screen ruling that
are used by the user.
C. Replacement &
Adjustment
C.Replacement & Adjustment
1. Main belt replacement

1) Confirm that the power to the PT-R4300 has been
turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover.
Motor plate
2) Loosen the motor plate screw.

Next mortor plate move to up.
3) Remove the encoder fix plate.

(Not need remove encorder)
Replacement main belt.
Do not need oil for belt.

When replacement belt,cut the tie band(down
side).
Encoder fix plate
4) The appropriate belt tension for the PT-R4000/

4000II is 6 to 20 kgf. Adjust the belt tension until it is
within this range using the belt tension jig.
First remove the screw that secures the encoder
cable and then attach the belt tension jig as shown in
the photo on the left.
Next, temporarily secure the motor plate using the
motors own weight.
Once the jig bolt has come into contact with the motor plate surface, rotate the hexagonal bolt a half turn
Belt tension jig
and secure the motor plate screw. The belt tension

has now been adjusted appropriately.
If the belt vibrates or the output image appears improperly, further rotate the hexagonal bolt approximately one-sixth of a turn to increase the tension.
Belt tension should not be excessively tightened

or loosened.
Tension adjusting bolt
C-1

5) Fix the encoder fix plate.And remove the belt tension jig.
Next fix the encoder cable,turn ON the power to the
PT-R4300.
6) Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen to ad-
0101
just the drum home position.

<Drum home position adjustment method>
P T- R 4 X X X
Simultaneously press the two areas marked

with circles on the screen shown on the left.
START
01.05.01
V1.00
Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu

screen.
Enter the Drum Test screen and press Zero
Return. (The pulse at the encoder home position will be checked.)
Rotate the drum by hand until it reaches the
position where lock pins can be inserted.
(The drum can be rotated in the either direction.)
Execute the Actuator test command to insert
the lock pin into the drum on both the Home
and Away sides.
Position where the lock pin can be inserted into the drum
Enter the Drum base position screen from

the Input parameter screen then read and
save the drum home position.
(Save the setting.)
It is also possible to initialize the main unit.
7) Load a plate onto the drum and perform exposure of
a test pattern to check that the image is output with
no problem.
A jig for the PT-R4300 is currently being developed.
(As of May 7, 2002)
<Required tools and jigs>

L-shaped wrench (for M6 screws and M4 set
screws)
Belt tension jig
<Required work time>
Approximately 1 hour
C-2

How to adjust the belt tension without using a belt tension jig
1) Push one side of the belt toward the opposite side with your hand and measure the space
between the belt positions.
2) After replacing the belt, push one side of the belt toward the opposite side with your hand
and adjust the belt tension until the space between the belt positions is equivalent to that of
the previous belt.
3) Load a plate onto the drum and perform exposure of a test pattern to check that the image is
output with no problem.
C-3
2. Encoder replacement
Encoder
turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover.

2) Remove the encoder cover.
3) Loosen the two M3 set screws which are used to fix

the encoder to the drum shaft.The encoder is hollow.
A drum shaft goes into the encoder center hole and
connects it with the encoder.
4) Remove the encoder fixing screws and replace the

encoder with a new one. Also replace the cable tie
band with a new one.
Positions for encoder fixing screws
5) Insert the drum shaft into the encoder hole until the
plate spring bracket used for the encoder attachment
comes into contact with the attachment plate.
One of the set screws must be set against the shafts
D-cut portion.
Push the encoder to the
parts contact point.
Attachment plate
Attachment plate
C-4
Encoder

6) Fix the set screws while the drum is rotating.Install
the encoder so that any distortion of its rear side
caused by rotation of the drum is within 50 m. If the
amount of distortion exceeds 50 m, it will result in
deterioration of the image quality.
If the centers cannot be adjusted precisely, set

the shafts D-cut portion with the other set screw.
Set the encoder distortion to within
50 m with a micro gauge.
7) Re-attach the encoder cover and turn ON the power.
0101
P T- R 4 X X X
8) Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen to adjust the drum home position.
<Drum home position adjustment method>
START
01.05.01
V1.00
Simultaneously press the two areas marked

with circles on the screen shown on the left.
Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu
screen.
Enter the Drum Test screen and press Zero
Return. (The pulse at the encoder home position will be checked.)
It is also possible to initialize the main unit.

Rotate the drum by hand until it reaches the
position where lock pins can be inserted.
(The drum can be rotated in the either direction.)
Execute the Actuator test command to insert
Position where the lock pin can be inserted into the drum
the lock pin into the drum on both the Home

and Away sides.
Enter the Drum base position screen from
the Input parameter screen then read and
save the drum home position.
Turn OFF and ON the power to the PTR4300 to initialize the machine.
C-5

9) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and re-attach
the right side cover.
L-shaped wrench (for M4 screws and M3 set
screws)
Ball driver (for M3 screws)
Magnet stand
Micro gauge (minimum scale: 10 m)
Tie band (small size: 2 pcs.)
C-6
3. Adjusting the automatic balancer weight detection sensors

(Perform this procedure when the operations such as weight replacement, sensor replacement/
adjustment, etc. are required.)
3505
RH zero return
turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover,

front cover, front left cover and rear cover.
RH positioning
Focus zero return
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300.

Focus positioning
Zoom zero return
ESC
OK
NEXT
Enter the Recording head test screen.

Input 350 mm and press OK.
(This facilitates observation of the balancer
movement.)
Weight
3) Weights will not be positioned against the outer side

of the guide groove of the drum immediately after
being moved (or attached) by hand (for example after a weight replacement.)The weights are normally
pressed against the outer side of the guide groove
because they are moved there by centrifugal force.
If the weights are not correctly pressed against the
outer side of the guide groove, the hole of each
weight will be positioned inwards (or downwards) in
respect to its correct position and thus, will be misGuide groove
Bracket
aligned with the pushpin position. If this occurs,

push the weights up toward the outer side by hand.
4) Sensor adjustment
Enter the Special action 2 screen.
Enter the Balancer test screen.
Specify the printing machine setting number in
the Printing No. *> screen and press OK.
(Enter the setting number from among 1 to 15 to
*)
Adjust the brackets for the balancer

weight position detection sensors in
the front and back directions (as indicated with an arrow in the figure
above.)
According to the setting selected above, the PTR4300 automatically moves the weights on the
Home side first. (After the Home side weights are
completely moved, the Away side ones will be
moved.)
When the weights are moved, check whether or
not the tip of the moving pin properly enters the
center hole of each weight.
C-7

If it is misaligned, adjust the bracket for the balancer weight position detection sensor in the
front and back directions.
An error will occur if the weight detection sensors are defectively positioned.
If the same printing machine setting is repeatedly selected, the weights will move only the
first time. Therefore, select a different setting
number every time.
The drum rotates clockwise when viewed from
its right.
4460
5) Confirmation
Initialize
Balancer test
Enter the Special action 2 screen.

Enter the Balancer test screen.
Mail test
Specify the printing machine setting number in

the Printing No. *> screen and press OK.
Auto loader test

Plate pad test
ESC
OK
NEXT
(Enter the setting number from among 1 to 15 to

*) Repeat the selection several times to confirm that the weights are smoothly moving.
6) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and reattach
the removed covers.
L-shaped wrench (for M3 screws)
Ball driver (for M3 screws)
Approximately 30 minutes
(for sensor adjustment)
C-8
4. Removing the trailing edge clamps

turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover
and rear cover.
4450
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and enter the

Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
Initialize
Initialize machine status
Pick up clamp
Enter the Special action screen.

Select Put clamp on drum and press OK.
Mount the trailing edge clamps on the drum.
Check ORG-EZ
Put clamp on drum
ESC
OK
NEXT
Trailing edge clamp
3) Rotate the drum by hand until the trailing edge

clamps faces the rear side, then execute Servo ON.
Enter the Drum test screen.
Select Servo (ON) and press OK
It is easier to remove the clamps when

they are positioned as shown in the
figure above.
Hold down here to release the tabs.
4) While holding the center of the trailing edge clamp

spring section push the tabs with your fingers to remove an individual trailing edge clamp from the
drum.
Carefully conduct this operation to maintain the

flatness of the trailing edge clamps.
If any of them are not flat, a plate may detach
from the drum during exposure.
Do not wind plates while the trailing edge
Spring section
clamps are removed.

None
C-9
5. Attaching the trailing edge clamps

Before attempting to replace the trailing
edge clamps, note down the weights which
are written on the back side of each trailing edge clamp.

and rear cover.
Positioning bolts
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and rotate the

drum by hand until the positioning bolts on the drum
faces the rear side, then execute Servo ON.
Select Servo (ON) and press OK.
3) Attach the trailing edge clamps along the respective

positioning bolts on the drum.
1. Touch the trailing edge clamps to the positioning
bolts. (The spring section of each clamp is on
the upper side.)
2. Slide the trailing edge clamps laterally while they
are lightly touching the drum and then position
them when the tabs come evenly into contact
with the clamp rails.
In this state, the surfaces of the clamp tabs are
horizontal with respect to the clamp surface.
When the clamp is shifted to the right, the right
tab appears as if it is being pressed down.
C-10

3. Press the upper position (center of the spring section) of each trailing edge clamp to secure it to
the drum.
Be aware of the following points when attaching
the trailing edge clamps.
The trailing edge clamps are marked with H, M
or A on their respective back sides.
An H marked one should be used for the
Home side.
An M marked one should be used for center.
An A marked one should be used for the
Away side.
Completed trailing edge clamps
Attach the trailing edge clamps so that each

spring section is positioned on the upper side
and each plate retaining section is positioned
on the lower side.
Attach the trailing edge clamps while the outer
side of the plate retaining section touches the
positioning bolts.
Since the PT-R4300 supports wider plate sizes,
the grooved plate attachment screws interfere
with the trailing edge clamps. This makes the
attachment of the trailing edge clamps relatively difficult.
Place the spring section onto the area above
the screws and secure each clamp. Then, align
the clamps with the positioning bolts.
4) Input the total weight of the new trailing edge
4130
CLR
Clamper:
381.2[g]
Balancer:
165.0[g]
ESC
SAVE
ENT
clamps.
Enter the Input parameter screen.
Enter the Set weight screen.
Input the total weight of the three trailing edge
clamps into the ***.** field of gclamper
***.**.
After the total weight input is complete, press
ENT and SAVE.
Always replace the three clamps at the same

time.
C-11

4450
5) Mount the trailing edge clamps to the drive bar.
Initialize

Select Pick up clamp and press OK.
Pick up clamp
Check ORG-EZ

the removed covers.
Put clamp on drum

ESC
OK
NEXT

None
C-12
6. Replacement procedure for the trailing edge clamp arm drive motor (M20)
When the motor (M20) is operating
1) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and remove
the right side cover and the rear cover.
4450

Initialize
Pick up clamp
ESC

Check ORG-EZ
Attach the trailing edge clamps to the drum.
Put clamp on drum
3) Rotate the drum by hand until either the leading or
OK
NEXT
trailing edge clamps are positioned under the clamp

arm and then execute Servo ON.
4) Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
Select Trail edge clamp arm DOWN and press
OK.
Ensure that, at this moment, the clearance between the end of the hook pin and the drum surface is approximately 1 mm.
5) Remove the trailing edge clamp arm drive motor
(M20), which is attached to the Home side, together
with the gear box (8DG150).
6) After replacing the motor, turn ON the power to the
PT-R4300.
Select and execute Trail edge clamp arm UP
Motor with gear box
and DOWN repeatedly to confirm proper operation.
Sensor adjustment is not necessary at this stage.
C-13

When the motor (M20) is not operating
the right side cover and the rear cover.
2) Rotate the drum by hand until the leading edge
clamps are positioned at the lower side of the drum
and then execute Servo ON.
Bolt
Cam follower flange

3) Insert a bolt into a hole on the cam follower flange
on both the Home and Away sides. Remove the trailing edge clamp arm drive motor (M20), which is attached to the Home side, together with the gear box
(8DG150).
Take care during the above removal operation.

Removing the drive motor attachment screws
detaches the motor gear from the other gear. At
this moment, the weight of the clamp arm will
cause it to fall onto the drum side. Support the
clamp arm by hand until it lowers to the screw
position and is settled.
Use an M6 bolt.
4) Replace the motor with a new one.
5) After replacing the motor, turn ON the power to the
PT-R4300.
Select and execute Trail edge clamp arm UP
and DOWN repeatedly to confirm proper operation.
Drive motor and Gear box
Sensor adjustment is not necessary at this stage.
C-14
7. Adjusting the trailing edge clamp arm origin and end sensors
Adjustment of the trailing edge clamp arms
is not required when only the sensors are
replaced. However, the procedure in this
section includes an explanation of sensorrelated operation checks.
4450

and rear cover.
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and enter the

Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
Initialize

Pick up clamp
ESC
Check ORG-EZ
Mount the trailing edge clamps on the drum.
Put clamp on drum
3) Rotate the drum by hand until either the leading or
OK
trailing edge clamps are positioned under the clamp

arm and then execute Servo ON. Enter the Service/
NEXT
Maintenance Menu screen.

Select Trail edge clamp arm DOWN and press
OK.
Ensure that, at this moment, the clearance between the end of the hook pin and the drum surface is approximately 1 mm.
5) Together with the gear box (8DG150), remove the
clamp arm drive motor (M20) which is attached to
the Home side.
Drive motor and Gear box
6) Move the sensor bracket to a position where the trail-
Sensor dog
ing edge clamp arm end sensor (PH21) reacts when

the clamp arm is positioned at its lower limit point
while the motor is detached, and then fix the bracket
there.
This adjustment is required only when the sensor

bracket fixing screws are loosened, for example,
when only the sensor is replaced.
In addition, this adjustment is not required when
Trailing edge clamp arm end sensor (PH21)
only the motor or sensor is replaced.

C-15

Point: The positions of origin and end sensors
for the trailing edge clamp arms are appropriate when each cam follower is horizontally set, each sensor detects a sensor
dog, and there is clearance when the area
circled in the figure on the left is pressed
on both the left and right sides.
Press this area by hand.
Cam follower
7) Once the adjustment has been completed, reattach

the motor.
Trailing edge clamp arm origin sensor (PH20)
Select Initialize and press OK to initialize the machine. Set Traid edge clamp arm to Up.
Adjust the position of the sensor bracket so that the
clamp arm unit stops at the upper limit point (visually confirmed).
This adjustment is required only when the sensor

bracket fixing screws are loosened, for example,
when only the sensor is replaced.
In addition, this adjustment is not required when
only the motor or sensor is replaced.
9) Attach the clamps to the clamp arm in accordance
with the instructions in Removing the trailing edge
clamps and Attaching the trailing edge clamps.
Repeatedly set Trail edge clamp arm to Up and
Down to confirm the smooth operation of the
clamp arms.
the removed covers.
C-16

Reference
Cam follower
Clamp arm
Drum
Clamp arm at its

lowest position
Clamp arm at its

center position
Clamp arm at its

highest position
Ineffective

Screwdriver (cross-slot type)
C-17
8. Adjusting the leading edge clamp open/close sensors

<Introduction>
The type of compression springs used for the leading edge clamps have been changed.
This is due to an engineering change to facilitate adjustment of the opening width of the
leading edge clamps and to stabilize the open/close operation.
(For details, refer to technical information No. 0009. PT-R4300s with serial No.: 0071
and onward.) Note that different types of compression spring cannot be used together.
turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover,
rear cover and front cover.
3202
M20:Squeeze roller
Up
Down
M20:Tail edge clamp arm
Up
Down
M24:Tail edge clamp hook
Hold
Rele
M30:Leading edge clamp
Up
Down
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and rotate the

drum by hand until the leading edge clamps are positioned at the lower side of the drum. Then, follow the
procedure below. Enter the Service/Maintenance
Menu screen.
ESC
OK

Set Leading edge clamp to Down.
Then, move the attachment position of the brackets for the leading edge clamp open sensors
(PH31H, PH31A) in the front/back directions so
that the clearance between the leading edge
clamp release bar and the drum can be adjusted.
Adjustment values
PT-R4000 (up to serial number 70): 5 mm
PT-R4000 (serial numbers 71 to 420): 4.5 mm
PT-R4000II (serial number 421 and onward):
Point: Use a 5 mm diameter hexagonal wrench to check the 5 mm
clearance.
4.5 mm
PT-R4300 (serial number 1 and onward): 4.5
mm
Set Leading edge clamp to up.
Select Leading edge clamp and press OK.
Rotate the drum to the plate winding start position.
For 4.5 mm: Adjust using a 4 mm hexagonal wrench and a 15

cm scale.
C-18

Set Lock pin (Home) to In.
Set Lock pin (Away) to In.
Perform the drum positioning.
Select Servo (OFF) and press OK.
Release the servo function.
View the machine from the front or the side to confirm that the leading edge clamps open by approximately 4 mm.
Leading edge clamp
And also make sure that the gear of the motor should
not reverse when its movement stopped.
The width of the opening for the leading edge clamp should be approximately 4 mm.
Bracket for leading edge clamp open/
close end sensor (PH31H)

Set Leading edge clamp to Down.
Set Leading edge clamp to Up.
Repeat this process to confirm smooth operation.
Select Initialize and press OK to initialize the machine.
the removed covers.

L-shaped wrench (for M5 and M4 screws)
C-19
9. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the plate side edge

detection sensors for side alignment (PH61H, PH61A)
After replacing the plate side edge detection sensors, the following sensor offset values need to
be adjusted.Use the 510 x 400 x 0.15 plate. (If it is not available, use the thinnest plate from
among the customers plates.)
1. Coarse adjustment
turned OFF, and then remove the upper rear cover
and rear cover.
Graduated scale
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 to initialize the

machine.
Plate
3) Open the operation door and set a plate on the transfer path.The plate must be aligned with the graduated scale on the transfer path.
Select Centering test
Select plate size and OK
Set the plate center within 10 mm of
the path center.
If an error occurs, perform the operation in

Countermeasure for errors described later and
then go back to step 3) above.When the test has
been successfully completed with no error, press
4451
ESC key .
The first parameter in Punch Adjust has to be
Front sensor offset

Centering test
Adjust displacement sensor
will be detemined without error.

And then the middle value betweeen them has to
NVRAM backup
NVRAM restore
ESC
OK
determined by changing this value every 0.5 mm,

and then the maximum and the minimum value
be set.
NEXT
5) Shift the plate 10 mm to the Home side (Away side)

and execute the Centering test command to confirm
that no error occurs.
The cam follower pushing against one side of the

plate at this moment will not affect the operation.
C-20

2. Fine adjustment
1) Move the plate 10 mm toward the Away side and
enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
Select Centering test and press OK. At this time,
be sure that the distance between the plate center
and the path center does not exceed 10 mm.
Move the plate to the Away side.
2) If an error occurs, perform the operation in Countermeasure for errors described later and then go
back to step 1) above. When no error occurs, go on to
step 3).
3) When the plate stopper (Home side cam follower)
has pushed the plate to the farthest point on the
Away side during the centering operation, confirm
with your hands and eyes that the plate is properly
centered.
Then check the following points.
When the plate stopper has pushed the plate
too far:
Confirm here.

Reduce the second parameter value for Punch
3860
CLR
Punch adjust
0.000 [mm]
0.000 [mm]
0.000 [mm]
ESC
SAVE
ENT
Change the
value here.
adjust, execute the Centering test command

again to cancel the test mode and then go back
to step 1) above.
When the plate stopper does not reach the
plate:
Increase the second parameter value for Punch adjust, execute the Centering test command again to
cancel the test mode and then go back to step 1)
above.
When the plate stopper pushes the plate correctly:
(Although you will feel some resistance when
attempting to move the plate by hand, the
plate can be moved.)
Execute the Centering test command again to cancel the test mode and then go on to step 4) below.
C-21

4) Move the plate 10 mm toward the Home side and
enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
Execute the Centering test command. At this moment, be sure that the distance between the plate
center and the path center does not exceed 10
mm.
Move the plate to the Home side.
5) If an error occurs, perform the operation in Countermeasure for errors described later and then go
back to step 4) above.When no error occurs, go on to
step 6).
6) When the plate stopper (Away side cam follower)
has pushed the plate to the farthest point on the
Away side during the centering operation, confirm
with your eyes that the plate is properly centered.
Then check the following points.
When the plate stopper has pushed the plate
too far:
Confirm here.
3860
CLR
Punch adjust
0.000 [mm]
0.000 [mm]
0.000 [mm]
0
ESC
SAVE
ENT
Change the
value here.
Reduce the third parameter value for Punch adjust, execute the Centering test command again
to cancel the test mode and then go back to step
4) above.
When the plate stopper does not reach the
plate:
Increase the third parameter value for Punch adjust, execute the Centering test command again to
cancel the test mode and then go back to step 4)
above.
When the plate stopper pushes the plate correctly:
(Although you will feel some resistance when
attempting to move the plate by hand, the
plate can be moved.)
Execute the Centering test command again to cancel the test mode and then go on to step 7) below.
C-22

7) Align the plate center and the path center and execute the Centering test command again.Check the
plate centering condition, when the plate stopper
pushes the plate farthest at this moment.When the
plate has been properly pressed (Although you will
feel some resistance when attempting to move
the plate by hand, the plate can be moved.), execute the Centering test command again to cancel
the test mode and then complete the adjustment
operation.If the plate has been pressed too far or insufficiently, go back to step 2. 1) above.
And the plate size must be back to the catalogue size
in the end.
8) After completing the adjustment, check the amount
that each plate stopper pushes all of the different
plate sizes.
Smaller plates are likely to be pushed excessively.
the removed covers.
3860
CLR
Punch adjust
0.000 [mm]
0.000 [mm]
0.000 [mm]
ESC
SAVE
ENT
[Countermeasure for errors]

When the The size check program of the centering
function detects that the measured plate size is
shorter than expected one error message is displayed, increase the 1st parameter value in the
Punch adjust of the Input parameter in the service/
maintenance mode.
When the The size check program of the centering
function detects that the measured plate size is
longer than expected one error message is displayed, reduce the 1st parameter value in the Punch
adjust of the Input parameter in the service/maintenance mode.
When the When alignment is performed, plate set
position is out of range error message is displayed,
set the plate so that the plate center will be positioned within 10 mm of the path center.

None
C-23

<Reference>
Centering sequence (for PT-R4300)
Start
Plate thickness is 0.24

mm or less?
Yes
No
Transfer motor: 50 mm/
sec.
Both PH61H and PH61A

are OFF?
Transfer motor:
intermittent drive
Ex1c9
No
Yes
drive motor: M61
Forward rotation at 20
mm/sec.
[Moving distance]
Home side: (830 - Plate's X size) / 2 + 27.65 + offset value
Away side: (830 - Plate's X size) / 2 + 22.5 + offset value
Offset value: First parameter displayed in the screen.
Interruption of PH61H ON
status
Remaining distance is
stored. (restPH)
Interruption of PH61A ON
status
stored. (restPA)
M61 stops due to any of the

following conditions:
Remaining distance is "0".
Both PH61H and PH61A are
ON.
Remaining distance > (15 +
1.5)
Remaining distance >

2 mm
Yes
Ex156
No
PH61H or PH61A is
OFF?
Yes
Ex157
No
restPH > (15 + 1.5) mm
or
restPA > (15 + 1.5) mm
Yes
Ex1c9
No
restPH > restPA
[Home side offset value]

Second parameter displayed in the
screen.
[Away side offset value]
Third parameter displayed in the screen.
Yes
No
D = restPA - restPH
D > 1.5 mm + Away side

offset value
No

drive motor: M61
Forward rotation at 1.25
mm/sec.
D = restPH - restPA
Yes
D > 1.5 mm + Home side

offset value
D = 1.5 mm + Away side
offset value
No
Yes
D = 1.5 mm + Home side

offset value
Further movement of the plate stoppers

= 1.5 + (Home side offset value + Away side offset value - D) / 2
Waiting for 0.5 sec.

drive motor: M61
Reverse rotation by 3
mm at 5.0 mm/sec.
Waiting for specified

period

mm or less?
No
Waiting time [sec.]

= 5 - {(830 - plate's X size) / 2} / 20 / 2
Yes
Transfer motor:
Continuous feeding at 50
mm/sec.
Plate side alignment drive

motor: M61
Forward rotation by 3 mm
at 5.0 mm/sec.
Waiting for 2 sec.
Transfer motor stops.
End
C-24

Centering sequence (for PT-R4000/PT-R4000II)
Start

mm or less?
Yes
No
Transfer motor: 50 mm/
sec.
Both of PH61H and

PH61A are OFF?
Transfer motor:
intermittent drive
Ex1c9
No
Yes
drive motor: M61
Forward rotation at 20
mm/sec.
[Moving distance]
Home side: (830 - Plate's X size) / 2 + 27.65 + offset value
Away side: (830 - Plate's X size) / 2 + 22.5 + offset value
Offset value: First parameter displayed in the screen.
Interruption of PH61H ON
status
stored. (restPH)
Interruption of PH61A ON
status
stored. (restPA)
M61 stops due to either of

the following conditions:
Remaining distance is "0".
Both PH61H and PH61A are
ON.
Remaining distance >

2 mm
Yes
Ex156
No
PH61H or PH61A is
OFF?
Yes
Ex157
No
restPH > (15 + 1.5) mm
or
restPA > (15 + 1.5) mm
Yes
Ex1c9
No
restPH > restPA
[Home side offset value]

Second parameter displayed in the
screen.
[Away side offset value]
Third parameter displayed in the screen.
Yes
No
D = restPA - restPH
D > 1.5 mm + Away side

offset value
No

drive motor: M61
Forward rotation at 1.25
mm/sec.
D = restPH - restPA
Yes
D > 1.5 mm + Home side

offset value
D = 1.5 mm + Away side
offset value
No
Yes
D = 1.5 mm + Home side

offset value
Further movement of the plate stoppers

= 1.5 + (Home side offset value + Away side offset value - D) / 2
Waiting for 1 sec.

drive motor: M61
Reverse rotation by 3
mm at 5.0 mm/sec.
Waiting for specified

period

mm or less?
No
Waiting time [sec.]

= 5 - {(830 - plate's X size) / 2} / 20
Yes
Transfer motor:
Continuous feeding at 50
mm/sec.
Plate side alignment drive

motor: M61
Forward rotation by 3 mm
at 5.0 mm/sec.
Waiting for 5 sec.
Transfer motor stops.
End
C-25
10. Adjusting the trailing edge clamp hook sensor

1) Remove the right side cover, front cover and rear
cover.
4450
Initialize

Select Put clamp on drum and press OK to mount
the trailing edge clamps on the drum.
Pick up clamp
Check ORG-EZ
Put clamp on drum
ESC
OK
NEXT

and then fix the drum.
Enter the Drum screen.
Do not remove this sensor unit (on the

Away side). Only remove the sensor
unit on the left side.
4) Remove the cleaning roller. Next, remove the screws

that attach the hook lever switch sensor unit (on the
Home side only) to slightly move up the sensor unit.
While moving the clamp hook, be careful not to

catch the sensor cable as well.
Sensors (PH24-2, PH24-1)

Set Trail edge clamp hook to Rele and adjust the
tab positions for the trailing edge clamp hook
sensors (PH24-1, PH24-2.) Each hook lever that
moves up and down is positioned at its lower
limit, where a bearing cam lightly mounts the top
Tab
C-26
surface of a slide-shaped part.

Tab: A metal plate to attach the clamp hook sensor

The drive bar has been removed in the
photo above to make it easier to observe
the unit. Do not remove it, however, during
actual operation. Otherwise the accurate
adjustment of the drum and the drive bar
will be lost.
<Reference>
PH24-1 PH24-2
on
on
Rele
Hold (one pressing)
Hold (two pressings)
off
on
off
off
onThe light passage to the sensor is not obstructed.

3202
M20:Squeeze roller
Up
Down
M20:Tail edge clamp arm
Up
Down
M24:Tail edge clamp hook
Hold
Rele
Up
Down
ESC
OK

Repeatedly set Trail edge clamp to Rele and Hold
to confirm the smooth operation of the clamp
hook.
7) Re-attach the sensor unit which was removed in step
4) above. Re-attach the cleaning roller.
Activate the clamp hook to confirm that it does

not catch with the sensor cable.
8) Attach the trailing edge clamps to the drive bar following the procedures described in Removing the
trailing edge clamps and Attaching the trailing
edge clamps sections.
the removed covers.
The sensor bracket has been attached to the

Home side when the machine is delivered.

Nipper
Interlock release jig
C-27

Clamp mechanism
(Reference)
mechanism(Reference)
Sensors (PH24-2, PH24-1)

Hook lever
Jig
C-28
11. Adjusting the hook lever switch

Hook lever switches are only installed in PT-R4000s with serial numbers 1 to 35. Therefore, this
adjustment is only required for these machines.
1) Remove the right side cover, front cover and rear
cover.
4450
Initialize

Select Put clamp on drum and press OK to mount

the trailing edge clamps on the drum.
Pick up clamp
Check ORG-EZ
Put clamp on drum
ESC
NEXT
OK

and then fix the drum. Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
Enter the Drum screen.
3100
11 PH10H
PH11A2
11
PH27-1
16
PH30H
PH10A
PH20
12
PH27-2
17
PH30A
PH11H1
PH21
13
PH27-3
18
PH31H
PH11H2
PH24-1
14
PH29H
19
PH31A
PH11A1
10
PH24-2
15
PH29A
20
LS28

Set Trail edge clamp to Rele twice consecutively
to confirm that the hook lever switches (LS28)
turn ON.
<Confirmation method>
ESC
OK
NEXT
Check that all hook levers have returned.

Enter the Sensor screen to confirm that the
sensors are actually ON.
Set Trail edge clamp hook to Hold and confirm
that the hook lever switches (LS28) turn OFF. In
addition, set Trail edge clamp hook to Rele> and
confirm that the hook lever switches (LS28) are
still OFF.
C-29

Brackets for the hook lever switches
6) If the confirmations described in steps 4) and 5)

above were not successfully performed, adjust the
attachment positions of brackets for the hook lever
switches (LS28-1 to LS28-6) in the vertical direction
until the hook lever switches work as described in
steps 4) and 5).
<Adjustment point>
When Trail edge clamp is set to Rele twice
continuously, the hook lever actuators monitored by the hook lever switches (LS28-1 to
LS28-6) must be within 0.5 mm to their respective stroke end points (0.5 mm before the
red notch on each sensor micro switch is fully
pressed.)
7) Repeat steps 4) and 5) to confirm that the hook lever
switches correctly turn ON and OFF.
8) Attach the trailing edge clamps to the drive bar following the procedures described in Removing the
trailing edge clamps and Attaching the trailing
edge clamps sections.
the removed covers.

C-30
12. Sensor for detecting an interleaf on the back of the plate (PH51)
The following sensitivity adjustment is required after the sensor for detecting an interleaf on the
back of the plate is replaced.
Detection hole

machine and open the operation door.
2) Place a plate over the detection hole of the transfer
path.
3) Press the SET button for the sensor amplifier unit.At
this moment, the tuning indicator for the sensor amplifier unit will be ON (yellow LED).
Transfer path
4) Remove the plate placed over the detection hole and

place an interleaf over the detection hole.
5) Press the SET button for the sensor amplifier unit.At
this moment, the tuning indicator for the sensor amplifier unit will be ON (yellow LED).
6) Confirm that the amplifier operation indicator (red
LED) is ON when an interleaf that has been layered
Plate
with a plate is placed over the detection hole. The

indicator should be OFF when a plate alone is placed
over the detection hole or the detection hole is left
uncovered.
LON
SET Lamp
OFF.D
ON.D
OFF
DON
operation indicator
Lock
7) Turn OFF the power.
Interleaf
Sensor amplifier unit
SET button
Sensor amplifier

None
C-31
13. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the plate top side
detection sensors (PH29H, PH29A)
The following adjustment is required after the plate top side detection sensors (PH29H, PH29A)
are replaced.Be sure to turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 during the sensor replacement.
When using the PT-R4000 (Ver. 3.XX or lower)
1) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R unit and remove the
front cover and the rear cover. Then, replace the sensors.
Drum surface
22mm
PH29H
26mm
26mm
A
PH29

22mm
machine.
3) Fix the replaced sensors at the angle shown in the
figure on the left.
4) Rotate the drum until it reaches the leading edge
clamp open/close position, where lock pins can be
inserted into the drum.
Set Lock pin (Home, Away) to IN.
Set the Leading edge clamp to down and mount a
test plate (jig) from the front side.
Prepare a test plate as a jig.

(With Register Punch)
One of the users plates can be used.
less than 70mm
Trimmer

Set Leading edge clamp to up to grip the plate.
Set Lock pin (Home, Away) to OUT.
Select Servo (OFF) and press OK.
C-32

Enter the Sensor test screen.
Light up the PH29H and PH29A sensor indicators.
9) Position the drum by hand so that the sensor rays in
area around the top side of the plate seen through the
(70-80%)
detection hole.
Adjust the trimmer so that the sensor

turns ON when approximately 70 to
80% of this area of the plate is exposed
by the sensor beam.

Select Front check and press OK.
and confirm sensor doesnt light on.
Confirm that the sensor light must be off.
If not, enter the service maintenance mode,
Input parameter view
Plate
Drum position view

Adjust the value of the Front sensor.
(Decrease value can move to clock side)
Select Sensor offset.
Select Plate type and press OK.
12) Confirm the correct sensor operations by the manual
Check that the Home and Away side
sensors are simultaneously ON in the
area around the top side of the plate.
loading of a plate.
Be sure to confirm the sensor operations using all

4451
the plates that the customer will use.

And Adjust the offset if the thickness is different
Front sensor offset

Centering test
NVRAM backup
the removed covers.
NVRAM restore
ESC
OK
just in case even though the same type of plate.
NEXT

Screwdrivers (small flat-bladed type)
Tie band
Nipper
C-33

When using the PT-R4000 (Ver. 4.XX or later), PT-R4000II, or PT-R4300:
In Ver. 4.00, modifications have been made to the Front check sequence in order to enhance the
operation speed. These modifications also allow the effective detection area for Front check to
be specified by the operator.
Before modification
1. The drum was rotated toward the position for front check.
2. The drum was rotated at low speed and the positions at which the home and away front
sensors turned ON were detected according to the programmed setting.
After modification
1. The positions at which the home and away front sensors turn ON are detected in the effective detection area during drum rotation according to the operator specified setting.
#Precaution
Due to the sequence modification, upgrading the firmware to Ver. 4.00 may cause a
front sensor error and thus prevent plates from winding around the drum. To avoid
this, perform the following checks and adjustments before upgrading.
[Check and adjustment procedure]
1. Check the front check position that is currently set. After winding a plate around the drum,
select Drum test and then Front check.
Check that either the home or away front sensor is ON. The adjustment is not required when
either sensor is ON.
3300
Zero
Return
Fast
Slow
Leading
Clamp
Squeeze
Front
check
Tail
clamp
Edge
sense
Servo
(ON)
Servo
(OFF)
Error
Clear
Brake
On/Off
ESC
OK
2. When both sensors are OFF, modify the value for front sensor of Drum position accessed
from the Input parameter screen.
Adjust the front sensor value until the sensor height is level, with reference to the center
of the plate edge, so that either the home or away sensor is ON.
When the plate is located at a position where both the home and away sensors are ON,
adjust the front check position so that the plate is located at the position closest to the
point where the sensors turn ON.
3850
CLR
Drum position [pulse]

Lead clamp (load):
Front Sensor:
Tail clamp:
Squeeze roller:
Balancer pin:
Pick up clamp:
Tail clamp (unload):
Length Sensor:
ESC
C-34
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
-15
SAVE
ENT
14. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the drum vacuum

pressure sensor (P1)
The following sensitivity adjustment is required after the drum vacuum pressure sensor is replaced.
1) Remove the front left cover, left side cover and rear
cover from the PT-R4300.
2) Remove the sensor with its bracket and then remove
the sensor from the bracket.
(The sensor cannot be removed when the bracket is
attached to the machine.)Re-attach the bracket after
attaching a new sensor to it.
Also remove the blower hose if necessary.

Do not remove the rubber packing from the
bracket.
Bracket
Sensor
3) Fully rotate to the right the yellow trimmer (HYS)

which is used for sensor sensitivity setting.
4) While the drum blower is OFF, rotate the blue trimmer (SET) which is used for sensor pressure setting and adjust it to the position where the indicator
turns from ON to OFF.
Set Blower (Drum) to ON.Confirm that the sensor indicator turns ON.If not, slowly rotate the
blue trimmer (SET) to the left until the indica-
Blue trimmer
(SET)
Yellow trimmer
(HYS)
Indicator
tor turns ON.

Set Blower (Drum) to OFF.Confirm that the sensor indicator turns OFF.

Screwdrivers (cross-slot and small
flatbladed types)
Tie band
It will take a few seconds until the light turns OFF.

the removed covers.
Nipper
C-35
15. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the plate sensor

(PH6)(2 plates wind,or float)(Ser.No.0100)
The following sensitivity adjustment is required after the plate sensor is replaced.
the rear cover.
machine.
Select Adjust Displatement sensor and press OK.
4) After stop the drum rotate,two screw loose and adjust the sensor.
Dont loosen
Sensor position is sound.

Point: The height is showed as two digits on the
operation panel. The appropriate value is
within the range D2 to DC. One pulse is
10 microns.
5) Press the cancel key.
6) Adjust the sensor offset
Adjust this way

Loosen this screw

Input -9.99 on Displacement offset.
(This is the mode to get the offset.)
Load a plate.
Adjust the offset if the thickness is different just
in case even though the same type of plate.
the removed covers.

Nipper
C-36

Ser.No.0101<Introduction>
For PT-R4000s with serial numbers 100 and earlier, the reference surface for detecting multiple
plate feeding (plate looseness) was on the surface of the recording drum. However, with this
setting, the offset value (Displacement offset) did not match the predetermined one (0.8 or less)
and, thus, adjustment of the sensor height and replacement of the sensor was required during
integral adjustment.
For PT-R4000s with serial numbers 101 and onward, a black delustering seal has been attached
to the drum and the reference surface for detecting multiple plate feeding (plate looseness) has
been specified as the surface of the seal to stabilize the offset value.
Therefore, perform the following adjustment procedure when there is any problem relating to
replacement of the multiple plate feeding sensor or the sensor itself.
Black delustering
seal
Leading edge clamp

(third clamp from the
Home side)
1) Preparation
Turn ON the power to the PT-R4000, remove the
rear cover, and enter the Service/Maintenance menu
screen.
Bring the leading edge clamps near the plate top
30mm
35mm
side detection sensor, as shown in the figure on

the left, and execute Servo ON.
2) Attaching a seal
Attach a black delustering seal to the surface of the
drum beneath the third leading edge clamp from the
Home side.
Plate top side detection

sensor (PH29H)
Recording drum
Choose the attachment position of the seal

carefully to prevent it from being covered by the
leading edge clamps.
The surface of the recording drum must be
cleaned prior to attaching the black delustering
seal.
Reference)
Parts code: 100005768V00
Name: Black delustering seal (55 x 30 mm)
C-37

4100
CLR
Mfg.no(high):
58180
Mfg.no(low):
Mfg.year:
99
Mfg.month:
Machine type 2:
Machine type :
ESC
3) Changing the parameter value

Enter the Service/Maintenance menu screen.
Enter the Input Parameter screen.
Enter the Set misc. data screen.
Enter 2 for Machine type and then press the
SAVE key.
ENT
SAVE
For the Machine type parameter, 2 is set as

the command to change the sensor detection reference to the seal, therefore, this parameter
must be set to 0 when the seal is not the reference surface (i.e. it is on the drum surface as before).
4451
Front sensor offset
4) Adjusting the sensor height

Centering test
Adjust the sensor height using the following command.

Enter the Service/Maintenance menu screen.
NVRAM backup
NVRAM restore

ESC
OK
NEXT
Once the drum has stopped rotating, loosen the sensor fixing screws (2 pcs.) and move the sensor up
and down until a buzzer sounds. Then, tighten the
fixing screws.
The buzzer sounds near the point at which the con-
Dont loosen
trol panel shows A0.

Finally, press cancel on the panel to complete.
Point: The height is showed as two digits on the
operation panel. The appropriate value is
within the range 9b to A5. One pulse is 10
microns.
Note that when Adjust Displacement sensor is

Loosen this screw
C-38
Adjust this way
executed, the recording drum starts rotating toward the predetermined position.

1101
CLR
Thickness
0.24 mm
Front offset
0.00
displacement offset
-9.99
ESC
OK
ENT
Inputting -9.99 here brings you into the

mode to obtain the offset value.
5) Re-obtaining the offset value

Set media type
Input -9.99 to Displacement offset and save it.
(This brings you into the mode to obtain the offset value.)
Load a plate onto the drum.
Reenter the Set media type screen and then the
Displacement offset screen to check that the offset value has been changed.
(The offset value should have been changed to
0.1 or lower.)
Adjust the offset value when you use plates of

the same size which have different thicknesses.
To clean the seal, wipe it using alcohol. Do not
use thinner.
C-39
16. Balancer weight replacement procedure.

Enter the Recording head test screen.
Input 200 mm and press OK.
(This facilitates observation of the balancer
movement.)
Calibration Sensor
It is not necessary to do this procedure when replacing the balancer weights at Away side.
the front cover and the right side cover.
Then, remove the calibration sensor.
3) Remove the inside ring from the drum, which has the
embossment going to the drum side near the screw.
4) Remove the outside ring in combination with the inside ring removed.
Emboss
5) Replace the balancer weight.

6) Put back the rings. Press the balancer weights
Inside Ring
Outside Ring
against the outer side of the guide groove.

7) Put back the calibration sensor.
8) Turn on and initialize the machine.
And turn the drum by hand to confirm that the sensor
detects the sensor dog with the weight.
(The sensor lamp turns on when detecting.) If the
sensor does not seem to work correctly, the sensor
dog might be bent or its position is incorrrect, so ad-
Balancer Weight
just the dog.

9) Make sure that it works following procedure 3.
Auto balacner weight detecting sensor adjustment.
10) Put back the covers.
Screwdriver (cross-slot type)
C-40
17. Balancer motor unit replacement procedure.

1) Make sure that the machine is turned off and remove
Balancer motor unit
when replacing the away side motor, remove the

front cover.
2) Remove the sensor unit first and then remove the
balancer motor unit.
3) Install the new balancer motor unit.
Sensor Unit
When installing the motor, it might be little hard

because the spring of the balancer unit pushes
out, but install it with pushing.
4) Put back the sensor unit.
6) Enter the service/maintenance mode.
Actuator test
Confirm that Lock pin and Balancer pin work.
18. Balancer sensor replacement procedure.

1) Make sure that the machine is turned off and remove
Remove the front covert when replacing the

away side sensor.
2) Remove the sensor unit and replace the sensor.
3) Put back the sensor unit.

Actuator test
Confirm that Lock pin and Balancer pin work.
C-41
19. Path driving motor replacement procedure.

1) Make sure the machine is turned off and remove the
left side, the back, the front the top covers.
Drive Motor Unit
To ensure safety, secure the transfer path with

the fixing brackets before the operation.
2) Remove the drive motor unit.
The screws are under the motor unit.

3) Remove the gear from the old motor and install it on
the new motor.
4) Install the drive motor unit on the main unit.
Adjust the drive motor gear engage.
Actuator test
Confirm that the path unit goes up and down.
If it is noisy during it going up and down, adjust

the drive motor gear engage.
Do not touch the gears while the path is operating.
7) Put back the all covers.

C-42
20. Squeeze roller height adjustment

<Introduction>
One of the possible causes of plate looseness on the leading edge side is that the full length of the
squeeze roller may not contact the plate at the same time.
In this case, adjust the squeeze roller height according to the following procedure.
Fulcrum bracket (Home side)
Squeeze sideplate (Home side)
1) Preparation
Turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and remove
the right cover and the rear cover.
2) Check that the distance between the squeeze
sideplate and the rectangular hole of the fulcrum
bracket, as shown in the figure on the left, is the
same on the Home and Away sides.
Measure the distance

here.
Squeeze sideplate (Away side)

Fulcrum bracket (Away side)
<Tolerance>
The distance on each side should be from 11
to 15 mm and the difference between the
Home side distance and the Away side distance must be less than 0.5 mm.
* The height from the recording drum to the
squeeze roller is checked and adjusted by adjusting the distance between the squeeze
sideplate and the rectangular hole of the fulcrum bracket.
Measure the distance

here.
Put an M4 flat washer here.
3) Rotate the cleaning roller by hand to check whether

it rotates smoothly.
Next, remove the cleaning roller and rotate the
squeeze roller by hand to check that there is no prob-
When the cleaning roller

shaft is put under heavy
load.
Cleaning roller
lem in the bearings.

If you feel that the movement is abnormally heavy,
the bearings probably need to be changed.
Also ensure that the bearings are not detaching from
the respective squeeze sideplates.
<Reference>
Name: Ball bearings
Parts code: 70584384-00
C-43

4) If the actual difference between the Home side distance and the Away side distance is outside of the
range of tolerance mentioned in step 2), adjust the
position of each bearing engaged with the clamp arm
until the difference is within the tolerance.
The distance can be adjusted independently on the
Home and Away sides.
Clamp arm
Loosen these screws to change the bearing position.
(Changing the bearing position alters the
position of the arm that is engaged with
the bearing and this affects the height of
the squeeze roller.)
Bearing
Adjust in this direction (Home side)

Clamp arm
Loosen these screws to change the bearing position.
(Changing the bearing position alters the
position of the arm that is engaged with
the bearing and this affects the height of
the squeeze roller.)
Bearing
Adjust in this direction (Awayside)
Point: When adjusting the squeeze roller height,

first shift the bearing so that the squeeze
roller moves away from the recording
drum. Then tighten the bearing fixing
screws firmly, and move the squeeze
sideplate by hand until the bearing
reaches the appropriate position.
Squeeze roller
5) Rotate the recording drum by hand, while viewing

the squeeze roller from the right side (encoder side)
of the machine, to check the following.
The recording drum does not contact the leading
edge clamp.
The distance between the leading edge clamp and
the squeeze roller is at least 5 mm.
Leading edge clamp
The distance
here must be 5
mm or more.
When the distance between the squeeze roller

and the drum is narrower, you will hear some airflow noise during high-speed rotation of the recording drum.
C-44

Execute initialization of the PT-R4300.
each cover and the cleaning roller.
<Other>
There is another possible cause of plate looseness in addition to that relating to the height of the
squeeze roller. This occurs if you have used the PT-R4300 for a long time.
Aluminum particles from the plate and also tape adhesive on the plate edge may have adhered to
the squeeze roller, cleaning roller, and surface of the recording drum.
Therefore, ensure that the following items are cleaned at the same time as you adjust the height
of the squeeze roller.
Cleaning roller
Squeeze roller
Recording drum
C-45
21. Loading Guide (1) Replacement and Adjustment

<Introduction>
Replace and adjust the loading guide (1) following the below step as the guide must be
replaced once a year or every 20,000 plates.
This guide is not installed in the PT-R4300.

Part Code: U1250064-00
Name: Loading Guide (1) A/S
3204
M52:Niproller
Up
Down
SL53:Shutter
Close
Open
M55:Path
Up
Down
SL58:Door open
On
Off
1) Confirm that the machine is OFF, and remove the

top cover and the rear cover.
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and execute the
ESC
Lower the transfer path. (Press the Down key

once.)
OK
Loading Guide (1)

Conveyor Path Unit
When the transfer path reaches slightly above the

middle position, turn OFF the power supply.
Upper
position
(Alternatively, remove the interlock release jig to

stop the movement of the transfer path.)
dle
Mid ion
it
pos
Side Alignment
Unit
Sensor PH50
Actuator test command to lower the transfer path.

This is the place where the conveyor path is

stopped to replace the loading guide (1). This
r
we n
Lo sitio
po
place is to do this work easily where the path unit

is just above the side alignment unit.
Loading Guide (1)
Screws for Loading Guide (1)
Marking
3) Score a line on the bracket for the sensor PH50 below the loading guide (1) and remove the sensor.
4) Open the shutter by hand and make score a line before removing the guide. (Score a line along the
place where the guide is fixed.)
There are four screws for this guide.
C-46

5) Loosen the top screws for the guide and remove the
guide.
It is good enough to loose the screws because

the top portion of the guide has cutout.
The Discharge Guide has holes at its both ends
so that your tool can access the screws for the
Loading Guide (1) through these holes.
Top Screws
6) Replace to a new guide.

Shutter
Diacharge guide
Fix Screws
Set the new guide under the head of screws that

were loosened at the above step 5).
7) Fix the guide.
Loading Guide (1)
Top Cutout portion
Conveyor Path
Unit
When fixing, you must set the guide at the place

where you scored the line at the step 4).
8) Turn on the machine and initialize it, and then have
the path unit go down to the middle position and confirm the height of the guide at the middle position.
The appropriate height at the middle position is

as high as the plate guide in the punch unit or a
little higher than the plate guide. But if it is too
Loading Guide (1)
high, a plate would snag at the punch unit when

the plate is side aligned. You should confirm it
with the users plate.
9) Put back the covers that were removed in the step 1).

Screwdrivers (cross-slot type)
Hexagonal wrench (for M3 and M4 screws)
C-47
22. PT-R4300 Ball screw for Sub-scanning Replacement Procedure

Please read and understand the following procedure before starting. This work is for only when
you have to replace the ball screw on the PT-R4300 in the field. Basically the jig is necessary to
set the screw, but this procedure describes how to set it without the jig. Please be careful not to
get any damage to the screw while you work.
[Necessary tools]
T bar Allen key for M4 , a set of Allen keys (long type), a pipe for Allen keys, LD short
connector, Head handle, Dial gauge (2 microns) with Magnet stand, Tie wrap (small)
[Screw to be replaced]
U1254043-00 Sub-scanning ball screw unit
<Removal Procedure>
1. Move the recording head to 350mm from the origin point by
RH positioning command, and turn off the machine.
2. Remove the left and the right side cover and the front cover.
3. Remove the air hose guide and disconnect the hose.
4. Attach the LD short connector onto the relay board.
5. Disconnect the cables to the LD driver box. At this time, remove the each cable bracket fixed to the base (see the arrow.)
And the following procedure would be easier if you keep the
Peltier driver ( for cooling LD) power cable at the Peltier unit
side after removing the fan cover of the driver box.
6. Remove the stay bracket from the base, too.
Stay bracket
7. After removing the head cover, fix the relay board at the head base to protect the flexible
cable.
C-48

8. Loosen the 5 bolts fixing the head base by a long
Allen key with the pipe for Allen key and attach
the Head handles before removing the head.
The length of the only one screw at Zoom side is

different from the others.
9. Remove the positioning pins and remove the
head completely.
10.Remove the back cover (see the arrow). At this

time, loosen the screws at the drum side by T bar
Allen key.
11.Remove the blind cover on the die cast base.
12.Disconnect the connection with the LM guide
(see A and B in right figure.)
Do not loosen the screw C. One of the connections with the LM guide, which is the drum side,
A D
is fixed with disc springs. Regarding the connection with the ball screw, remove the screws (M6
X 2) at the vertical side of the universal joint
seen from the window of the die cast base (see D
in the right figure.)
13.The die cast base is disconnected from the ball screw and the LM guide, and remove the die
cast base slowly.
14.Remove the coupling (screw side) for the sub-scan motor (M3 set screw, see Figure E) and
remove the sub-scan motor from the screw. Remove it horizontally not to get any damage
to the coupling.
Do not remove the mount for the angular bearing (See the below figure, Fix screw G).
This mount is the criterion. Do not remove the bearing bracket at the driven side, either.
For machines with serial numbers 0021 and onward, double M3 hollow set screws are used.
15.Remove the screws for the angular fixing ring (See the below figure F, M4 x 3), and remove
the whole screw (including the bearing) from the mount.
F
G
E
C-49

Angular fixing ring
Screw to be replaced (Shipped such as this)
<Installation of Screw and Adjustment Procedure>

(For height adjustment)
1. Insert the screw until the bearing stops at the mount by the
opposite procedure which you
removed the screw replaced.
At the driven side, put the
bearing onto bearing bracket.
Fix the fixing ring onto the
Direction where the base is pushed

Inside of the LM guide is the criterion
mount by even pressure. And then the parallel between the screw and the LM guide is
reproduced.
2. The screw holes of the LM guide nuts and the holes of the
die cast base should match. Please be careful of the universal joint position. The distance between the RH base and the
angular bearing is approximately 100mm.
As the inside of the LM guide is the criterion, insert screws
into the base and fix the base pulling the base to the front.
(See A (8 screws) and B(2 screws) in the former figure.)
100
mm
Before installing the RH base, check for any foreign material or burrs on the nut surface
on the LM guide and the contact surface of the RH base.
The nut at the drum side is fixed such as the figure.
Prepare the one set disc springs face to face and 3 sets total, and insert
the spacers and two washers are set at the both ends and insert a screw CAP screw
2 M5 x 20
into this set.
For the PT-R4000II and later machines, the lower side washer is not
included.
C-50

3. This is the height adjustment between the screw and the
LM guide.
The height of the screw at the mount as the criterion and
the one at the universal joint portion must be matched.
Set a dial gauge with magnetic stand on the polished surface of the die case base and look for the highest position
of the screw at the mount side such as the figure, and set it
as zero position of the dial gauge.
4. Keep the dial gauge position and move it to another polished surface of the die cast base so that you can measure
the height of the screw at the universal joint from the die
cast base window. At this time, the height difference between the mount side and the joint side must be within 10
microns. For the height adjustment, fix the screws at the
joint side temporarily (see the arrows) and set the screw higher than the mount side and then
get the appropriate height by hitting the screw lightly by a shock less hummer or something.
5. When you get the appropriate height, fix the screw completely.
Rotate the screw from end to end to confirm there is no snag.
6. Set the blind cover on the die case base and set the thick
washers between the die case base and the RH base, and set
the back cover.
At this time, do not fix the screws for the back cover, it
means they should be loose. ( After set the recording head
and fix its position by the positioning pins, then the back
cover should be fixed.)
7. Put the recording head onto the RH base.
Insert the positioning pins and decide the head position and fix it.
8. Fix the back cover.

9. Connect the cables in the head following the diagram attached on the head cover. At this time, be careful not to
interfere the light axis by the cables.
C-51

10.Remove the head handles and close the head
cover.
The head side covers must be fixed by using M3 x
5 cap screw with spring washer and flat washer
(see the arrow.)
11.Connect the motor. The criteria are the positioning

pins. ( The motor bracket is against the face of the
mount bearing.)
Insert the coupling onto the axis and decide the
position.
Do not force to the coupling.
Pin
Put back the recording head harness and remove the LD short connector. Turn on the
machine and see the full stroke by RH positioning function under the actuator view to
check if the sub-scan motor works correctly.
And execute laser calibration for all channels at 2400 and 2000 dpi. If it is completed, it
is good.
If not, the head may be not against the positioning pin(s) when removing and putting
back the head.
And check the focus and the zoom. If they are not bad, output a tint 50% and check its
unevenness level.
C-52
23. Countermeasure against registration deviation in PT-R4300

The procedure described in this document is for when a user makes a complaint about insufficient registration accuracy in the PT-R4300 (i.e., a plate is misaligned in the Y direction), and, as
a further condition, the problem occurs at a frequency of about one plate per day.
If the problem does not occur frequently (e.g., one plate per week), it may be caused by careless
operation by the user when he/she handles the plate, and it may be eliminated by cleaning the
guide plate, rollers, etc.
The last page of this document describes the method for finding out whether the cause of this
problem exists in the PT-R4300 or in the printing machine.
[Required jigs and tools]
Phillips, Allen key set, spanner wrench set, 300 mm and 150 mm scales, PC (including communication software; Hyperterminal for Windows)
[Operation]
Perform the following operations to check for registration deviation of the plate (i.e., the plate
does not stably fit with the Home-side registration pin).
1) Check the height of the transport unit and adjust it if necessary (using the user's maximum
sized plate).
During the overall adjustment at the factory, the height of transport unit was adjusted using
a 830 x 645 -0.3 plate. Using the users maximum sized plate, adjust the height of the
transport unit to the correct height for inserting the plate.
Open the right side cover.
Manually open the leading edge clamps and then lower the transport unit to its lower limit.
Set a plate and lower the nip roller in order to sandwich the plate between the rollers just like
when the plate is actually inserted. Open the shutter and push the plate's trailing edge by
hand until it reaches the proximity of the leading edge clamps, which were opened in advance. Adjust the height of the adjustment bolts so that the plate leading edge is flush with
the drum (the plate comes in contact with the drum) at the gripper section of the leading
edge clamps.
Do not forget the original height position. It is not necessary to move the lower limit position sensor located on the transport unit.
Operation:
From drum positioning to the opening of leading edge clamps
Service/Maintenance Menu screen Drum Test Leading Clamp Actuator Test
Lock Pin (Home) IN Lock Pin (Away) IN Drum Test Servo Off
Actuator Test Leading Clamp Down
Movement of the transport unit (after a plate has been set)
Service/Maintenance Menu screen Actuator Test Nip Roller Down Pass
Down (two times) Shutter Open
To restore to the original state, select Special Action in the Service/Maintenance Menu
screen and then select Initialize.
C-53

2) Check the registration accuracy in the actual load sequence operation. Once a plate loading
is started, the transport unit lowers, the leading edge clamps open, and then the nip roller for
the plate transfer is released when the plate has been fed to a point approximately 3 mm
from the registration pins. (This point is, when you observe the area around the leading edge
clamps, the spot where the fed plate makes a brief stop. As a guide to further identify the 3
mm point, find the position where the unnotched plate edge nearly aligns with the pin edge.)
Make sure that the nipped plate is released at this point. It will be easier to check the releasing position of the nip roller if you remove the punch debris guide.
When the plate is misaligned:
Correct the misalignment using the parameter for correcting the plate feed amount. This is
the fourth parameter from the top of Input Parameter - Set Correction Data in the Service/
Maintenance Menu screen. Reducing the numerical value moves the plate away from the
registration pins.
3740
R
R
R
R
0.000
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
ESC
CLR
[%]
0.000 [mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[]
[mm]
OK
ENT
Note that the plate feed amount may change when the transport unit height is changed.
3) Measure the physical relationship between the engine base and the frame. (For measurement points, refer to the attached diagram. Up to 420.)
In the PT-R4000II (serial number 421 and onward), the engine base has been appropriately tilted with respect to the frame in the punch unit section, therefore, adjustment
of their physical relationship is not required.
When checking positions, be sure that the optical head is located at its origin.
Forcibly tilt the engine base so that the plate touches the Home side pin first. In other
words, shift the Home side of the engine base toward the front side. Accurately measure at
the left and right measurement points, which are symmetrically positioned relative to the
center point, the distance between the machined surface of the engine base (inside the
cover of the clamp drive section) and the outer surface of the frame. (Use a scale for the
measurement.)
We will send a diagram regarding the measurement points. When the engine base and the
frame are positioned in parallel, the standard distance is 162 mm.
From the standard configuration stated above, move the Home side of the engine base
toward the front side so that difference between the location of the Home side and the
Away side is approximately 1 to 1.5 mm. Currently, as a factory setting, the Home side
has been set to 163 mm and the Away side has been set to 162 mm. To shift the Home side,
grip a black-plated hexagonal bar stay at the clamp drive section and turn the entire engine
C-54

base. (This operation requires quite a lot of muscle.)
The operations described above have established the relationship of the transport unit and
the drum heights and also have positioned the plate in the Y direction. Consequently, plate
adjustment in the X direction should be carried out.
4) Plate positioning check in X direction
From the Home side, remove the second leading edge clamp so that the Home side registration pin can be checked individually, which will make it easier to check how much the plate
has shifted.
Remark: The leading edge clamp is easily removed when drums servo motor is
ON, after the drum has been rotated to the position where the leading
edge clamps are located above the leading edge detection sensor stay.
Be careful not to apply any unnecessary force to the stay. The screws for
the clamp are quite tight, as they were secured using medium strength
lock-paint. Be sure to apply the lock-paint when you re-secure the screws.
You will find springs inside the leading edge clamp. Be sure, when the
clamp is attached, that the clamps protrusions enter into these springs.
In order to input commands from the terminal, turn ON DIP switch 1 of the RCP board.
Set the plate for checking the registration accuracy and, from the actuator test screen, lower
the transport unit to the punch position.
Execute the terminal software from the personal computer.
Precautions for execution of Hyperterminal
Enter any file name in the connection setting dialog and press OK. (A file name is
determined.)
For the connection method, select the COM port to which the communication
cable is connected (normally COM1).
In the port setting dialog, make the following settings:
Bit/sec.
Data bit
9600
8
Parity
Stop bit
None
1
Flow control Hardware

Once these settings have been completed, press OK and start up the Hyperterminal.
Execute the side alignment terminal command. Subsequently, the shutter opens, a plate is
fed, side alignment is carried out, punch holes are made (if necessary), the plate is pulled
back while it is being nipped, and then the operation stops after the shutter is closed.
*1 Execute this command after the transport unit has been lowered to the punch position.
C-55

(When the side alignment is carried out after making punch holes)
PNC 4 Width Length The hexadecimal digit particular to the punch set up (see *2 below)
Thickness
(Make a space between parameters.)
*2 When making only the positioning punches C
When making the positioning punches + No. 2 + No. 5 1E
When making the positioning punches + No. 1 + No. 6 1D
When making the positioning punches + No. 1 + No. 2 + No. 5 + No. 6 3F
(When no punch hole is made)

PNC 5 Width Length Thickness
With the PT-R4000 Ver. 3.04 or later, the Service/Maintenance Menu screen includes a
screen that allows the performance of the same operation from the computer. (Special action
Register test)
Place the plate to check the registration status on the insertion table and then close the door.
Select Register test and press OK, and the plate selection screen is displayed. Specify the
type of plate that is placed on the table in this screen. Perform centering and punching of the
plate. The processing is complete when the plate is restored to the insertion table. The registration status of the plate can be adjusted in this menu screen.
4452
Register test
ESC
OK
NEXT
Operation after punching

Lower the transport unit to the drum position (from the actuator screen operation).
Rotate the drum until it reaches the Leading Clamp position, insert the securing pins and
open the leading edge clamps.
Open the shutter, turn OFF the Load Clutch in order to facilitate manual roller rotation and
then slowly lower the plate to the pin position for checking misalignment. At the same time,
check that the plate first touches the Home-side registration pin.
Remark: If any error occurs because the plate size was incorrectly entered, the
transport unit returns to the origin point.No buzzer will sound.
C-56

Operation:
Transport unit
Service/Maintenance Menu screen Actuator Test Pass Down Terminal command
Drum
Service/Maintenance Menu screen Drum Test Leading Clamp Actuator Test
Lock Pin (Home) IN Lock Pin (Away) IN Drum Test Servo Off
Actuator Test Leading Clamp Down Shutter Open Load Clutch OFF
Restart operation
Special Action Initialize
According to the amount of shift in the X direction, laterally shift the punch unit (by moving
the positioning reference plate on the Home side) or push or pull the engine base at the
Home side, in order to align the punch positions of the pin and plate (their centers must be
aligned). Be sure, at this moment, to record the amount of tilt of the punch in the Y direction
so that you can replicate this tilt.
5) Other checks
Check whether or not the amount of tilt of the optional punch is too large.
Re-adjust using a tilt pin.
Check whether or not the plate is pressed too hard or the distance between the plate and
positioning pins is too wide during side alignment.
Re-adjust following the procedure sheet.
[Summary]
In order to stabilize the registration accuracy:
The plate must touch the Home-side positioning pin first.
The plate must align with the registration pins in the X direction.
The plate must be released at the appropriate position (not too far or too close).
To optimize the resistance when a plate (at the size that the user mainly uses) comes in
contact with the drum surface, the transport unit height for the plate loading to the drum
must be properly adjusted.
C-57

[How to identify whether the PT-R4300 or the printing machine is the cause of the registration deviation]
This section explains how to determine whether or not the registration deviation has occurred
in the PT-R4300.
Since the PT-R4300 uses only plates, it is not possible to measure it on the light table using a
graduated microscope, which is the method used for the film setter. As the PT-R unit uses
registration punch holes as a reference for checking registration deviation, observe the grid
lines of overlaid plates on the Home-side and Away-side using a low power loupe (5x to 10x).
Required items:
6.35 dia. register pin x 2 pcs., loupe (5x to 10x)
Sample exposure:
Expose (local exposure at 2400 dpi) the grid pattern over the full surface of a plate of
the size used by the user. At least four plates are required per job. (Add more plates if
necessary.)
Align the plate with the registration pins as described below.
Secure the register pins and secure the output plate that will be used as a reference. For the
second plate and thereafter, cut out the leading edge corners on the Home and Away sides and
overlay the plates on the reference plate. Then, using the loupe, measure the difference between the grid lines in the Y direction on the plate and the grid lines on the reference plate.
When the grid pattern has been exposed at 2400 dpi, the width of each line is approximately
30 micron.
Criterion for judgment: As plates are positioned in reference to the Home-side pin, if a plate
is misaligned in the Y direction, it is also consequently misaligned in
the X direction Therefore, you only need to check the alignment in
the Y direction.
Since the line width is approximately 30 micron., you can consider the registration in the
PTR4000 to be accurate when the corresponding grid lines are aligned within one grid line
width. If the above criterion is not satisfied, perform the corrective procedure for the registration deviation. Itmay be difficult to identify the registration deviation depending on the number of plates to be checked. Therefore, registration deviation may be discovered at the users
site even though it did not occur during local exposure. In this case, check the sample of the
registration deviation from the user and ask about the frequency of the problem in order to
determine whether or not to conduct a corrective procedure.
X direction
AWAY
HOME
Approximately
Tilt Y direction
Tilt Y direction
Cut along the line from
C-58

How to check the release position of the nip roller statically (befor Ver3.03)
1.
Set a plate on the conveyor unit.
2.
3.
Actuator Test Path Down

From PC
PNC 4 Width Length C Execute the side alignment, the reference punch and the
nipping
4.
e.g.) PNC 4 830 645 C

Actuator Test Path Down (The lowest place)
Drum Test Leading Clamp
Actuator Test Lock Pin (Home/Away) IN
Drum Test Servo OFF
Actuator Test Leading Edge Clamp Down Shutter Open
Motor Test M50: Transport Roller (IN)
Set the feed amount (standard distance 130mm) by changing pulse to mm.
Set 50 at Speed mm/sec and execute it.
Measure the distance between the reference pin (Home side) and the plate, and get the
compensation.
This + or value is the compensation for the feed amount 130mm.

This is the ideal that a plate reaches the drum 3mm before the reference pin when the plate feed
amount is set 130mm.
For example, if the feed amount is 130mm and the plate reaches the drum 3mm before the
reference pin, the compensation value is 3mm.
However this procedure is just like a rule of thumb. Therefore, you should check by eye and
adjust it by loading a plate actually.
C-59

How to check the release position of the nip roller statically (Ver. 3.04 and Ver. 4. 00
onward)
1.
Set a plate on the conveyor unit.
2.
3.
Actuator Test Path Down

Special Action Register Test (Centering, punching, and nip operation are executed.)
4.
Actuator Test Path Down (The lowest place)

Drum Test Leading Clamp
Actuator Test Lock Pin (Home/Away) IN
Drum Test Servo OFF
Actuator Test Leading Edge Clamp Down Shutter Open
Motor Test M50: Transport Roller (IN)
Set the feed amount (standard distance 130 mm) by changing pulse to mm.
Set 50 at Speed mm/sec and execute it.
Measure the distance between the reference pin (Home side) and the plate, and get the
compensation.
This + or value is the compensation for the feed amount 130 mm.
This is the ideal that a plate reaches the drum 3 mm before the reference pin when the plate feed
amount is set 130 mm.
For example, if the feed amount is 130 mm and the plate reaches the drum 3 mm before the
reference pin, the compensation value is 3 mm.
However this procedure is just like a rule of thumb. Therefore, you should check by eye and
adjust it by loading a plate actually.
C-60
Outer Surface of the frame
Engine base measurement point (Home side)
A must be 1 to 1.5mm longer than B
Engine base measurement point (Away side)
Scale
Scale
Outer Surface of the frame
The physical relationship above is for the machines with serial numbers up to 420.
C-61
24. Countermeasures for Registration Deviation on PT-R4000 (additional information)

Revision of the twist of the conveyor unit
Normally the Home side and the Away side of the conveyor path are parallel.
If either of the two sides does not hit the hexagonal bolt on the engine base or a plate being
loaded on the conveyor path is skewed more than 1 mm against the drum, the conveyor path
must be adjusted to be the same height.
(The height of the left portion and the

right portion of the guide before the
punch are different.)
(Hexagonal Bolt)
To see the difference between the right and the left at the punch unit or the drum, you should put
a plate on the conveyor path and lower the nip roller. At this time, the plate does not have any
curl.
The revised portion should be the conveyor drive unit at the Home side basically.
(Revised portion: Conveyor

Drive Unit at Home side)
C-62

Confirmation of adjustment amount
Fulcrum Pin
Scale
1.
Measure the distance between the this side of the frame and the pin of the conveyor drive
unit.
2.
After adjusting, confirm if the target amount changed.

If you want to decline the Home side, shorten the distance.
(If the distance is longer, the Home side is higher.)
Adjustment (Revision)
Be sure that the conveyor path is at the origin point (the highest position) when adjusting.
1) If the amount to be adjusted is less than 2mm, adjust the nut portion of the ball screw.
1. Loosen the hexagonal nut and the hollow set (set screw).
2. Loosen the adjusting bolt for the nut plate, rotate it along the semicircular oblong.
3. Tighten the adjusting bolt for the nut plate and then tighten the hollow set and the hexagonal nut.
Adjusting bolt for the nut plate
The nut part of the ball screw
The hollow set and the hexagonal nut.
Criterion for Adjustment (Ldeal designed value)

The nut of the ball screw can rotate a maximum of 44 degrees. The height of the transfer
path can be moved vertically by approximately 0.6 mm at the nut position, approximately
1.6 mm at the punch position, and approximately 1.9 mm at the drum position.
But in reality, it might be a little different because each machine has different spring reaction,
gap or something.
C-63

2) If the amount to be adjusted is more than 2mm or it has already been adjusted at 1).
1. Remove the four screws.
2. Grab the ball screw portion and pull it to the arrow side to release the bevel gear engagement.
3. Rotate the ball screw and change the engagement, and then push the ball screw to engage
the gear.
4. Fix the screws.
Screws
Screws
(Engagement
portion)
Pull and release the bevel
gear engagement
Criterion of Adjustment: (Ldeal designed value)

The one tooth shift of the bevel gear makes the height of the conveyor path change approximately 1mm at the punch unit and approximately 1.3mm at the drum up or down.
But in reality, it might be a little different because each machine has different spring reaction,
gap or something.
When either 1) or 2) is adjusted, the sensor (PH57) to detect the middle position of the
conveyor path and the sensor (PH55) to detect the lower position of the conveyor path
may be adjusted.
C-64
25. Procedure for replacing the PT-R4XXX transfer path spring

Rear section stay
Weld nut
Arm side
Transfer drive spring
Tension bolt
Compression spring
Tension plate
<Transfer drive section>
Transfer drive stay
1.
Set the transfer path at its highest position and secure it with the transfer path fixing brackets
(transport fixing brackets).
2.
Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and pull the fulcrum pin on the arm side of the transfer
path until one side of the spring is freed. Be careful during this process not to drop the
bearing and the washer.
(In some cases, a thrust washer may be used in the E-ring section.)
Fulcrum pin
E-ring
Fulcrum pin
Washer Bearing
3.
Remove the rear cover of the machine to bring the rear side of the transfer drive stay into
4.
view.
Peel off the tape to remove the roll pin of the weld nut.
Tape
Home side
Away side
C-65

5.
Loosen the nut and two cap bolts to remove the weld nut.
6.
7.
Remove the rear section stay that secures the transfer drive stay.
Pull out the tension bolt, tension plate, compression spring, and spring from inside the transfer drive stay.
Weld nut
Nut
Rear section stay

Nut
Roll pin
8.
Hooked part
Replace the damaged (old) spring with a new one. Make sure to orient the new spring correctly (the hooked parts should be at the bottom).
The size of the opening of the hooked parts varies. Attach the hooked part with a wider
opening to the tension plate.
Wider opening
9.
Hook the other side of the compression spring on a piece of thin cord (e.g., vinyl).
Cord
Compression spring
10. Set the compression spring and the tension plate section into the transfer drive stay.
11. Attach the rear section stay. In this step, pull the cords that were attached to the tension bolt
and the compression spring through their respective holes in the rear section stay.
12. Slide the weld nut onto the tension bolt temporarily. (This is to prevent the tension bolt from
dropping.)
13. Slide the arm-side fulcrum pin through the spring and then secure it together with the bearing and the washer.
Ensure that the fulcrum pin is set in the loop of the compression spring.
14. Screw the weld nut onto the tension bolt until the thread portion of the bolt that is coming
through the nut is the same length as the nut. Then, draw a cord through the oblong hole in
the weld nut.
15. Secure the weld nut with the cap bolt and then secure the end of the thread portion of the
tension bolt with the nut.
Be sure to align the face of the nut and the end of the thread portion.
C-66

16. Pull out the cord that is secured to the compression spring to create a loop on one side of the
compression spring, and then insert the roll pin into it.
This inserted roll pin goes into the oblong hole of the stopper.
17. Cut the cord and affix a piece of tape over the roll pin to prevent it from falling off.
18. Finally, remove the transfer path fixing brackets.
<Precautions>
1. When pulling or inserting a fulcrum pin, it may be hooked by the burr of the E-ring
groove. In this case, lightly tap only the fulcrum pin to move it through.
2. Remove the fulcrum pin from inside to facilitate attachment of the E-ring and
washer.
3. When the Away-side rear section stay is removed, the transfer drive stay lowers a
few mm due to its own weight.
Therefore, remove the rear section stay while supporting the transfer drive stay.
4. The replacement procedure is the same on the Home and Away sides, however, do
not perform the procedure simultaneously on both sides. Be sure to replace each
spring individually.
The design of the transfer drive spring has been improved from the machine with serial
number 516. Order the spring using the new parts code when you replace it.
New parts code: 70516755-01 (tension spring <balance>)
C-67
26. Procedure for replacing the LD block

1) Prepare the jig and the wristband shown on the left
before replacing the LD block.
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and initialize it.

3520
CLR
7
Service/Maintenance Menu screen and move the recording head approximately 250 mm toward the
Away side.
250.00 mm
ESC
START
3) Select Recording unit test RH positioning in the
ENT

the covers to initiate the procedure.
If the following steps in the procedure are performed with the power ON, you will be in danger
of loosing your eyesight. Be sure to turn OFF the
power before starting the replacement procedure.
5) Connect the jumper connector to the relay board of
the recording head.
With this connector, all LD pins are at the same

electrical potential. If the cables are removed
without connecting this connector, the LDs may
be damaged by static electricity.
6) Remove the air pressure hose guide that is on the recording head.
C-68

7) Remove the two screws from the lower section of the
relay board and open the relay board outward.
8) Remove the upper cover of the recording head. This

cover has been secured with seven screws.
Front: 4 screws
Top right: 2 screws
Top left: 1 screw
Top left
Top right
9) Pull the upper cover toward you and remove it.
When the upper cover is removed.
10) Attach a jig for replacement to the LD block that

needs to be replaced. Then, replace the LD block using the hexagonal wrench provided with the jig.
Be sure to use the hexagonal wrench that is provided with the jig for replacement when you remove the LD block. If a normal hexagonal wrench
is used, the screw thread of the jig for LD block
replacement may be damaged.
C-69

11) Attach the jig for replacement to a new LD block and
mount it on the LD base.
Before attaching the new LD block, make sure no

dust or dirt is adhered to the contact surface. If
any dust or dirt remains adhered to the surface,
the optical axis may be deviated and thus appropriate laser power cannot be obtained or the
value of current may become excessively high.
12) Remove the short-circuit sheet that has been attached to the new LD block.
13) Clean the following lenses of the recording head, as
dust adheres to them easily.
Stereographic projection lens
No. 1 Lens
Reflective mirror
Zoom lens collar
Stereographic
projection lens
No. 1 Lens
Reflective mirror
Zoom lens collar
Use a mixed solution of alcohol and ether at a

ratio of 1:1 for cleaning. As the lens surfaces to
be cleaned are wide, use lens cleaning paper,
not cotton swabs.
14) Reattach the upper cover of the recording head and
the air pressure hose guides to their original positions and then remove the jumper connector (LD
short connector jig) that was connected to the relay
board.
If you fail to remove the LD short connector jig,

the LD or the relay board may be damaged.
15) Reattach all covers and initialize the PT-R4300.
Then, check the operations and the exposure performance.
The Iopd value for the new LD is entered.
The ON time (laser lighting time) of the replaced
LD is cleared.
All the LD channels are calibrated.
If a mode is set that uses half of the channels, 32 ch
exposure cannot be performed.
C-70
27. Procedure for replacing and adjusting the power supply

After replacing the DC power supplies, be sure to adjust the output voltages as follows.
Power supply name Set voltage
U1 (5V/100W)
5.00V 0.01V
Measurement point
Between pins 1 and 2 of the X100 power supply con-
U2 (15V/75W)
15.00V 0.10V
nector for the RB31 board

Between pins 1 and 4 of the XU22 connector for U2
U3 (-15V/75W)
U4 (24V/300W)
-15.00V 0.10V
24.30V 0.10V
Between pins 1 and 4 of the XU32 connector for U3

Power supply terminal for U4
U5 (24V/150W): For PT-R4000/4000II

24.00V 0.01V
Between TP8 and TP3 on the CON-PTR4 board
U5 (24V/300W): PT-R4300
24.00V 0.01V
U6 (-5V/300W)
U7 (24V/100W)
Power supply terminal for U6

-5.3V 0.05V
24.00V 0.10V
The PT-R4300 does not contain this power supply.

U9 (24V/30W)
24.00V 0.10V
Neither the PT-R4000 nor the PT-R4000II contains this power supply.
For the PT-R4300, the U7 (24V/100W) has been removed and the power supply capacity for the U5 (24V/150W) has been increased to 300W.
In addition, the U9 (24V/30W) has been added for use with the interlock circuit.
28. Procedure for replacing and adjusting the pulse motor driver
Set the DIP switches as follows after replacing the pulse motor drivers
PMD50 DSW1-1: SL-ON
DSW1-2: F/R-ON
DSW1-3: EX1-OFF
DSW1-4: EX2-OFF
DSW1-5: EX3-OFF
PMD61 DSW1-1: SL-ON
DSW1-2: F/R-ON
DSW1-3: EX1-ON
DSW1-4: EX2-OFF
DSW1-5: EX3-OFF
PMD2
DSW1-1: SL-OFF
DSW1-2: F/R-OFF
DSW1-3: Unchangeable ON
DSW1-4: Unchangeable OFF
DSW1-5: Unchangeable OFF
PSW1 (S.SEL1)-9
PSW2 (S.SEL2)-9
C-71

Adjustment procedure for PMD61
The electric current used for PMD61 exceeded the specification in order to allow use of the
common driver for all units. This has been changed so that PMD61 now uses an appropriate
electric current. When you replace PMD61, adjust it in accordance with the procedure below.
Note that this adjustment has already been completed for machines with serial numbers 425 and
onward before shipment.
This adjustment has also been completed for the PT-R4300. The power supply capacity has also
been increased for this model.
PMD61
PMD61 PHASE CURRENT ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

1. Turn off the main power.
2. Cancel the Auto current down function:
Turn off the SL of DSW1 in the PMD61.
3. Preparation for checking the Voltage of Vref:
Connect the voltmeter with check pins to measure the voltage between IS and 0V.
4. Turn off the interlock switch then turn on the main power.
(Because it is necessary to turn on the 5V power for logic first.)
5. Turn on the inter lock switch then turn on the DC24V.
6. Setting the current of the motor :
Adjust the IS voltage to 0.8V(=Motor current value: 1.3A).
Refer to Fig.2.
Target division of VR-1; from -3 to -4
* Attention : During this adjustment, motor should be stopped and dont apply the pulse
voltage.
While adjusting the current, make sure to stop the motor and to not apply a pulse voltage. Otherwise, the driver will be damaged.
7. Turn off the main power, and turn on the SL switch.
C-72
29. Procedure for replacing the AC servo driver (E1A)

Perform the parameter setting and necessary adjustments as follows after replacing the AC servo
driver.
1.
Parameter setting for the driver

Turn ON the power to the machine and enter the service maintenance mode without
performing initialization.
Access the [Input parameter] screen. Access the [Drum parameter] screen.
Execute [Initialize].
Turning OFF the power to the machine during the parameter setting may
damage the driver, so do not turn OFF the power during the [Initialize] operation.
Since some parameters become active after the machine power is restored,
always turn OFF the power to the machine and turn it ON again after the
parameter setting is finished.
2.
Speed command offset adjustment

Turn ON the power to the machine and enter the service maintenance mode without
performing initialization.
Access the [Input parameter] screen. Access the [Drum parameter] screen. Execute [Adjust Offset].
3.
Gain adjustment for the PIO board (SVC circuit)

Access the service maintenance mode. Access the [Drum test] screen. Execute
[Zero return].
Access the [Input parameter] screen. Access the [Drum parameter] screen. Execute [Adjust Gain].
Adjust the VR1 trimmer resistor on the PIO-PTR4 board (PIO-PTR4 (2) ) until the
buzzer sounds.
Press [Cancel] on the screen to complete the operation.
C-73
30. Procedure for replacing and setting the inverter (U8) for the suction blower
Perform the following setting after replacing the inverter for the suction blower.
Make sure to complete the setting described below.
1.
Turn OFF the power to the machine and disconnect the XBU1 connector in the blower
2.
unit.
Turn ON the power to the machine and change the C13 parameter.
00: a contact (normal open) [NO]
3.
4.
5.
00: a contact (normal close) [NC]

Turn OFF the power to the machine and re-connect the XBU1 connector.
Turn ON the power to the machine and change the A01 (Frequency destination setting)
parameter.
01 00
Change the A04 (Maximum frequency setting) parameter.
50Hz 60Hz
6.
Change the A03 (Base frequency setting) parameter.

50Hz 60Hz
7.
Change the B12 (Level of electronic thermal setting) parameter.

2.60 2.6A 3.10 3.1A
8.
Change the B21 (Selection of overload restriction operation mode) parameter.

01 : ON during acceleration and deceleration only
00:Normally OFF
9.
Change the 95 (No-load current) parameter.

3a 58% 23 35%
Follow the procedure below to change the C95 parameter as simply selecting it cannot
change it.
First, change the C91 parameter from 00 to 01.
Change the C94 parameter from 0000 to fb0a.
Then, change the C95 parameter from 3a to 23.
Reset the C91 parameter from 01 to 00.
10. Change the C03 (Function of terminal 3 setting) parameter.

02 CF1 (multispeed 1) 12EXT (external trip)
11. After setting all the parameters, remove the duct cover.
12. On the inverter operation panel, set the volume to MAX (maximum value in the clockwise
direction).
C-74
When you check the input data after completing the setting, be aware of the following
points.
When confirming the data that was input in step 9), the data will be initialized when you
exit the mode for changing the data and this disables the operation. Therefore, be sure
to input the data again.
When confirming data other than that input in step 9), the data will not be initialized
when you exit the mode for changing the data.
The procedures for changing the data are shown below. The following procedures show b84 data
as an example in which the current value is changed from 00 to 01. The descriptions in appear in
the inverter display.
0.0
Func.
d01
(2)
c-(2)
b-Func.
b01
(1)
b21
Func.
01
(1)
The current value is displayed here. Change the data.

Increase the value by pressing the
key and decrease the
STR
value by pressing the key.

Press the [STR] store key to store the setting data.
Func.
Press the [Func.] function key to recheck the setting data that
00
b21
has been changed.
00
Func.
b-(1)
c-(1)
d01
Func.
0.0
Be sure to return to this status after changing the panel display on the inverter.
C-75

Error displays for the inverter
If troubles occur with the inverter, the errors shown below appear on the panel and the inverter
output is cut off. Motor in the following table implies a blower.
Error
display
E 01
E 02
E 03
E 04
E 05
E 07
E 08
E 09
E 11
E 12
E 13
E 14
E 15
E 21
E 22
C-76
Trip
Contents
Over-current
During constant speed, excessive current was applied to the inverter. This
protection during was caused by a short circuit of the inverter output, a locking of the motor
constant speed
or another reason. The protection circuit went into operation and the
inverter output was cut off.
Over-current
During deceleration, over current protection went into operation and the
protection during inverter output was cut off.
deceleration
Over-current
During acceleration, over current protection went into operation and the
protection during inverter output was cut off.
acceleration
Over-current
Due to a cause other than those indicated by E01 to E03, over current
protection due to protection went into operation and the inverter output was cut off.
another cause
Overload
The motor became overloaded due to the detection of the inverter output
protection
current, the inverter?s built-in electronic thermal function detected the
situation, and the inverter output was cut off.
Over-voltage
The voltage of the converter section exceeded a certain level because
protection
excessive regenerative energy or excessive input voltage was supplied
from the motor, or the load lessened rapidly during the operation of the
overload control, and the inverter output was cut off.
EEPROM error
An error has occurred with the built-in memory of the inverter. This was
caused by outside noise, abnormal temperature or another cause, and the
Under-voltage
The inverter voltage lowered below the 150V to 160V range, and the
protection
CPU error
The built-in CPU operated improperly, an error occurred, and the inverter
output was cut off.
External trip
The motor thermal function detected an error and the inverter output was
cut off.
USP error
The power supply was turned ON while the inverter was being run, and
the inverter output was cut off.
Ground fault
A ground fault was detected between the inverter output and the motor
protection
when turning ON the power supply, and the inverter output was cut off.
nput over-voltage 100 seconds after the power supply was turned ON, an input voltage
higher than the specified value was detected, and the inverter was cut off.
Temperature trip The temperature of the inverter module is higher than the specified value
and the inverter output has been cut off.
CPU error
The built-in CPU operated improperly, an error occurred, and the inverter
output was cut off.
31. Procedure for replacing the RCP2 board

Flash memories (U4, U13, U15, U18)
U15 and U18 are for the user data and the data
unique to the PT-R4300.
X 1 66
X 1 63
X 1 62
X 1 61
X 1 50
X 1 60
U4
X 1 59
U 13
U 14
X 1 58
TEST
NV RAM (U14)
U 15
R O M fo r d e b u g in g
X 1 57
U 18
X 1 56
X 1 55
CPU
D IP S W 1
X 1 54
O FF O N
H L 1 -8
H L 9 -1 6
U 62
X 1 53
H L 17-24
ROM for ALTERA-FPGA (U62)
RESE
T
H L 25-32
A LT E R A
X 1 64
P LL
H L 33-40
X 1 67
X 1 51
H L 41-42
X 1 52
H L 43-51
PT-R4300
RCP2 board
PT-R4000II
PT-R4000
RCP2- PT-R4
U1254023-00
FLASH ROM (U4,U13)

PROM (U62)
S0249 Ver.1.32 S0249 Ver.1.30 S0249 Ver.1.00

B8381
*1: The flash memories (U4, U13) are not included in the board for the PT-R4XXX(U1254023-00).
*2: The RCP2 board with U4, U13, and U62 removed is the same board as for the PT-R4000/
4000II/PT-R8000/8000II.
The NV RAM (U14) included in the RCP2 board stores the data for the exposure conditions,
error logs, and consumables timer. When the RCP2 board is replaced, all data must be transferred to the new board. Follow the procedure described on the next page to transfer the data.
The consumables timer data include the data of the plate winding count that is necessary for the maintenance contract (at a metered rate). As this is important maintenance contractual information, be sure to transfer it to the new board.
Be sure to prepare a PLCC removal tool to remove or attach the flash memories (U4,
U13, U15, U18). If you forcibly remove or attach the flash memories, the memory
sockets will be damaged.
C-77

4451
1) Enter the Special action screen of the maintenance
Front sensor offset
mode and select NVRAM backup.
Centering test
Before executing step 1), set bit 2 of the DIP

switch on the RCP2 board to ON.
NVRAM backup
NVRAM restore
ESC
OK
NEXT
When bit 2 is set to OFF, a message allowing you

change it to ON will be displayed.
2) The message shown on the left is displayed. Pressing
4451
Do you backup the data on NVRAM

in Flash-Memory ?
the OK button initiates transfer of the NV RAM data

to the flash memories (U15, U18).
3) After completing step 2), turn OFF the power to the
PT-R4300 and replace the RCP2 board with a new
one.
ESC
OK
CANCEL
Be sure to swap U4, U13, U15, and U18 between

the new and old boards.
4451
4) After the replacement, enter the Special action
Front sensor offset
screen of the maintenance mode without performing

initialization, and select NVRAM restore.
Centering test
NVRAM backup
Before executing step 4), set bit 2 of the DIP

NVRAM restore
ESC
OK
NEXT
switch on the RCP2 board to ON.

When bit 2 is set to OFF, a message allowing you
change it to ON will be displayed.
4451
Do you overwrite the data on NVRAM

with the data backup in Flash
-Memory ?
5) The message shown on the left is displayed. Pressing

the OK button initiates transfer of the NV RAM data
transferred from the old board to the flash memories
(U15, U18) to the new NV RAM.
6) After completing the transfer process, be sure to set
bit 2 of the DIP switch on the RCP2 board to OFF.
ESC
C-78
OK
CANCEL
7) Finally, check the consumables timer to ensure that

the data has been transferred successfully.
D. Operation panel
Set Printing machine<B-50>
Set plate<B-47>
Set exposure mode<B-55>
User maintenance<B-67>
D.Operation panel
Set media type<B-43>
Printing machine selection

Comment input
Grip direction selection (vertical/horizontal)
Leading and trailing grip margin setting
Image centering method selection
Exposure start point correction (primary scanning direction and secondary scanning direction)
Punch type selection
Image position adjustment (primary scanning direction and secondary scanning direction)
Plate number selection
Comment input
Plate size setting (width and length)
Media type number selection
Comment input
Positive/negative selection
Plate thickness setting
Front offset (offset value for the leading edge detection sensors), Displacement offset (offset value for the displacement sensor)
Distance limit (threshold value for the displacement sensor)
Light intensity setting
Drum rpm setting
Focus value setting
Zoom value setting
Primary scanning direction length correction
Auto/manual loading selection (when SA-L/MA-L is connected)
Front/rear unloading selection (when units including the auto processor are connected)
Output settings for mirror/normal image, positive/negative, single/multi
Auto/manual loading selection (when SA-L/MA-L is connected)
Rear unloading (when units including the auto processor are connected)
Manual loading
Manual unloading
Test exposure<B-67>
Test exposure for light intensity adjustment<B-74>
Test exposure for drum rpm adjustment
focus Test exposure for focus adjustment<B-68>
zoom Test exposure for zoom adjustment<B71>
Test exposure for simultaneous adjustment of focus and zoom<B-80>
D-1
1. Screen flow diagram (PT-R4000: Ver. 3.06/ PT-R4000II: Ver. 4.04/

PT-R4300: Ver. 1.00)
Main menu (when PT-R4300 is used independently)
1-1.Main menu (when PT-R4300 is used independently)
< > Provided in the parentheses are the page numbers on which a more detailed description can be found.
D-2
Test exposure<B-67>
ETC User maintenance setting<B-85>
D.Operation panel
Test exposure for simultaneous adjustment of light intensity and drum rpm<B-80>
Test exposure<B-76>
Exposure maintenance<B-83>
[No-plate] : Setting of whether to perform exposure without
loading a plate
: Setting of whether to perform exposure without
lighting up the LD (laser diodes)
[Full size] : Setting of whether to perform exposure while
including the grip margins
Teaching of plate size in the primary and the secondary
scanning directions
Set Date Time<B-86>
Punch for cleaning<B-87>
Consumable Timer<B-88>
Checking and setting of running time, actual running time,
exposure time, and plate winding cycle
Checking and setting of usage time of filters
Checking of number of times the punch operates (Punch 1 to
Punch 4)
Checking of number of times the punch operates (Punch 5 to
Punch 8)
Language<B-89>
Laser power measure<B-90>
Laser calibration<D-34>
Cancel calibration<B-93>
Calibration info.<B-94>
Return error to host<B-95>
Option setting<B-96>
[Buzzer while trans]: Buzzer for rear unloading
ON/OFF/LOUD
[Mistake plate]: Plate that is loaded incorrectly
Remove/Discharge
[Inter leaf warning]: Warning of interleaf discharge OFF/10
sheets//90 sheets/100 sheets
[Preload button] ON/OFF/COUNTER
[Empty warning]: Warning that no plates remain ON/OFF
Information
Version display
Error log display (outline)
Error log display (details)
Set punch name<B-98>

Service<D-11>
D.Operation panel
D-3
D.Operation panel
1-2.Main menu (when SA-L/MA-L is connected)
Main menu (when SA-L/MA-L is connected)
Cassete exchange
Set Cassete
Set Remaining
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
Set Printing machine
Set plate
Set media type
Set punch name
Service
Information
D-4
Service menu
Password input screen<D-11>
Sensor test<D-14>
Actuator test<D-19>
Drum test<D-24>
Motor test<D-26>
Recording head test<D-29>
Machine env.: Environment temperature

LD block: LD base temperature
HEAD env.: Recording head peripheral temperature
Fin: Peltier fin temperature
Dew codens: Dew condensation sensor
Laser power measure, checking for the cable disconnection<D-41>
Iopd-Iop<D-44>
Set Correction data<D-47>
R : Correction for image length in the secondary scanning direction
R
: Correction for exposure start point in the primary scanning direction
R
: Correction for exposure start point in the secondary scanning direction
+
: Correction for image position in the primary scanning direction
: Tilt correction
R
: Correction of plate feed amount
Reference Y size data: Compensation of drum cylindricality
Vacuum threshold
Max paper count:Setting of maximum number of interleaves that can be stored in the
interleaf collection box
D.Operation panel
Input parameter<D-45>
RH zero return<D-31>
RH positioning<D-32>
Focus zero return<D-31>
Focus positioning<D-32>
Zoom zero return<D-31>
Zoom positioning<D-32>
Peltier test<D-33>
Laser calibration<D-34>
LD ON<D-36>
Calibration position<D-38>
Move to cal.pos.<D-39>
Temperature<D-40>
1-3.Service menu
D-5
D-6
Set Correction data<D-47>

Set preset plate type<D-49>
Drum base position<D-50>
Drum position<D-52>
Calibration position<D-55>
Set punch data<D-56>
RH parameter<D-57>
Lead clamp (load): Not used

Front Sensor: Adjustment of the leading edge position of plate
Tail clamp: Trailing grip margin correction
Squeeze roller: Drum position correction relative to the position at which the squeeze roller
is lowered
Balancer pin: Drum position correction relative to the balancer
Pick up clamp: Drum position correction relative to the pick up clamp
Tail clamp (unload): Drum position correction relative to the position at which the trailing
edge clamp is released
Length sensor: Correction for plate size in the primary scanning direction
: Cam follower position adjustment
: Cam follower position adjustment (Home)
: Cam follower position adjustment (Away)
Laser power setting/Setting of target laser power used for channel calibration
(Lpw, Ip1, Ip2, Ip3)<D-59>
Laser power adjust/Precise adjustment of power of each LD channel (A and B) <D-60>
Laser power confirm/Checking of power of each LD channel (Pw1, PW2, PW3) <D-61>
Reference laser power/Checking of electric current used in the laser diode channel (Iop)<D-62>
D.Operation panel
Punch adjust<D-54>
Temp. offset: Temperature sensor correction
RH parameter<D-57>
Temperature setting<D-63>
Laser running time<D-64>

Writing times clear<D-65>
Board constant setting<D-66>
Auto calibration<D-69>
Meas. period: Number of times exposure is performed

before starting auto calibration
Meas. Thd (%): Allowable range of measured light
intensity
Cal. period (Hour): Exposure time before starting auto
calibration
Iop warning: Warning for calibration
Cal. low temp.: Minimum temperature for calibration
(35): Temperature around the recording head
(28): Temperature in the PT-R unit
(22): LD base temperature
(16): Temperature in the PT-R unit
(17): LD base temperature
---: Password
Grip: Adjustment of unexposed area in the leading grip
margin
After-Grip: Adjustment of unexposed area in the trailing
grip margin
D.Operation panel
Set temp. warning<D-72>
Temperature: LD base temperature control level

Pelter ctl. Duty: Peltier control value
Alarm level: Alarm level temperature value
D-7
D-8
I/O Read/Write<D-88>
Initialize data<D-89>
Parameter set<D-73>
Status read<D-75>
Initialize<D-77>
Adjust offset<D-78>
Adjust Gain<D-79>
Set misc. data/ Display of miscellaneous machine information<D-80>
Machine type setting
Machine type 2 setting
Set resolution<D-81>
Set weight<D-82>
Set cassete data<D-83>
Paper pad suck (correction of pad position for securing interleaves)
Paper pad nip (correction of pad position for discharging interleaves)
Y size base A, B, C (reference value of plate in the Y direction when it is transferred from the
SA-L or the MA-L unit)
Zone-2 min. size (minimum size for zone area 2)
motion para 1(correction of the plate pad operation)
Password for spec. func<D-86>
Network(OFF/PPP)
LD/Stocker(OFF/LD/Stocker/ATM)
CASSETE(OFF/Single/Multi3/Multi4/Multi5)
Valid LD channel(32ch/0-15/16-31)
Initialize all data<D-90>

Select brand<D-91>
Initialize user data<D-90>
Consumble Timer<D-92>
Initialize preset media<D-90>
D.Operation panel
Machine option select<D-87>
Drum parameter<D-57>
Special action<D-94>
Special action 2<D-104>
D.Operation panel
Initialize<D-95>
Ititialize machine status<D-95>
Pick up clamp<D-96>
Check ORG-EZ<D-97>
Put clamp on drum<D-96>
Front sensor offset<D-98>
Centering test<D-99>
Adjust Displacement sensor<D-100>
NVRAM backup<D-101>
NVRAM restore<D-102>
Register test<D-103>
Initialize<D-105>
Balancer test<D-106>
Mail test<D-107>
Auto loader test<D-108>
Plate pad test<D-110>
Paper pad test<D-111>
Multi auto loader test<D-112>
D-9
D.Operation panel
2. Startup of the main unit without performing initialization

After turning ON the power to the main unit, simultaneously press the two areas indicated by circles on the
0101
P T- R 4 3 0 0
screen shown on the left.

START
02.05.01
V1.00
The screen shown on the left appears without an initialization of the main unit being performed.
0200
Not initialized
1 : 1: Plate 1
OFFLINE
OPEN
When starting up the main unit without performing initialization, the main unit does not operate
normally.
To operate the main unit normally, make sure to
turn OFF/ON the power to the main unit or perform initialization from the operation panel.
D-10
D.Operation panel
3. Detailed descriptions of the Service/Maintenance screens

3-1.How to enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen
0301
Service
Pressing the
Service
Infomation
OK
key after selecting the
key brings up the Password Input
screen.
Set punch name

Service
ONLINE
OK
NEXT
3000
CLR
7
key again. The following Service/Maintenance

Menu screen appears.
OK
Pass Word
0
ESC
When the screen shown on the left appears, enter the

ENT
password, press the
key and then press the
OK
ENT
The password is PT-R4000 (II): 4000, PT-R4300:

4300
3050
If you enter the wrong password, the screen re-
Sensor test
turns to the upper layer Menu screen (as indicated above).
Actuator test
Drum test
Motor test
You can set the maintenance parameters using the

screens shown on the left.
Recording head test

ESC
OK
NEXT
3051
NEXT
NEXT
Input parameter
I/O Read/Write
Initialize data
Special action
ESC
OK
NEXT
3052
ESC
NEXT
NEXT
Special action 2
OK
NEXT
D-11
D.Operation panel
3-2.Service/Maintenance Menu screens
3050
Sensor test
Sensor test
Drum test
Allows you to execute a sensor test.

(Refer to D-14)
Motor test
Actuator test
Actuator test
Allows you to execute an actuator test.
Recording head test

ESC
OK
NEXT
(Refer to D-19)
Drum test
NEXT
3051
NEXT
Input parameter
(Refer to D-24)
Motor test
I/O Read/Write
Allows you to test the transport/discharge motors and
Initialize data
the plate side alignment motors.

(Refer to D-26)
Special action
ESC
OK
Allows you to execute tests for drum positioning and

drum rotation.
NEXT
Recording head test
Allows you to execute tests and operations related to

NEXT
3052
NEXT
Special action 2
the recording head.

(Refer to D-29)
Input parameter
Allows you to input and check parameter settings.

(Refer to D-45)

ESC
OK
NEXT
Allows you to set optional parameters for the machine.

(Refer to D-87)
I/O Read/Write
Allows you to execute I/O port data reading and writing.

(Refer to D-88)
Initialize data
Allows you to initialize parameter settings and change

the machine brand name.
(Refer to D-89)
Special action
Allows you to execute special actions, including

trailing edge clamp installation and initialization of
the machine status.
(Refer to D-94)
D-12
D.Operation panel
Special action 2
This is a jig command for the auto loader.

(Refer to D-104)
D-13
D.Operation panel
3-3.Sensor Test screens
3050
Sensor test
Sensor test
With this command, you can check the operating status of each sensor.
Actuator test
Drum test
Sensor test
Pressing the
OK
key brings up the Sensor Operation Check
Motor test
Recording head test
ESC
OK
NEXT
screen.
In this screen, the indicators for the sensors that are
currently ON appear highlighted.
Sensor indications after the PT-R is initialized.
Transmission type sensor:
Turns ON when the light is blocked.
Reflection type sensor:
Turns ON when the sensor detects the specified
conditions.
ESC
Returns you to the upper layer Menu screen.

NEXT
Switches to the next screen. (The NEXT key

switches the display among the Sensor Selection screens.)
After selecting the number of the sensor for
which you want to check the operating state and
pressing the OK key, you will hear a beep
sound when the selected sensor turns ON.
D-14
D.Operation panel
3100
11 PH10H
PH11A2
11
PH27-1
16
PH30H
PH10A
PH20
12
PH27-2
17
PH30A
PH11H1
PH21
13
PH27-3
18
PH31H
PH11H2
PH24-1
14
PH29H
19
PH31A
PH11A1
10
PH24-2
15
PH29A
20
ESC
OK
NEXT
PH10H
: Balancer weight detection sensor (Home)
PH10A : Balancer weight detection sensor (Away)

PH11H1 : Balancer pin position detection sensor 1
(Home)
PH11H2 : Balancer pin position detection sensor 2
(Home)
PH11A1 : Balancer pin position detection sensor 1
(Away)
PH11A2 : Balancer pin position detection sensor 2
PH20
(Away)
: Trailing edge clamp arm origin sensor
PH21
(Home)
: Trailing edge clamp arm end point sensor
PH24-1
(Away)
: Trailing edge clamp hook sensor 1
PH24-2
PH27-1
: Trailing edge clamp hook sensor 2

: Trailing edge clamp presence detection
PH27-2
sensor 1
PH27-3
sensor 2
PH29H
sensor 3
: Plate top side detection sensor (Home)
PH29A
PH30H
: Plate top side detection sensor (Away)

: Leading edge clamp close origin sensor
PH30A
(Home)
: Leading edge clamp close origin sensor
PH31H
(Away)
: Leading edge clamp close end point sen-
PH31A
sor (Home)
: Leading edge clamp close end point sensor (Away)
D-15
D.Operation panel
3101
11 PH50
PH55
11
PH62
16
SB60-4
PH51
PH56
12
PH63
17
SB60-5
PH52
PH57
13
SB60-1
18
SB60-6
PH53
PH61H
14
SB60-2
19
PH58
PH54
10
PH61A
15
SB60-3
20
PH59
ESC
NEXT
OK
PH50
: Plate pass sensor on the plate-loading path
PH51
: Sensor for detecting an interleaf on the

back of the plate
PH52
PH53
: Nip roller origin sensor

: Shutter origin sensor
PH54
PH55
: Plate pass sensor on the plate transport path

: Transport path change lower limit sensor
PH56
PH57
: Transport path change upper limit sensor

: Transport path punch position sensor
PH61H
: Sensor for detecting the Home side edge

of a plate for side alignment
PH61A
: Sensor for detecting the Away side edge

of a plate for side alignment
PH62
: Plate edge detection sensor for the punch

unit
PH63
SB60-1
: Side alignment origin sensor

: Punch 1 origin sensor
SB60-2
SB60-3

SB60-4
SB60-5

SB60-6
PH58

: Origin sensor of the motor for opening/
closing the operation door (for PT-R4300
only)
3102
11 PH2
LS57
11
PD_ERR
16
LS28
PH6
LS58
12
PD_BSY
17
S1
LS4H
PH70
13
+24V
18
LS4A
P1
14
+15V
19
LS56
10
INVALM
15
-15V
20
ESC
OK
NEXT
PH59
: Discharge path plate pass sensor 2 (for

PT-R4300 only)
PH2
PH6
: Scanning origin sensor

: Sensor for detecting multiple plate feed-
LS4H
ing or loose plate

: Scanning start point limiter
LS4A
LS56
: Scanning end point limiter

: Operation door interlock switch
LS57
: Cover interlock switch

(LS57-1,2,3)
LS58
: Main cover servo stop switch

(LS58-1,2,SW58)
PH70
P1
: AT unit plate detection sensor

: Drum vacuum pressure sensor
INVALM : Inverter alarm

PD_ERR : Processor error
PD_BSY : Processor busy
+24V
: 24V voltage check
D-16
D.Operation panel
+15V
: +15V voltage check
-15V
LS28
: -15V voltage check

: Hook lever switch
S1
(LS28-1,2,2,4,5,6)
: Key switch for maintenance (for PTR4300 only)
PH90
PH91-1
3103
11 PH90
PH92-3
11
PH97-3
16
PH91-1
PH92-4
12
PH98-1
17
PH91-2
PH93-1
13
SB98
18
PH92-1
PH97-1
14
19
PH92-2
10
PH97-2
15
20
PH91-2 : Plate pad middle position sensor

PH92-1 : Plate underside interleaf detection sensor
PH92-2
ESC
NEXT
OK
3104
11 LS94-2
IN92
11
16
LS94-3
S90
12
17
LS94-4
13
18
P101-1
14
19
P101-2
10
15
20
ESC
OK
amplifier
: Plate surface interleaf detection sensor
and plate length detection sensor amplifier (in plate transportation section)
PH92-3
PH92-4
: Plate detection sensor 1

: Plate detection sensor 2
PH93-1
PH97-1
: Interleaf nip motor home position sensor

: Cassette No. detection sensor
PH97-2
PH97-3

PH98-1
SB98
: Interleaf pad home position sensor

: Plate detection proximity sensor
LS94-2
LS94-3
: Bridge section cover 2 interlock switch

: Maintenance cover interlock switch
LS94-4
P101-1
: Cassette existence detection sensor

: Pressure sensor
P101-2
IN92
: Pressure sensor
: Single/multi identification signal
NEXT
H : Single
L : Multi
S90
: Interleaf detection sensor 1

: Plate pad home position sensor
: Key switch for maintenance (for SA-L/

MA-L4300 only)
D-17
D.Operation panel
3105
11 SQ200
SQ212A
11
SQ213D
16
SQ200A
SQ212C
12
LS200E
17
PH93-1
SQ211A
SQ212D
13
LS206
18
SQ211C
SQ213A
14
SQ210A
19
SQ211D
10
SQ213C
15
SQ210
20
ESC
LS210E
: Chain drive home position sensor
SQ200A : Chain drive positioning sensor

SQ211A : Cassette tray 1 positioning sensor
SQ211C : Cassette 1 storage checking sensor
SQ211D : Arm activation sensor for storage of first
NEXT
OK
SQ200
cassette
SQ212D : Arm activation sensor for storage of second cassette
SQ213D : Arm activation sensor for storage of third
cassette
LS200E : Chain drive second end point switch
LS206 : Cassette door sensor
SQ210A : Arm travel end point sensor
SQ210 : Arm home position sensor
LS210E : Arm protrusion detection sensor
LS220U : Lifts over-travel upper switch
3106
11 LS220U
LS220L
PH93-1
SQ220
AC-Z
AC-P16
10
ESC
11
AC-AL
16
SQ200D
12
AC-BU
17
LS206A
AC-P2
13
SQ221B
18
LS206B
AC-P1
14
SQ222B
19
15
SQ223B
20
AC-P8
AC-P4
AC-C0
OK
LS220L : Lifts over-travel lower switch

SQ220 : Lift home position sensor
AC-Z
: AC servo motor Z phase detection
AC-P16 : Lift position output 5
AC-P8 : Lift position output 4
NEXT
AC-P4
AC-P2
: Lift position output 3

AC-P1
AC-C0

: Lift positioning end
AC-AL
AC-BU
: Lift drive motor error

: Lift is moving.
SQ221B : Lift interlock 1 sensor

SQ200D : Chain drive slowdown sensor
LS206A : Cassette door 1 switch
LS206B : Cassette door 2 switch
D-18
D.Operation panel
3-4.Actuator Test screens
3050
Actuator test
Sensor test
Drum test
With this command, you can check the operation of

each actuator.
Motor test
Pressing the
Actuator test
Actuator test
Recording head test

ESC
OK
NEXT

key brings up the Actuator OperaOK
tion Check screen.

ESC

NEXT
Switches to the next screen. (The

key
Pressing the
On
OK
key after selecting any of
keys for the actuators you want to check

performs the check(s).
MBL1
3200
MBL1:Blower (Drum)
On
Off
BL40:Blower (Gas)
On
Off
M41:Compressor (Gas)
On
Off
Off
: Blower (Drum)
Turns on/off the blower for the plate suction on

the drum.
BL40
: Blower (Gas)
Turns on/off the blower for the exhaust gas suction.
ESC
OK
M41
: Compressor (Gas)
Turns on/off the compressor for the exhaust gas
collection when exposing.
3201
M11H:Lock pin (Home)
Out
In
M11H:Blancer pin (Home)
Out
In
M11A:Lock pin (Away)
Out
In
M11A:Blancer pin (Away)
Out
In
ESC
OK
M11H
: Lock pin (Home)
Activates the lock pin on the Home side.
M11H
: Balancer pin (Home)
Activates the balancer pin on the Home side.
M11A
: Lock pin (Away)
Activates the lock pin on the Away side.
M11A
: Balancer pin (Away)
Activates the balancer pin on the Away side.
D-19
D.Operation panel
M20
3202
M20:Squeeze roller
Up
Down
M20:Trail edge clamp arm
Up
Down
Hold
Rele
Up
Down
M24:Trail edge clamp hook

ESC
: Squeeze roller
Activates the squeeze roller.

M20
: Trail edge clamp arm
Activates the trailing edge clamp arm motor.
M24
: Trail edge clamp hook
Activates the trailing edge clamp hook drive
motor
OK
M30
: Leading edge clamp

Activates the motor for opening/closing the
leading edge clamp.
M58
3203
M58:Door open
On
Off
BZ1:Buzzer
On
Off
PS2:Power supply(Servo pack)
On
Off
PS43:Power supply(LD)
On
Off
ESC
: Door open
Activates the solenoid for the operation door.
(*1) (SL58 for the PT-R4300)

BZ1
: Buzzer
Activates the buzzer.
PS2
: Power supply (Servo pack)
OK
Switches ON/OFF the excitation of the servo

pack.
When ON, the drum is held still.
When OFF, the drum is released.
PS43
: Power supply (LD)

Activates the power supply for the laser diodes.
1) For PT-R4000 (II)

Whenever you set Door open to ON, be sure
to set it to OFF afterwards.
The solenoid will remain ON until the Door
open is set to OFF.
3204
M52:Niproller
Up
Down
SL53:Shutter
Close
Open
Up
Down
M55:Path
ESC
D-20
M52
: Niproller
Activates the nip roller in the trans port unit.
SL53
: Shutter
Activates the shutter.
M55
: Path
Activates the transport unit.
OK
D.Operation panel
SL59-1
3205
SL59-1:Load clatch
On
Off
SL59-2:Unload clatch
On
Off
: Load clatch
Activates the transport clutch (on the plate

loading side).
SL59-2 : Unload clatch
Activates the transport clutch (on the plate unloading side).
ESC
OK
M60-1
3206
M60-1:Punch 1
On
Off
M60-2:Punch 2
On
Off
M60-3:Register punch(Home)
On
Off
M60-4:Register punch(Away)
On
Off
ESC
: Punch 1
Activates Punch 1.
M60-2 : Punch 2
Activates Punch 2.
M60-3 : Register punch (Home)
Activates the registration punch.
M60-4 : Register punch (Away)
OK
Activates the registration punch.

3207
M60-5:Punch 5
Up
Down
M60-6:Punch 6
On
Off
M93:Paper nip roller
Up
Down
M90:Paper transport roller
On
Off
SL97:Carrier lock
On
Off
VP100:Vacuum pump
On
Off
ESC
M60-6 : Punch 6
Activates Punch 6.
OK
3208
ESC
M60-5 : Punch 5
Activates Punch 5.
OK
M93
: Paper nip roller

Activates the interleaf nip roller.
M90
: Paper transport roller

Activates the interleaf discharge roller.
SL97
: Carrier lock
Activates the cassette lock. (only SA-L)
VP100 : Vacuum pump

Activates the vacuum pump.
D-21
D.Operation panel
V102-1
3209
V102-1:Plate pad valve 1
Close
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
ESC
: Plate pad valve1
Activates the solenoid valve operation for plate

pad (zoon1).
V102-2 : Plate pad valve2
pad (zoon2).
OK

pad (zoon3).
pad (zoon4).
3210
V102-5:Paper pad valve 1
Close
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
Close
Open
ESC
OK
V102-5 : Paper pad valve1

Activates the solenoid valve operation for
interleaf pad (zoon1).
3211
SL209:Mal door
M200:Lift motor -> Lift
-> Cas
ESC
OK
Close
Open
On
Off
On
Off
SL209 : Mal door

Releases the door lock of the multi-cassette
unit.
After the door lock has been released, closing the

door will automatically lock it.
M200
: Lift motor -> Lift

Moves the cassette transportation motor.
: Lift motor -> Cas
Moves the cassette transportation motor.
For the machines protection, the motor will not

operate when the part is in a wrong position (e.g.,
when the height of the lift is not correct).
D-22
D.Operation panel
M210
3212
M210:Arm motor -> Lift
Out
In
SL207:Lift brake
On
Off
: Arm motor -> Lift

Moves the arm motor.
In order to protect the machine, once the motor

has moved to the Out direction, the motor cannot
ESC
OK
move again. In such a case, return the cassette

to the multi-cassette unit side until the lock works.
SL207
: Lift brake
Moves the electromagnetic brake used for the

lift tray.
If the M220 servo is turned OFF, the brake cannot be released. (e.g., when an interlock is released and a door is opened)
D-23
D.Operation panel
3-5.Drum Test screens
3050
Drum test
Sensor test
Drum test
With this command, you can check each of the drum

units various operations.
Motor test
Pressing the
Actuator test
Drum test
Recording head test

ESC
OK

key brings up the Drum Unit OpOK
NEXT
eration Check screen.

ESC

3300
NEXT
Zero
Return
Fast
Slow
Leading
Clamp
Squeeze
Front
check
Tail
clamp
Edge
sense
Servo
(ON)
Servo
(OFF)
Error
Clear
Brake
On/Off
ESC

Pressing the
OK
key after selecting any of
the test items executes its operation.
OK
Pressing the
3350
OK
key after selecting any of the
above commands brings up the screen shown on the

left.
Start OK ?
ESC
Returns you to the previous screen.

ESC
OK
Cancel
OK
The drum starts the selected command operation.

Cancel
Halts the current operation of the drum.

Zero Return:
Detects the drum (encoder) units z-pulse
point.
Fast:
Rotates the drum at the exposure speed. (The
drum rotates at the speed used during the last
image exposure.)
Slow:
Rotates the drum at the plate transfer speed.
Leading Clamp:
Moves the drum to the plate loading position
where the leading edge clamps can be opened
to load a plate.
D-24
D.Operation panel
Squeeze:
Moves the drum to the position where the
squeeze roller can be lowered.
Front check:
Rotates the drum to the position for the plate
leading edge check when loading.
Tail clamp:
Moves the drum to the position where the trailing edge clamps can hold or release a plate.
Edge sensor:
Not used.
Servo (ON):
Prevents the drum from rotating.
Servo (OFF):
Prevents the drum from rotating.
Error Clear:
Clears errors in the servo.
Brake On/Off:
Not used.
1050
Plate 1
Plate 2
Plate 3
Plate 4
Plate 5
ESC
Tail
clamp
The screen shown on the left for selecting plate

size only appears if this command is selected.
This is because the grips trailing edge clamp positions are controlled by the plate size.
OK
NEXT
After you select the plate size, a confirmation

screen asking you whether to execute the selected command appears.
D-25
D.Operation panel
3-6.Pulse Motor Test screens
3050
Motor test
Sensor test
Drum test

the pulse motor.
Motor test
Individually activates each pulse motor.
Actuator test
ESC
Recording head test

ESC
OK

Pressing the OK key after selecting the pulse
NEXT
motor you want to check starts its operation.

3450
M50
M50:Transport roller(In)
Activates the transport motor on the plate loading side.
M50:Transport roller(Out)
M61:
M50
ESC
OK
: Transport roller (In)
NEXT
: Transport roller (Out)

Activates the transport motor on the plate un-
loading side.
M61
:
Activates the plate side alignment drive motor.
NEXT
NEXT
3451
M91:Plate pad motor
M91
: Plate pad motor

Activates the plate pad drive motor.
M92
: Plate transport roller

Activates the transportation motor of the AT
M92:Plate transport rollor

M98:Paper pad motor
M95:Lift motor
section.
M98
: Paper pad motor
ESC
OK
NEXT
Activates the interleaf pad drive motor.

M95
: Lift motor
Activates the lift drive motor.
D-26
D.Operation panel
Distance setting button
Distance setting button

Sets the distance units for moving the selected
pulse motor. Repeatedly pressing this button
3400
CLR
0
0.0
ESC
changes the indication in the following order.
[pulse]
[mm/sec]
[pulse]
Currently, this button cannot be used for any of

the listed pulse motor tests.
ENT
OK
[mm]
3400
CLR
0.0
ESC
[mm]
[mm/sec]
OK
(Allowable range: -999.9 to 999.9):

Sets the distance to move the pulse motor in
mm
[pulse]
(Allowable range: -9999 to 9999):
To operate the pulse motor continuously, input

0 in both fields of the screen shown on the left
and press the OK key.
If you want to execute the M61 command, enter
the plates width in this field.
ENT
[pulse]
3400
init
If there is no plate loaded on the drum when

you execute the M61 command, an error appears. Therefore, be sure to set a plate on the
drum before executing this command.
init
ESC
OK
Returns the selected pulse motor to its home

position for initialization.
This button cannot be used with either the M50
and M54 command.
0.0 [mm/sec] (Allowable range: 0 to 999.9):
Sets the operation speed of the pulse motor.
Setting this parameter to 0 will operate the pulse
motor at the default speed (normal operating speed).
Only use this parameter if you want to operate
the pulse motor at a different speed.
Pressing the OK key after completing the
setting brings up the screen for pulse motor operation shown on the left.
D-27
D.Operation panel
3452
OK
Operates or initializes the pulse motor. When

the operation is completed, the screen for distance setting reappears.
Start OK ?
ESC
D-28
OK
Cancel
D.Operation panel
3-7.Recording Head Unit Test screens
3050
Recording head test
Sensor test
Drum test

the recording head unit.
Motor test
Pressing the
Actuator test
Recording head test
Recording head test

ESC
OK
NEXT

key brings up the Recording Head
OK
Unit Operation screen.

ESC

NEXT

3505
RH zero return
RH zero return
RH positioning
Returns the recording head to its home position.

(Refer to D-31)
Focus zero return

Focus positioning
RH positioning
Zoom zero return

ESC
OK
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
Positions the recording head at a desired point

in the secondary scanning direction.
(Refer to D-32)
Focus zero return
Returns the focus motor to its home position.

(Refer to D-31)
Focus positioning
Positions the focus motor at a desired point.

(Refer to D-32)
Zoom zero return
3506
Returns the zoom motor to its home position.

(Refer to D-31)
Zoom positioning
Zoom positioning
Peltier test
Positions the zoom motor at a desired point.

(Refer to D-32)
Laser calibration
LD ON
Peltier test
ESC
OK
NEXT
Executes an operation test for the Peltier unit.

(Refer to D-33)
NEXT
NEXT
Laser calibration
Executes LD channel calibration.

(Refer to D-34)
D-29
D.Operation panel
LD ON
Turns the laser diodes ON.

(Refer to D-36)
Adjusts the position of the calibration sensor.

(Refer to D-38)
3507
Move to cal. pos.
Move to cal. pos.
Moves the recording head to the calibration position.
Temperature
Laser power measure
(Refer to D-39)
Iopd-Iop
Temperature
ESC
OK
NEXT
Displays the temperatures in the recording head

and in the PT-R unit.
(Refer to D-40)
Laser power measure
Measures the laser power.

(Refer to D-41)
Iopd-Iop
Displays the value obtained by calculating Iopd

- Iop. (Refer to D-44)
D-30
D.Operation panel
3-7-1.Zero Return screen for recording head unit/focus motor/zoom motor
3505
RH zero return
RH zero return
RH positioning
Focus zero return
Focus zero return
Zoom zero return
Focus positioning
Allows you to return the recording head unit, focus
Zoom zero return

ESC
OK
NEXT
motor, and zoom motor to their home positions.

Pressing the OK key after selecting any of the
above keys brings up the zero return confirmation
screen.
3515
ESC
Zero return ?
ESC
START
START
Starts the zero return operation. When the zero

return operation is completed, the Recording
Head Unit Test screen reappears.
3516
Processing Now.
Please wait !
D-31
D.Operation panel
3-7-2.Positioning screens for recording head unit/focus motor/zoom motor
3505
RH zero return
RH positioning
RH positioning
Focus positioning
Focus zero return
Zoom positioning
Focus positioning
Allows you to position the recording head unit, focus
Zoom zero return

ESC
3506
OK
NEXT
motor, and zoom motor.

Pressing the OK key after selecting any of the
above keys brings up the position entry screen.
Zoom positioning
ESC
Peltier test
Laser calibration
LD ON
ESC
OK
NEXT
3520
CLR
0.00
ESC
mm
Screen display for RH positioning

3540
CLR
7
2080 [pulse]
ESC
START
START
key to start the positioning operation.
Allowable range
RH positioning [mm]: 0.0 to 903.0
Focus positioning [pulse]: 101 to 4000
ENT
START
After inputting values for the positions of each

ENT
unit, press the
key and then the
Zoom positioning [pulse]: 201 to 9970

For the zero return operation, the home position is regarded as the absolute position 0.
1 pulse corresponds to about 1 m movement
for Focus positioning and Zoom positioning.
When the positioning operation is completed,
the Recording Head Unit Test screen reappears.
ENT
Screen display for Focus positioning and Zoom positioning
3521
Processing Now.
Please wait !
D-32
D.Operation panel
3-7-3.Peltier Test screen
3506
Peltier test
Zoom positioning
Allows you to execute an operation test for the Peltier

unit.
Peltier test
Laser calibration
Pressing the
LD ON
Peltier test
ESC
OK
NEXT

key brings up the Peltier Test Input
OK
screen.
ESC

3570
CLR
Peltier ctl. DAC

0
ESC
OK
A value ranging from 0 to 255 can be input in

the Peltier ctl. DAC field.
Values in the range from 0 to 255 correspond to
Peltier drive voltages ranging from 0 to 12V.
ENT
3571
Pressing the OK key after inputting a value

in this field activates the Peltier unit.
STOP
Processing Now
Please wait !

STOP
When an Error Exe20 is displayed (LD block

Peltier test
key
temperature too high), the
is used to identify whether the malfunction is in
the Peltier unit itself or in the board driving the

Peltier unit.
To identify the source of the error, run the
Peltier unit and check whether output occurs
normally from the Peltier units terminal box
and whether the area where the dew condensation sensor is attached has cooled down.
D-33
D.Operation panel
3-7-4.Laser Calibration screen
3506
Laser calibration
Zoom positioning
Executes LD channel calibration.

The operation for calibrating the laser diodes is
Peltier test
Laser calibration
the same as that executed by the Laser calibration command from the User Setting Selection
LD ON
ESC
OK
NEXT
screen.
Pressing the
Laser calibration
OK
key brings up the Resolution Selec-
tion screen.
ESC

3580
Press the
Resolution
key after selecting the resolu-
1200
dpi
2000
dpi
2400
dpi
tion at which you want to calibrate the laser diodes.
4000
dpi
2438
dpi
2540
dpi
The Channel Selection screen for selecting a laser diode channel appears.
ESC
OK
3581
CLR
LD No. (0-31 32 : ALL)

32
ESC
OK
START
Input the number of the laser diode channel you

ENT
want to calibrate, and then press the
key.
ENT
0-31 : Calibrates only the selected channel.

32
: Calibrates all channels.
Then, press the
tion.
START
key to execute calibra-
It takes approximately 20 seconds to calibrate a

channel. To calibrate all the channels, it takes approximately 3 minutes.
When laser calibration is completed, the Recording Head Unit Test Menu screen reappears.
D-34
D.Operation panel
32-ch recording head
Application
Definition
Iopd
Electric current to
output the rated
power of laser
diodes
Iop
Electric current to
light the laser
diodes
Screen
Used as electric
Service/Input parameter/RH
current that
determines the life parameter/Reference laser power
of laser diodes
Service/Input parameter/RH
parameter/Laser power confirm
32-ch recording head

Warning
Iopd-Iop 50mA
Error
Iop = Iopd
D-35
D.Operation panel
3-7-5.LD ON screen
3506
LD ON
Zoom positioning
Turns the laser diodes ON at each resolution setting.
Peltier test
Laser calibration
LD ON
Although the laser diodes in the PT-R are not directly visible, NEVER operate them while the RH
ESC
OK
NEXT
units cover is open.

Pressing the
LD ON
OK
key brings up the Resolution
Selection screen.
ESC

3590
Select the exposure resolution for which the la-
Resolution
1200
dpi
2000
dpi
2400
dpi
4000
dpi
2438
dpi
2540
dpi
ESC
ser diodes will be used, and then press the

OK
key.
The Laser Power Setting screen appears.
OK
3591
Light Adjust
85.0 %
ESC
7
4
1
0
OK
CLR
8 9
5 6
2 3

ENT
3592
CLR
LD No. (0-31)
0
ESC
D-36
START
Input the desired laser power, and then press

the
ENT
key.
Then, press the OK key. The Channel Input

screen for selecting the number of the LD channel to turn ON appears.
Input the number of the channel you want to

ENT
key.
turn ON, and then press the
START
Press the
key. The laser on the channel
you selected is then lighted.
ENT
D.Operation panel
Pressing the
3595
STOP
key terminates the laser il-
lumination and returns you to the Recording

Head Unit Test Menu screen.
Processing Now.
Please wait !
STOP
D-37
D.Operation panel
3-7-6.Calibration Position screen
3506
Zoom positioning
With this command, you can automatically detect and

adjust the position of the calibration sensor board.
Peltier test
Laser calibration
LD ON
ESC
OK
Whenever you replace the RH unit and/or caliNEXT
bration sensor, be sure to use this command.

Pressing the
3600
CLR
SEARCH
Caribration position
-0.6
-0.6
[mm]
0
ESC
key brings up the Calibration Sensor Position Detection screen.

ESC

SEARCH
Detects the position of the calibration sensor

board.
ENT
SAVE
OK
3601
Processing Now.
Please wait !
3600
CLR
SEARCH
Caribration position
-0.6
1.0
[mm]
0
ESC
ENT
SAVE
3605
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
D-38
NO
When detection of the calibration sensor board

is completed, the Calibration Sensor Position
Detection screen reappears.
The resulting detection data is also displayed
on this screen.
SAVE
Saves the new data.

Press YES and then OK to save the position of the calibration sensor board.
If you want to cancel the save, press
then OK .
NO
and
OK
D.Operation panel
3-7-7.Moving to Calibration Position screen
3507
Move to cal. pos.
Move to cal. pos.
Allows moving of the recording head to the calibration position.
Temperature
Laser power measure
Pressing the
Iopd-Iop
Move to cal. pos.
ESC
OK
NEXT

key moves the recording head to
OK
the position where the calibration is executed.
When the recording head movement is completed, the

menu screen shown on the left appears
3610
Processing Now.
Please wait !
D-39
D.Operation panel
3-7-8.Temperature Display screen
3507
Temperature
Move to cal. pos.
Allows displaying of the temperatures in the recording head and in the PT-R unit.
Temperature
Laser power measure
Pressing the
Iopd-Iop
Temperature
ESC
OK
NEXT

key displays the Temperature
OK
screen.
ESC

3620
Temperature
Machine env.
LD bolck
Head env.
Fin
Dew condens
27.1
25.0
28.1
28.0
0
Temperature
Machine env. :
Displays the temperature in the PT-R
unit.
Warning status:
Temperature in the PT-R unit > 28 C or
OK
temperature in the PT-R unit < 18 C

LD block :
Displays the LD base temperature.
Error status: LD base temperature >28
C
Head env. :
Displays the temperature around the recording head.
Error status: Temperature around the recording head >35 C
Fin :
Displays the temperature of a radiating
fin.
Error status: Radiating fin temperature >
55 C
Dew condens :
Displays the dew condensation sensor
status.
(Unit: kW)
Normal status: 0 to 20 kW
Warning status: Over 20 kW
Error (dew condensation) status:
Over 100 kW
D-40
D.Operation panel
3-7-9.Laser Power Measurement and Cable Disconnection Check screens
3507
Laser power measure
Move to cal. pos.
Allows you to measure the laser power.

OK
Pressing the
Temperature
Laser power measure
Laser power measure
Iopd-Iop
key brings up the Resolution Se-
lection screen.
ESC
OK
NEXT
ESC

Select the resolution by which you wish to
measure the laser power and then press the
2260
Resolution
ESC
1200
dpi
2000
dpi
2400
dpi
4000
dpi
2438
dpi
2540
dpi
key.
The Laser Power Measurement screen appears.
OK
OK
Then, press the
2261
OK
key to activate the laser
power measurement.
Start OK ?
ESC
OK
While the laser power is being measured, the

display shown to the left appears.
2262
Processing Now.
Please wait !
When the measurement of laser power is completed, the following screen appears.
D-41
D.Operation panel
2263
0ch
1ch
2ch
3ch
4ch
5ch
6ch
7ch
Target values (Lpw):

270
270
270
270
270
270
270
270
8ch
9ch
10ch
11ch
12ch
13ch
14ch
15ch
270
270
270
270
269
270
270
270
16ch
17ch
18ch
19ch
20ch
21ch
22ch
23ch
270
270
270
270
270
270
270
270
24ch
25ch
26ch
27ch
28ch
29ch
30ch
31ch
270
270
270
270
270
270
270
270
These values have been specified in the Laser

power setting screen, which is accessible by selecting Service Maintenance Input parameter RH parameter.
1200 dpi: 240 mW/ch
2400 dpi: 240 mW/ch
OK
2000 dpi: 270 mW/ch

2438 dpi: 240 mW/ch
2540 dpi: 230 mW/ch 4000 dpi: 240 mW/ch

The measured values are indicated in % in the
NEXT
user mode screen.

Pressing
2264
0ch
1ch
2ch
3ch
4ch
5ch
6ch
7ch
100% 8ch
100% 9ch
100% 10ch
100% 11ch
100% 12ch
100% 13ch
100% 14ch
100% 15ch
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
16ch
17ch
18ch
19ch
20ch
21ch
22ch
23ch
OK
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
24ch
25ch
26ch
27ch
28ch
29ch
30ch
31ch
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
OK
brings up the screen shown on the
left. In this screen, you can make sure that the cables
running from the RB31 board to the recording head
are not disconnected.
When the measured light intensity is 50% or more
of the target light intensity.
When the measured light intensity is less than 50%
of the target light intensity.
The measured values are indicated using
or
in the user mode screen.
1) Operation conditions
The screen to check for the disconnection of image signal cables between the RB31
board and the recording head is displayed when the following conditions are satisfied.
The firmware version of the main unit is:
A plate has been loaded.
The Machine Type 2 parameter (Service Maintenance Set misc. data) has
been set to 4. (Factory set value: 0)
The 16 ch exposure mode has not been set.
1) There is no disabled or lowered light intensity LD.
2) The 16 ch exposure mode has not been selected in the Service Maintenance
Machine option select screen.
D-42
D.Operation panel
2) Description of the operation
The cable disconnection is checked by issuing a pseudo-image signal from the
RB31 board to light up the LDs. The light intensity of each LD is measured using the
calibration sensor. When the measured LD power is insufficient, the sensor identifies it as a cable disconnection.
The check for cable disconnection can be performed only when the recording head
is in the calibration position.
3) Timing of the check
The cable disconnection check timing is:
After the regular light intensity measurement
1) Before exposing the first plate after turning ON the power supply
2) Before exposing a plate after completing exposure of 24 plates (default value)
Note that if the output laser power of any of the LDs is out of the 5% (default value)
range of the target output value, the cable disconnection will not be checked.
4) When the disconnection of any cable between the RB31 board and the recording
head is detected:
If the output laser power of any of the LDs is less than 50% of its target value, the
following error will be issued.
Ex839
The cable between RB31 board and recording head is disconnected.
When this error is issued, the exposure operation is canceled and it can be resumed
after resetting the error and performing an initialization.
D-43
D.Operation panel
3-7-10.Iopd - Iop screen
3507
Iopd-Iop
Move to cal. pos.
Displays the lives of the laser diodes according to the

calculation.
Temperature
Laser power measure
Pressing the
Iopd-Iop
Iopd-Iop
ESC
OK
NEXT

key brings up the screen to select
OK
the resolution.
ESC
Returns you to the upper layer screen.

3700
Resolution
Select the resolution and press the
1200
dpi
2000
dpi
2400
dpi
4000
dpi
2438
dpi
2540
dpi
ESC
key.
OK
The values listed in the screen shown on the left
3701
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
OK
392
381
374
367
414
365
356
412
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
332
357
333
345
330
339
342
359
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
OK
353
394
412
386
393
394
387
408
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
408
399
329
401
407
418
400
408
indicate the results of following calculation formula.

Iopd - Iop
Indicated value 50 mA
Life warning status of laser diode
Indicated value > 50 mA
Normal status of laser diode
Indicated value = 0 mA
Life error status of laser diode
D-44
D.Operation panel
3-8.Input Parameter screen
3051
Input parameter
Input parameter
With this command, you can enter and change various

parameters for the PT-R.

I/O Read/Write
Pressing the
Initialize data
Input parameter
Special action
ESC
3705
OK
NEXT
Allows you to set correction values for precisely

adjusting the image length to be exposed on a
plate (in the secondary scanning direction) and
Drum base position

Drum position
OK
Menu screen.
Set Correction data
Set Correction data
Set preset Plate type
ESC

key brings up the Input Parameter
OK
NEXT
NEXT
adjusting the exposure start origin.

(Refer to D-47)
Allows you to register the data for preset plate

types.
(Refer to D-49)
Drum base position
Allows you to correct for the deviation between

the drum reference point and the encoder Z
pulse point.
(Refer to D-50)
Drum position
Allows you to precisely adjust the positioning

of the drum.
(Refer to D-52)
3706
Punch adjust
Punch adjust
Allows you to set a correction value for posi-
Set punch data
tioning the punch unit with reference to a

plates center, and adjusts the spring tension in
RH parameter
Drum parameter
ESC
OK
NEXT
NEXT
the plate side alignment unit.

(Refer to D-54)
Allows you to input a correction value for the

position of the calibration sensor.
(Refer to D-55)
D-45
D.Operation panel
Set punch data
Allows you to set parameters for optional

punch units.
(Refer to D-56)
RH parameter
Allows you to set parameters for the board and

laser diodes in the RH unit.
(Refer to D-57)
Drum parameter
Allows you to set parameters for the drum motor driver.

(Refer to D-73)
3707
Set misc. data
Set misc. data
The Mfg. No of the machine is already entered.

(Refer to D-80)
Set resolution
Set weight
Set resolution
Set cassette data
Password for spec. func
ESC
OK
NEXT
Sets the address in the parameter table for registering the RH units settings for each resolution.
(Refer to D-81)
Set weight
Sets the weights of the trailing edge clamps and

the balancer.
(Refer to D-82)
Set cassette data
Sets the sizes of the plates to be used in the

zones 2 and 3.
(Refer to D-83)
Sets the password for various special functions.

(Refer to D-86)
D-46
D.Operation panel
3-8-1.Correction Data Setting screens
3705
Set Correction data
Set Correction data
Allows you to set correction values for precisely adjusting the image length to be exposed on a plate (in
the secondary scanning direction) and adjusting the

exposure start origin.
Drum base position

Drum position
ESC
OK
NEXT
Pressing the
Set Correction data

key brings up the Correction Data
OK
Setting screen. From this screen you can input correction values, precisely adjust the image length to be exposed on a plate in the secondary
scanning direction, and adjust the exposure start origin.
ESC

3740
R
R
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
ESC
CLR
[%]
0.000 [mm]
R
0.000
[mm]
length of an image exposed on a plate in the

secondary scanning direction.
[mm]
[]
[mm]
OK
ENT
[%] (Allowable range: -9.999 to 9.999)

This correction value precisely adjusts the
The correction value is used to adjust the image

length exposed on a plate in the secondary scanning direction.
For example, if an image which is 800 mm in the
secondary scanning direction is exposed on a
plate while this correction value is set to 0, if the
resulting length of the exposed image on the
plate is 799 mm, the image deviation equals:
(800 - 799)/800 x 100 = 0.125 (%)
Inputting this value as the correction value above
allows you to precisely
expose an image on a plate with exactly the
same length as its secondary scanning dimension.
R
Input a correction value for the exposure start

origin in the main scanning direction.
Input a correction value for the exposure start

origin in the secondary scanning direction.
Input a correction value for the plate feed

amount when loading.
This setting can correct deviation from the
standard pin position within a range of 50m.
D-47
D.Operation panel
+
Input a correction value for the image position

in the primary scanning direction.
3741
Refarence Y size data

1. 0 9. 0 17. 0
2. 0 10. 0 18. 0
3. 0 11. 0 19. 0
4. 0 12. 0
5. 0 13. 0
6. 0 14. 0
7. 0 15. 0
8. 0 16. 0
ESC
CLR
7
It is not necessary to input any correction values.

All data have been set to 0 at the factory.
ENT
OK
3742
CLR
Vacuum threshold
30
Max paper count
30
-----------------
Temp. offset
ESC
This table is for inputting the cylindricality correction

values.
.
ENT
OK
Vacuum threshold:
This value is used to chaeck that the vacuum
hose has not been disconnected.
Max paper count: (Allowable range: 0 to 100):
Input the maximum number of interleafs that
can be stored in the interleaf collection box.
When the number of interleafs exceeds this
value, a warning message indicating the
interleaf disposal will be displayed.
Temp.offset: [0.1C] (Allowable range: -50 to 50):
Input a correction value for the temperature
sensor. For details, refer to 7.Temperature
correction sensor adjustment in chapter C.
3745
Press
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
D-48
NO
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting
data.
If you do not want to save the data, press
and then
OK
NO
OK
D.Operation panel
3-8-2.Preset Plate Type Setting screen
3705
Set Correction data
Allows you to register the data for preset plate types.

OK
Pressing the
Drum base position
Setting screen.
Drum position
ESC
OK
key brings up the Preset Plate Type
NEXT
ESC

Select the number of the plate type option you
1057
31
32
33
34
35
KODAK IR 0.24mm
ESC
OK
NEXT
want to modify, and then change or correct its

data.
The default plate type data has already been
set in the factory before shipment.
For details on how to change or correct plate
type data.
1058
36
KODAK IR 0.30mm
37
Media Type 37
38
Media Type 38
39
Media Type 39
40
Media Type 40
ESC
OK
NEXT
D-49
D.Operation panel
3-8-3.Drum Base Position Setting screen
3705
Drum base position
Set Correction data
Allows you to correct for the deviation between the

drum reference point and the encoder Z pulse point.
Pressing the
Drum base position
Drum base position
Drum position
ESC
OK
NEXT

key brings up the Drum Base PosiOK
tion Setting screen in which you can correct the deviation (in pulses) between the drum reference point and
the encoder Z pulse point.
ESC

3840
CLR
READ
Drum base position
1105
ESC
1105 [pulse]
ENT
SAVE
READ
Returns Detects the deviation (in pulses) between the drum reference point and the encoder
Z pulse point.
Before using this
READ
command, be sure to in-
stall the drum positioning jigs.

After completing the detection of the deviation
3841
between the drum reference point and the encoder Z pulse point, the screen shown on the
Drum base position

1309[pulse]
left appears. Press the
OK
key.
The resulting data is then displayed on the

ESC
screen.
OK
3840
CLR
READ
Drum base position
1105
ESC
D-50
1309 [pulse]
SAVE
SAVE
Allows you to save the new data.
ENT
D.Operation panel
3845
Press
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
NO
YES
and then
OK
to save the result-
ing data.
then
OK
NO
and
OK
D-51
D.Operation panel
3-8-4.Drum Position Setting screen
3705
Drum position
Set Correction data
Allows you to precisely adjust the positioning of the

drum.
Pressing the
Drum base position
Drum position
Drum position
ESC
OK
NEXT

key brings up the Drum Position
OK
Precise Adjustment screen.

ESC

1 pulse = 0.28 mm
3850
CLR
Drum position [pulse]

Lead clamp (load):
Front Sensor:
Tail clamp:
Squeeze roller:
Balancer pin:
Pick up clamp:
Tail clamp (unload):
Length Sensor:
ESC
0
10
12
0
0
4
1
-5
SAVE
ENT
Lead clamp (load)

Not use
Front Sensor [pulse] (Allowable range: -100 to 100)
Perform the fine adjustment for the position
check for plate leading edge when loading.
(Adjust the position of the sensor so that the
sensor turns from On to Off.)
Tail clamp [pulse] (Allowable range: -100 to 100)
Precisely adjusts the drum position at which the
trailing edge clamps will hold a plate.
Squeeze rollor [pulse] (Allowable range: -100 to 100)
squeeze roller will be lowered.
Balancer pin
Not use
Pick up clamp [pulse] (Allowable range: -100 to 100)
Precisely adjusts the drum position to the pick
up clamp position.
Tail clamp (unload) [pulse] (Allowable range: -100 to 100)
trailing edge clamps will be released from the
drum.
Length Sensor [pulse] (Allowable range: -100 to 100)
Sets a value to correct the plate size in the primary scanning direction.
Adjust the value in the screen accessed by the
following order.
(Select User Maintenance
D-52
RH
.)
D.Operation panel
3855
Press
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
NO
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting
data.
then
OK
NO
and
OK
D-53
D.Operation panel
3-8-5.Punch Adjustment screen
3706
Punch adjust
Punch adjust
Allows you to set a correction value for positioning

the punch unit with reference to a plates center, and
Set punch data
adjusts the spring tension in the plate side alignment

unit.
RH parameter
Drum parameter
ESC
OK
NEXT
Pressing the
Punch adjust

key brings up the Punch AdjustOK
ment screen in which you can correct the punch position with reference to the plate center and adjust the
tension of the spring in the plate side alignment unit.
ESC

3860
CLR
Punch adjust
0.000 [mm]
0.000 [mm]
0.000 [mm]
ESC
ENT
SAVE
3865
YES
D-54
: Fine adjustment for the cam follower position at Home side sensor is performed.
: Fine adjustment for the cam follower position at Away side sensor is performed.
Press
Save Data ?
ESC
: Coarse adjustment for the cam follower position is performed.
NO
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting
data.
then
OK
NO
and
OK
D.Operation panel
3-8-6.Calibration Sensor Position Adjustment screen
3706
Punch adjust
Set punch data
Allows you to input a correction value for the position

of the calibration sensor.
RH parameter
Pressing the
Drum parameter
ESC
OK
NEXT

key brings up the Calibration SenOK
sor Position Adjustment screen in which you can set a

correction value for the position of the calibration
sensor.
ESC

3870
CLR
2.5 [mm]
ESC
ENT
SAVE
3875
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
NO
It is possible to simply input the correction

value from this screen. However, to assure a
more precise correction value, be sure to adjust
the value following the procedure described in
3-7-6 Calibration Position screen.
SAVE

Press
data.
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting

then OK .
NO
and
OK
D-55
D.Operation panel
3-8-7.Punch Data Setting screen
3706
Set punch data
Punch adjust
Allows you to set parameters for optional punch units.

OK
Pressing the
Set punch data
Set punch data
key brings up the Punch Data Setting screen in which you can set data for the optional
RH parameter
Drum parameter
ESC
OK
NEXT
punch units.
ESC

3880
Block
Width
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
No.7
No.8
No.9
ESC
CLR
mounted on the machine.

Entering a number for a punch unit position
where no punch unit is mounted could cause an
error during punch operation.
ENT
SAVE
Enter the punch unit position number (connector number) for the optional punch unit
Also input the punch pitch into the Set punch

name field to simplify later settings of the
punch unit name.
SAVE

3855
Press
data.
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
YES
and then
OK

then OK .
NO
NO
and
OK
Home side
Away side
No.1 No.2 No.3

Registration punch
D-56
to save the setting
No.4 No.5 No.6

Registration punch
D.Operation panel
3-8-8.Recording Head Parameter Setting screens
3706
RH parameter
Punch adjust
Set punch data
Allows you to set parameters for the board and laser

diodes in the RH unit.
RH parameter
Pressing the
RH parameter
Drum parameter
ESC
3895
OK
NEXT
Allows entry of the target laser power used for

channel calibration at each resolution.
(Refer to D-59)
Laser power confirm

Reference laser power
Laser power adjust
Temperature setting
OK
NEXT
setting RH parameters.
Laser power setting
Laser power setting

Laser power adjust
ESC

key brings up the menu screen for
OK
NEXT
NEXT
Allows precise adjustment of the power of each

LD channel at each resolution.
(Refer to D-60)
Laser power confirm
Allows the checking of the electric current

(Iop) used in a laser diode channel at each resolution and the output power values of Ip1, Ip2,
and Ip3, which are specified in Laser power setting.
(Refer to D-61)
Allows the checking of the rated output current

(Iopd) at each resolution.
(Refer to D-62)
Temperature setting
Allows entry of the parameters for temperature

in the RH unit.
(Refer to D-63)
D-57
D.Operation panel
3896
Laser running time
Laser running time
Displays or clears the cumulative laser illumi-
Writing time clear
nation time.
(Refer to D-64)
Board costant setting

Auto calibration
Writing times clear
Set temp. warning

ESC
OK
NEXT
Displays or clears the number of times that the

laser illumination time data has been written to
the EEPROM.
(Refer to D-65)
Allows the checking of parameters that are

unique to each board of recording head.
(Refer to D-66)
Auto calibration
Allows you to set the execution time for auto

calibration.
(Refer to D-69)
Set temp. warning
Allows you to set the warning error level for

temperature.
(Refer to D-72)
D-58
D.Operation panel
1) Laser Power Setting screen
3895
Laser power setting
Laser power setting
Allows entry of the target laser power used for chan-
Laser power adjust
nel calibration at each resolution.

OK
Pressing the
Laser power confirm

Laser power setting
Temperature setting
ESC
OK
NEXT
tion screen.
ESC

3900
Resolution
1200
dpi
2000
dpi
2400
dpi
4000
dpi
2438
dpi
2540
dpi
ESC
Select a resolution and then press the

key.
OK
The Data Input screen appears.

Input the target laser power for channel calibration and the power output percentage at each
OK
specified measurement point.

Lpw value
3901
1200dpi : 240mw
2000dpi : 270mw
CLR
Lpw
Ip1
Ip2
Ip3
270
90
75
50
LPW(original)
2400dpi : 240mw
4000dpi : 270mw
[mW]
270
ESC
2438dpi : 240mw
2540dpi : 230mw
ENT
SAVE
Ip1 value
90%(Fixed and applied to all resolutions.)
Ip2 value
Ip3 value
ESC

SAVE

Press
3905
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
NO
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting
data.
then
OK
NO
and
OK
D-59
D.Operation panel
2) Laser Power Adjustment screen
3895
Laser power adjust
Laser power setting
Allows precise adjustment of the power of each LD
Laser power adjust
channel at each resolution.

OK
Pressing the
Laser power confirm

Laser power adjust
Temperature setting
tion screen.
ESC
OK
NEXT
ESC

3910
Resolution
1200
dpi
2000
dpi
2400
dpi
4000
dpi
2438
dpi
2540
dpi
ESC
3911
Ch.0
Ch.1
Ch.2
Ch.3
Ch.4
Ch.5
Ch.6
Ch.7

key.
OK
The Data Input screen appears.
OK
A
B
0
1.00
1.00 0
1.00 0
0
1.00
1.00 0
1.00 0
1.00 0
0
1.00
All the parameter setting values in this screen are
fixed. Therefore, be sure to never modify any of

them.
OK

ENT
A: 1.00
B: 0
SAVE
ESC
CLR
Allow you to save the new data.
3919
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
D-60
NO
Press
data.
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting

then OK .
NO
and
OK
D.Operation panel
3) Laser Power Confirmation screen
3895
Laser power confirm
Laser power setting
Allows the checking of the power output of LD with
Laser power adjust
the value set in the Ip1, Ip2, and Ip3 fields in the Laser
Power setting screen at each resolution.
Laser power confirm

Pressing the
Temperature setting
Laser power confirm
ESC
OK
NEXT

key brings up the Resolution SelecOK
tion screen.
ESC
3920
Resolution
1200
dpi
2000
dpi
2400
dpi
4000
dpi
2438
dpi
2540
dpi
ESC

key.
The Data confirmation screen appears.
Iop: [mA] (Allowable range: 0 to 2000)
OK
Electric current required to obtain a light intensity of Lpw (target laser power used for channel
3921
CLR
Iop Pw1 Pw2 Pw3
[mA] [mw] [mw] [mw]
ch.0
ch.1
ch.2
ch.3
836
827
797
788
244
237
239
239
102
105
103
102
194
193
186
185
.
ENT
OK
calibration)
Pw1 : Power measured when an LD is lit using the
electrical current value lop lp1.
ESC
OK
Although it is possible to change the data settings

for each LD channel in this screen, modifying any
of them could adversely affect the resulting beam
balance of the recording head.
Therefore, never change the data setting in this
screen.
SAVE

3929
Press
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
NO
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting
data.
then
OK
NO
and
OK
D-61
D.Operation panel
4) Reference Laser Power Setting screen
3895
Laser power setting
Allows the checking and entry of the rated output cur-
Laser power adjust
rent (Iopd) of the LD channels at each resolution.

OK
Pressing
Laser power confirm

ESC
key brings up the screen in which

you can input parameter settings.
Temperature setting
OK
NEXT
ESC

3930
Select the resolution and press the OK key.

The screen in which you can input parameter
Resolution
1200
dpi
2000
dpi
2400
dpi
4000
dpi
2438
dpi
2540
dpi
ESC
settings is displayed.
OK
3931
CLR
ch.0
ch.1
ch.2
ch.3
Iopd Imd Ithd

[mA] [mA] [mA]
120
120
120
120
1107
1131
1119
1134
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
nel
lmd : Fixed to 0.00. (NEVER change this setting.)
lthd : Fixed to 120. (NEVER change this set-
ENT
OK
ting.)
ESC
lopd : (Allowable range : 0 to 2000)

Maximum rated current for each LD chan-
SAVE

3939
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
D-62
NO
Press
data.
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting

then OK .
NO
and
OK
D.Operation panel
5) Temperature Setting screen
3895
Temperature setting
Laser power setting
Allows entry of the parameter for the temperature in
Laser power adjust
the RH unit.
Pressing the
Laser power confirm

Temperature setting
Temperature setting
ESC
OK
OK
NEXT
key brings up the Temperature Setting screen in which you can input parameter settings.
All the values appearing in this screen are fixed

values. NEVER modify any of them.
3940
Temparature
Pelter ctl. DAC
1.
255
3.
2.
255
Alarm leve
LD
28
Env.
35
ESC
CLR
25
Fin
55
ENT
SAVE
Temperature:
The control temperature of the Peltier element
has been set.
Alarm level :
The temperatures at which an error will occur
during temperature checks (of the following
items) have been set.
LD : Temperature of the laser diodes.
Fin : Temperature of the Peltier elements cooling
fan.
Env. : Temperature of the periphery of the RH unit.
SAVE

3945
Press
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
NO
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting
data.
then
OK
NO
and
OK
D-63
D.Operation panel
6) Laser Illumination Time screen
3896
Laser running time
Laser running time
Displays or clears the cumulative laser illumination
Writing time clear
time.
Pressing the

Auto calibration
OK
key brings up the Laser Illumination Time Display/Clear screen.

Laser running time
Set temp. warning

ESC
OK
NEXT
ESC

3950
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
ESC
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
SAVE
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
[Hour]
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
123
CLEAR
Displays the screen in which you can clear the

laser illumination time.
CLEAR
Input the number of the ID channel whose illumination time you want to clear, and then press
3951
CLR
LD No. (0-31 32 : ALL)

32
ESC
START
ENT
the
ENT
key.
0-31 : Clears the laser illumination time for only the

32
selected LD channel.
: Clears the laser illumination time for all the LD
channels.
Then, press the START key. The Laser Illumination Time Clear screen appears.
3956
Pressing the OK key clears the specified laser illumination time.

CANCEL
Data Clear ?
The Laser Illumination Time Display/Clear

screen reappears.
ESC
D-64
OK
CANCEL
D.Operation panel
7) EEPROM Write Count Clear screen
3896
Writing times clear
Laser running time

Writing time clear
Displays or clears the number of times that the laser
illumination time data has been written to the

EEPROM.
Auto calibration
Set temp. warning
ESC
OK
NEXT
(The number of times that the laser illumination time

has been written to the EEPROM, equivalent to the
image exposure count, is displayed.)
OK
Pressing the
Writing times clear
key brings up the EEPROM Write

Count Clear screen.
ESC

3960
CLEAR
Brings up the screen in which you can clear the
Writing time
EEPROM write count.

Pressing the OK key clears the EEPROM
1729
ESC
write count. On command completion, the upper layer menu screen reappears.
CLEAR
3965
ESC
CANCEL
Data Clear ?
ESC
OK
CANCEL
D-65
D.Operation panel
8) Recording Head Board Parameter Input screen
3896
Laser running time
Allows entry of parameters that must be set for an individual board when it is replaced.
Writing time clear

Pressing the
Auto calibration
Set temp. warning

key brings up the Recording Head
OK
Board Parameter Input screen.

ESC
OK
NEXT
ESC

Parameters that are set in this menu are unique
values for each CPU and driver board of the recording head.
Always set these parameter values whenever replacing these boards.
3970
CPU Board
Temparature sensor
Tm1 Tm2
50C 19.4
30.0
100C 30.2 59.5
Dew condensation sensor

R1
10 R2
101
Calibration sensor
Cal1 488 Cal2 3965
ESC
OK
CLR
7
ENT
Parameters of CPU board for recording head

Temperature sensor
50C : Corrects the input/output differences
occurring in the boards circuitry when
receiving input from the temperature
sensors provided for the LD base and
machine interior.
Tm1: 20C
Tm2: 30C
100C : Corrects the input/output differences
occurring in the boards circuitry when
receiving input from the temperature
sensors provided for the Peltier fan.
Tm1: 30C
Tm2: 60C
Dew condensation sensor
Corrects the input/output differences occurring in the boards circuitry when receiving input from the dew condensation
sensors.
R1: 10 kW
R2: 100 kW
D-66
D.Operation panel
3971
CLR
Cal. Sensor Gain
7759
ESC
Corrects the input/output differences occurring in the boards circuitry when receiving input from calibration sensors.
Cal1: 500 mV
Cal2: 4000 mV
Cal. Sensor Gain
ENT
OK
Calibration sensor
Displays the Gain value attached to the

calibration sensor board.
3972
Driver Board 1
CLR
Im1[mA] Im2[mA]
ch.26
ch.19
ch.12
ch. 5
ch. 6
ch.13
ch.20
ch.27
235
267
265
242
251
261
242
251
ESC
3973
949
966
993
969
982
994
966
970
Driver Board 2
248
264
235
246
258
251
238
256
ESC
3974
969
986
955
970
972
971
971
973
.
ENT
OK
Driver Board 3
243
239
251
263
237
262
254
272
ESC
3975
960
957
974
988
958
979
977
1001
CLR
7
.
ENT
OK
Driver Board 4
CLR
Im1[mA] Im2[mA]
ch.24
ch.17
ch.10
ch. 3
ch. 4
ch.11
ch.18
ch.25
ESC
254
249
243
254
258
257
249
258
968
971
966
967
978
958
975
968
SAVE
in the driver boards circuitry when outputting

current to run the LD.
CLR
Im1[mA] Im2[mA]
ch. 8
ch. 1
ch.30
ch.23
ch.16
ch. 9
ch. 2
ch.31
Im1, Im2
Corrects the input/output differences occurring
ENT
OK
Im1[mA] Im2[mA]
ch.28
ch.21
ch.14
ch. 7
ch. 0
ch.15
ch.22
ch.29
Parameters of driver board for recording head
.
ENT
D-67
D.Operation panel
3999
Press
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
D-68
NO
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting
data.
then
OK
NO
and
OK
D.Operation panel
9) Auto Calibration setting screen
3896
Auto calibration
Laser running time
Allows you to set the time for auto calibration and the
Writing time clear
temperature at which an error warning will occur.

OK
Pressing

Auto calibration
Auto calibration
Set temp. warning

ESC
OK
NEXT
key brings up the setting screen for

auto calibration time and the error warning levels.
ESC
Returns you to the upper level Menu screen.

3980
CLR
Auto calibration
2405
Meas. thd(%)
Cal. period (Hour)
10
Iopd-Iop
50
Cal. low temp
16
ESC
OK
ENT
Meas. thd (%) (Allowable range: 0 to 9999)

Default setting value is 2405.
Former two digits
Sets the number of plates to process before
the light intensity is measured.
Default setting value is 24 plates.
Latter two digits
Sets the allowable range in % for the measured value of light intensity. If the measured value falls out of this range, a calibration is performed.
Default setting value is 5%.
Cal. period (Hour) (Allowable range: -60 to 999)
Once the exposure is performed for the period
specified in this parameter, a calibration is automatically performed. A negative value indicates
minutes while a positive value indicates hours.
When 0 is set here, calibration is not performed. When -1, -2, or -3 is set here,
calibration is executed before each time an exposure is performed. Default setting value is 10
hours.
Iopd - Iop (Allowable range: 0 to 100)
A warning message appears on screen when the
value obtained by calculating the following formula is smaller than the value that was specified in this parameter when performing the
calibration.
Iopd - Iop
Default setting value is 50 mA.
D-69
D.Operation panel
Cal. low temp (Allowable range: 0 to 300)
The calibration is prohibited when the temperature for an LD block is lower than the temperature specified in this parameter.
Default setting value is 16 C.
3971
Press
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
D-70
NO
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting
data.
then
OK
NO
and
OK
D.Operation panel
Auto calibration
The following describes the detailed operations of the items that are
shown in the tables.
Light intensity measurement:
Measures light intensity of all channels. If the measured value deviates
from the target light intensity, it performs a calibration of the channel.
Laser calibration:
Changes the electric current supplied to channels to match the light intensity of the channels with the target light intensity.
Panel message displayed
Calibration condi- Channel to be
when performing calibration
calibrated
tions
xx plates ago.
After PT-R8600 Light intensity When light inten- All channels Since the light intensity of lapower is turned ON measurement sity for any channel
ser diodes is detected as havfalls out of range of
ing deviated more than the
and before the first
the target value
permitted range from the
plate exposure
5%
specified value, the equipment executes the calibration.
After exposure of Light intensity When light inten- All channels xx plates ago.
24th plate and be- measurement sity for any channel
Since the light intensity of lafalls out of range of
ser diodes is detected as havfore exposure of the
the target value
ing deviated more than the
next plate
5%
permitted range from the
specified value, the equipment executes the calibration.
After 10 hours of Laser calibraAll channels No message displayed
exposure time has tion
elapsed and before
exposure of the
next plate
All channels No message displayed
When the resolution Laser calibrahas been changed tion
(when calibration
has been performed
with another resolution before the

present resolution
was changed)
Operations
D-71
D.Operation panel
10) Temperature Warning and Error Level Setting screen
3896
Laser running time
Set temp. warning
Allows setting of the temperature warnings and error
Writing time clear
levels.
Pressing the

Auto calibration
OK

you can set the temperature warnings and error levels.
Set temp. warning
Set temp. warning

ESC
OK
NEXT
ESC

4140
CLR
Set temp. 2
(35)
(28)
(22)
(16)
(17)
--Grip
After-Grip
35
28
22
16
17
28
150
128
ESC
.
ENT
OK
This section varies depending on

the PT-R4000II and the PT-R4300.
Do not change the parameters of (##) displayed

in this screen. These parameters are used when
switching error displays that are related to temperatures.
(35) : Temperature around recording head
(28) : Temperature in the PT-R unit
(22) : LD base temperature
(18) : Temperature in the PT-R unit
(16) : LD base temperature
Password/--- :
PT-R4000 (II)
Password : Input the password when the 12
mm clamps are supported.
PT-R4300
Password : Not used
Grip: (Allowable range: 110 to 999)
After-Grip : (Allowable range: 110 to 999)
Adjusts the unexposed area of leading grip
margin (Grip) and trailing grip margin (AfterGrip).
When input value is 120 to 999
Sets the unexposed area. Input an appropriate
size, 1 enlarges the area by 0.1 mm.
4145
For the PT-R4000 and PT-R4000II (up to Ver.
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
D-72
NO
OK
4.00), the lower limit value of the input range is 140.

Press
data.
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting

then OK .
NO
and
D.Operation panel
3-8-9. Drum Parameters Input screen
3706
Drum parameter
Punch adjust
Set punch data
Allows setting of the parameters for the drum motor

driver.
RH parameter
Pressing the
Drum parameter
Drum parameter
ESC
4005
OK
Parameter set
Status read
Initialize
Adjust Offset
Adjust Gain
ESC
OK
NEXT

key brings up the menu screen for
OK
the drum parameter.
Parameter set
Allows the checking of the servo pack parameter value. (for PT-R4300 only)
(Refer to D-74)
Status read
Displays the status of the servo pack.

(Refer to D-75)
Initialize
Sends the default parameters of the servo pack

to the servo pack.
(Refer to D-77)
Adjust Offset
Adjusts the Offset value for the servo pack.

(Refer to D-78)
Adjust Gain
Adjusts the Gain value for the servo pack.

(Refer to D-79)
D-73
D.Operation panel
1) Servo Pack Parameter Check screen
For PT-R4000 (II)
4005
Parameter set
Parameter set
Status read
Not used.
Allows checking of the servo pack parameter value.
OK
Pressing the
Initialize
Adjust Offset
Parameter set
key brings up the servo pack parameter check screen.
Adjust Gain
ESC
OK
ESC

The screen shown on the left is displayed.
However, you are not allowed to change the pa-
4010
CLR
rameter setting.
CN-
ESC
ENT
OK
For PT-R4300
4010
Positioning Pn100
15
Pn101
25
Pn103 3000
Pn100
300
CLR
7
The screen shown on the left includes the parameters

relevant to the operation of the primary-scanning motor.
Pn101 4000
Pn103
100
0
0
ESC
ENT
OK
Do not change these parameter values as they

are fixed.
4015
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
D-74
NO
OK
D.Operation panel
2) Servo Pack Status screen
4005
Status read
Parameter set
Allows displaying of the status of the servo pack.
Status read
Pressing the
Initialize
Status read
Adjust Offset
screen.
Adjust Gain
ESC

key brings up the servo pack status
OK
ESC
OK

4020
Sarvo pack status

0804
0808
080A
080C
0820
0822
0840
0842
0099 0844
0014 0846
00C1 0848
BC6B 084A
0000 084C
0000 084E
0099 0850
0080 0852
0099
0099
0099
0099
0099
0099
0099
0099
850A
8500 to 8509
: Current status
: History of the primary-
scanning servo pack status

Other than above : Unique parameter values
for the servo pack
ESC
Indication
02
03
04
05
10
30
32
40
41
51
71
72
73
74
7A
81
82
83
84
85
Name
Parameter corruption
Main circuits detection
section error
Parameter setting error
Compatibility error
Overcurrent or heat sink
overheat
Description
There is an error in the EEPROM data for the
servo pack.
There is an error in the detection data of the
power circuit.
The value set by the user is out of the allowable range.
The capacity of the motor is incompatible with
that of the servo pack.
Overcurrent was detected or the heat sink of
the servo pack was overheated.
The regenerative resistance was disconnected

or the regenerative transistor was damaged.
The regenerative energy exceeds the capacity
Regenerative overload
of the regenerative resistance.
The DC voltage of the main circuit is abnorOvervoltage
mally high.
The DC voltage of the main circuit has been
Undervoltage
lowered.
The number or rotation of the motor is abnorOverspeed
mally high.
The operation was carried out for some secOverload (instantaneous
onds at a torque that exceeded the rated value
maximum load)
significantly.
Overload (continuous max- The operation was carried out continuously at
a torque that exceeded the rated value signifiimum load)
cantly.
The rotational energy of the dynamic brake
Overload of DB
operation exceeded the capacity of the
dynamic brake resistance value.
The power supply to the main circuit was
Overload of incoming
turned ON/OFF frequently.
resistance
The heat sink of the servo pack was
Heat sink overheat
overheated.
The encoder power supplies were deactivated
Encoder backup alarm
entirely and the position data was cleared.
Encoder sum check alarm There is an error in the result of the encoder
memory sum check.
The voltage for the backup battery of the
Encoder battery alarm
absolute value encoder has been lowered.
There is an error in the encoder internal data.
Encoder data alarm
Regenerative error
Encoder overspeed
The encoder rotated at a high speed when the

power was turned ON.
Remedy
Replace the servo pack.
Initialize or replace the servo pack.
Replace the servo pack, the regenerative resistance, and/or the motor.
Check the wiring connection, check the peripheral temperature, replace the servo pack, and/or
replace the motor.
Replace the servo pack and/or regenerative resistance.
Initialize the servo pack or replace the regenerative resistance.
Check the input voltage and/or replace the servo pack.
Check the input voltage and/or replace the servo pack.
Check the wiring connection, initialize the servo pack, and/or replace the servo pack.
Check the wiring connection, replace the motor, and/or replace the servo pack.
Same as above
Check the peripheral temperature and/or
replace the servo pack.
Initialize the servo pack, replace the motor,
and/or replace the servo pack.
Initialize the servo pack, replace the motor,
Initialize the servo pack and/or replace the
motor.
Check the wiring connection and/or replace the
servo motor.
Check whether the recording drum is rotating
D-75
D.Operation panel
Indication
86
b1
b2
bF
C1
C8
C9
CA
Cb
CC
d0
F1
D-76
Name
Encoder overheat
Speed command A/D
converter error
Torque command A/D
converter error
System alarm
Detection of runaway
protection
Encoder clear error/multiturn limit setting error
Encoder communication
error
Encoder parameter error
Encoder echo back error
Disagreement of the multiturn limit value
Excessive positional
deviation
Open-phase of the power
supply line
Description
The motor temperature in the encoder is too
high. (This is detected only when the absolute
value encoder is used.)
There is an error in the A/D converter for
inputting the speed command.
There is an error in the A/D converter for
inputting the torque command.
A servo pack system error occurred.
The servo motor ran away.
The number of rotations for the multi-turn
setting of the absolute value encoder could not
be cleared or set correctly.
The communication between the encoder and
the servo pack cannot be established.
An encoder parameter has been corrupted.
The communication with the encoder is
inaccurate.
The multi-turn limit values of the encoder and
the servo pack disagree.
The positional deviation pulse exceeded the
user set value.
One of the three phases for the power supply
of the main circuit is disconnected.
Remedy
Check the peripheral temperature, replace the
servo pack, and/or replace the servo motor.
Check the wiring connection, replace the servo
pack, and/or replace the motor.
Replace the motor and/or replace the servo
pack.
Check the wiring connection, replace the
motor, and/or replace the servo pack.
Replace the servo pack and/or replace the
motor.
Check the wiring connection, replace the
motor, and/or replace the servo pack.
Initialize the servo pack.
Check the wiring connection, initialize the
servo pack, and/or replace the servo pack.
Check the wiring connection and/or replace the
servo pack.
D.Operation panel
3) Servo Pack Initialization screen
4005
Parameter set
Status read
Allows sending of the default parameters of the servo
Initialize
pack to the servo pack.

OK
Pressing the
Adjust Offset
Adjust Gain
ESC
Initialize
OK
key sends the default parameters of

the servo pack to the servo pack.
Initialize
ESC
4030
Send initial parameter
Data send OK ?
ESC
OK
D-77
D.Operation panel
4) Servo Pack Offset Adjustment screen
4005
Parameter set
Status read
Initialize
Adjust Offset
Adjust Gain
ESC
OK
Adjust Offset
Allows adjusting of the Offset value for the servo

pack.
Pressing the
OK
Adjust Offset
key brings up the servo pack Offset

value adjustment screen.
Make sure to perform this procedure when replacing the motor, servo pack, and PIO.
ESC

It takes approximately 20 seconds until the
2262
screen shown on the left is displayed.

After the adjustment has been completed, the
Processing Now.
Please wait !
D-78
Menu screen is displayed.
D.Operation panel
5) Servo Pack Gain Adjustment screen
4005
Parameter set
Status read
Initialize
Adjust Offset
Adjust Gain
ESC
Adjust Gain
Allows adjusting of the Gain value for the servo pack.

Pressing the
Adjust Gain

key brings up the servo pack Gain
OK
value adjustment screen.
OK
Be sure to check the Gain value whenever you

replace the motor, the servo pack, or the PIO
board.
When performing the above procedure, be careful as the recording drum will rotate.
ESC

It will take about 20 seconds before the screen on
4050
Adjust Gain
Offset : A5 +
the left appears.

Use the POI board trimmer to adjust the value
to A0 8.
The adjustment value is common to the PT-
ESC
R4000 and the PT-R4300.
D-79
D.Operation panel
3-8-10.Miscellaneous Data Setting screen
3707
Set misc. data
Set misc. data
Displays miscellaneous machine information including the manufacturing number of the machine.
Set resolution
Set weight
Pressing the
Set cassette data
Set misc. data
ESC
OK
NEXT

key brings up the data input screen
OK
for miscellaneous machine information including the

manufacturing number of the machine.
ESC

4100
CLR
Mfg.no(high):
Mfg.no(low):
600
Mfg.year:
Mfg.month:
Machine type 2:
Machine type :
ESC
.
ENT
SAVE
Machine Type 2:
Default setting value: 0
0
Normal operation with the main unit firmware
as mentioned below.
4
Disconnection of image signal cables (X103 X810) between the RB31 board and the recording head is checked (refer to 3-7-9 Laser
Power Measurement and Cable Disconnection
Check screens) only with the following firmware versions.
Machine Type:
The serial numbers (s/n) mentioned below are
common to the PT-R4000 (II) and the PTR4300.
0
When the black tape for the displacement sensor is not affixed to the drum. (s/n: up to 100)
2
When the black tape for the displacement sensor is affixed to the drum. (s/n: 101 onward)
4105
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
D-80
NO
Press
data.
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting

then OK .
NO
and
OK
D.Operation panel
3-8-11.Recording Head Data Control screen
Set resolution
3707
Set misc. data
Allows controlling of the data for each resolution used

by the recording head.
Set resolution
Set weight
Pressing the
Set cassette data
Set resolution

key brings up the recording head
OK
data control screen.

ESC
OK
NEXT
Do not change any of the data.

4120
CLR
Set density
dpi
ZP
2
1
2
3
2
4
1200
2000
2400
4000
2438
2540
ESC
ENT
SAVE
4125
Press
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
ESC
NO
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting
data.
then
OK
NO
and
OK
D-81
D.Operation panel
3-8-12.Clamp Weight Setting screen
Set weight
3707
Set misc. data
Allows inputting of the weights of the trailing edge

clamps and the balancers.
Set resolution
Set weight
Pressing the
Set cassette data
Set weight
ESC
OK
NEXT

OK
you can input the weights of the trailing edge clamps

and the balancers.
ESC

4130
CLR
Clamper:
381.89[g]
Balancer:
165.00[g]
ESC
Balancer [g] (Allowable range: 0.00 to 999.99)

Input the average weight of four balancers.
Press
data.
Save Data ?
YES
D-82
Input the total weight of four trailing edge

clamps.
ENT
SAVE
4135
ESC
Clamper [g] (Allowable range: 0.00 to 999.99)
NO
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting

then OK .
NO
and
OK
D.Operation panel
3-8-13.Cassette Data Setting screen
Set cassette data
3707
Set misc. data
Allows the setting of the plate size to be used for each

cassette zone.
Set resolution
Set weight
Pressing the
Set cassette data
Set cassette data

OK
you can set the plate size for each cassette zone.
ESC
OK
NEXT
ESC

4140
CLR
Set cassette data [mm]

Paper pad suk
Paper pad nip
Y size base A
Y size base B
Y size base C
Zone-2 min. size
Zone-3 min. size
Zone-4 min. size
ESC
10
190
0
9808
478
460
610
730
NEXT
.
ENT
Paper pad suck [0.1 mm] (Allowable range: -20 to 20)

The interleaf pad position for securing interleaves is corrected. The reference point is
where the metal sensor of the interleaf pad
turns ON.
Paper pad nip [0.1 mm]:
Positional relationship between the interleaf
pad and the nip roller while an interleaf is discharged is corrected. Set the distance from the
interleaf pad origin.
Y size base A, B, C:
The plate size in the Y (primary scanning) direction is checked while the plate is transferred
from the SA-L/MA-L in reference to the value
specified for this parameter.
The values of these parameters must be set

again in case of the following conditions.
The nip roller used at the bridge section of the
SA-L/MA-L has been replaced.
The distance between sensor 1 and sensor 2 of
the SA-L/MA-L has been changed.
The sensor 1 amplifier trimmer of the SA-L/MAL has been turned.
Zone 2 min. size:
Minimum size for zone area 2
Zone 3 min. size:
Zone 4 min. size:
D-83
D.Operation panel
4141
CLR
Set cassette data [mm]

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
motion Para1
----------------------
ESC
SAVE
.
ENT
The screen shown on the left is displayed when the

firmware of the main unit is as below.
motion para 1 (Allowable range: 0 to 9999)
Sets an operation when returning the plate pad.
Each digit of the parameter value has meaning.
1 0 3 9
ABCD
A [10%] (Allowable range: 0 to 9)
Increases the amount by percentage of the first
raising of the plate pad that has picked up a
plate. During the operation, the plate pad is first
raised and lowered slightly. The first raising
however, refers to the operation that follows
this movement.
The plate pad is raised by 50 mm.
Example:
When 1 is set, the plate pad unit is raised
10% more than the default (50 mm).
B [10%] (Allowable range: 0 to 9)
Increases by percentage the distance that the
plate pad is lowered from the A position in order to shuffle the plate.
Default distance
When the plate size in the X direction is
less than 600 mm or the plate thickness is
0.15 mm: 10 mm
Other cases than above: 25 mm
The distance that the plate is to be moved
varies with the plate size and thickness.
Once this value is changed, a variety of
checks are required.
We recommend that you use the default
value.
Example (plate thickness: 0.15 mm):
When 1 is set, the plate pad unit is lowered 10% more than the default (10 mm).
D-84
D.Operation panel
C [sec.] (Allowable range: 0 to 9)
Waiting time at the A position until the B operation starts.
This sets the waiting time of the plate pad at its
first raised position.
Example:
When 3 is set, the plate pad pauses for 3
seconds.
D [sec.] (Allowable range: 0 to 9)
Additional increment to the waiting time between when the shuffling operation has been
performed four times consecutively and when
the plate is raised again.
This sets the waiting time of the plate pad at the
A position after the plate has been shuffled between A and B four times.
The plate pad waits for 4 seconds.
Example:
When 9 is set, 9 seconds are added to the
default of 4 seconds.
As of April 2002, we recommend that you should
set motion para 1 to 1039 when handling the
interleaves for the new type of LT-2/3 plate
made by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation.
4145
Press
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
NO
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting
data.
then
OK
NO
and
OK
D-85
D.Operation panel
3-8-14.Password Setting screen
3707
Set misc. data
Allows setting of the password for various special

functions.
Set resolution
Set weight
Pressing the
Set cassette data
ESC
OK
NEXT

OK
you can set the passwords to support various special

functions.
ESC

Password 1 : Not used.
3850
CLR
Password for s
Password
Password
Password
Password
Password
Password
Password
Password
ESC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ENT
SAVE

Press
3855
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
D-86
NO
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting
data.
then
OK
NO
and
OK
D.Operation panel
3-9.Machine Option Selecting screen
3051
Input parameter
Allows setting of the options for the PT-R.

OK
Pressing the

I/O Read/Write

you can set options for the PT-R.
Initialize data
Special action
ESC
OK
NEXT
ESC

4203
Network
OFF
LD/Stocker
OFF
CASSETTE
OFF
Valid LD channel
32ch
ESC
Network
Turned ON when remote maintenance is used.
LD/Stocker
LD
: It is possible to discharge plates to

the processor (rear discharge). The
Error and Busy signals are used for
communication.
Be sure to select LD when the
SAVE
Stocker
AT-T is connected.
: Although it is possible to discharge
plates to the processor (rear discharge), the Error and Busy signals
OFF
are ignored.
: Plates are discharged within the
machine. The rear discharge is not
available.
CASSETTE
OFF
: Select when the PT-R is used alone.
Single
Multi
: Select when the SA-L is connected.

: Select when the MA-L (three cassettes) is connected.
Valid LD channel
4205
Save Data ?
YES
NO
32ch
0-15
: All channels are used for exposure.

: Half of the LD channels (channels 0
16-31
to 15) are used for exposure.

: Half of the LD channels (channels
16 to 31) are used for exposure.
ESC
OK
D-87
D.Operation panel
3-10.I/O Reading and Writing screen
3051
Input parameter
I/O Read/Write
Allows reading or writing of the I/O port number.

OK
Pressing the

I/O Read/Write
I/O Read/Write
Initialize data
screen.
Special action
ESC
OK
key brings up the port number input
NEXT
ESC

Input the port number to read and write the pa-
4300
I / O Port
READ
ESC
D-88
rameters of the PT-R.
WRITE
OK
D.Operation panel
3-11.Initialization screens
3051
Input parameter
Initialize data
Allows initializing of various data.

OK
Pressing the

I/O Read/Write
Initialize data
Initialize data
data initialization.
Special action
ESC
4400
OK
NEXT
Initialize all data
Initialize all data
Select brand
Initialize user data
Initializes all data.

(Refer to D-90)
Consumable Timer
Select brand
Initialize preset media

ESC
key brings up the menu screens for
OK
NEXT
Allows selection of the brand name.

(Refer to D-91)
Only initializes the user data.

(Refer to D-90)
Consumable Timer
Initializes the Consumables Timer.

(Refer to D-92)
Initializes the preset plate data.

(Refer to D-90)
D-89
D.Operation panel
3-11-1.Data initialization
4400
Initialize all data
Initialize data
Allows initializing of all data.
Select brand
Consumable Timer
Allows initializing of only the user data.

ESC
OK
NEXT
Initialize data ?
Yes
D-90
Allows initializing of the preset plate data.
When initialization is performed using any of the
4402
ESC
above keys, all selected data will be cleared.
No
OK
D.Operation panel
3-11-2.Brand Name Selection screen
4400
Select brand
Initialize all data

Select brand
Allows selecting of the brand name.

OK
Pressing the
Select brand
Consumable Timer
lection screen.

ESC
OK
key brings up the brand name se-
NEXT
ESC

4401
Press the
SCREEN
FUJIFILM
SAVE
key after selecting the brand
name.
HEIDELBERG
HEIDELBERG(52)
ESC
SAVE
4402
Initialize data ?
Yes
ESC
No
Press
data.
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting

then OK .
NO
and
OK
D-91
D.Operation panel
3-11-3.Consumable Timer screen
4400
Consumable Timer
Initialize all data
Allows initializing of the Consumable Timer.

P r e s s i n g t h e OK
Select brand
Consumable Timer
key brings up the Consumable

Timer initialization screens.
Consumable Timer
ESC
OK
NEXT
ESC

Running time :
2240
Running time
Displays the total time the PT-R power is ON.

Actual running time :
78 h
Actual running time
21 h
Exposure time
Displays the cumulative amount of time that

the PT-R4300 has actually run.
10 h
Plate winding cycles
215
ESC
SAVE
NEXT
Exposure time :
Displays the cumulative amount of time that
the exposure has been carried out.
Plate winding cycles :
Displays the number of plate loading cycles.
Exterior cover filter :
2241
Exterior cover filter

(Max:1000h)
78 h
Clamp cycles
786
Plate winding cycles/ye
786
ESC
SAVE
RESET
RESET
RESET
NEXT
Initializes the cumulative amount of time that

the exterior cover filter has been used.
Clamp cycles :
Initializes the number of cycles that the trailing
edge clamps are detached from and attached to
the clamp arm.
Plate winding cycles/ye :
Initializes the number of plate loading cycles in
the past year.
Punch cycles No.1-8 :
2242
D-92
Punch cycles
(Max:10000)
Punch cycles
(Max:10000)
Punch cycles
(Max:10000)
Punch cycles
(Max:10000)
No.1
ESC
SAVE
78
No.2
78
No.3
RESET
RESET
78
RESET
78
RESET
Initializes the number of times that the punch

operates for each punch.
No.4
NEXT
D.Operation panel
Press
2245
Save Data ?
YES
ESC
NO
YES
and then
OK
to save the setting
data.
then
OK
NO
and
OK
D-93
D.Operation panel
3-12.Special Action screen
3051
Special action
Input parameter
Allows executing of some special operations such as

trailing edge clamp attachment and status initializa-

I/O Read/Write
tion.
Pressing the
Initialize data
Special action
Special action
ESC
OK
NEXT
OK
key brings up the special action
screens.
4450
Initialize
Initialize
Initializes the PT-R. (Refer to D-95)

Pick up clamp
Initializes the status of the PT-R. (Refer to D-95)
Check ORG-EZ
Pick up clamp
Put clamp on drum
ESC
OK
NEXT
Picks up the trailing edge clamps. (Refer to D-96)

Check ORG-EZ
NEXT
NEXT
Not used. (Refer to D-97)

Put clamp on drum
Attaches the trailing edge clamps to the drum.

(Refer to D-96)
4451
Front sensor offset
Front sensor offset
Adjusts the positioning offsets at the Home and

Away sides for the plate leading edge detection
Centering test
ESC
NVRAM backup
sensors automatically. (Refer to D-98)
NVRAM restore
Centering test
OK
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
Allows you to perform the centering operation.

(Refer to D-99)
Adjusts the positioning install the displacement

sensor. (Refer to D-100)
4452
Register test
NVRAM backup
Backs up the NVRAM data in the flash

memory. (Refer to D-101)
NVRAM restore
ESC
OK
NEXT
Restores the NVRAM data from the flash

memory. (Refer to D-102)
Register test
Adjusts the positioning offsets at the Home and

Away sides for the plate leading edge detection
sensors automatically. (Refer to D-103)
D-94
D.Operation panel
3-12-1.Machine Initialization screen
4450
Initialize
Initialize
Pick up clamp
Allows initializing of the PT-R.

Allows initializing of the status of the PT-R.
Check ORG-EZ
Put clamp on drum
ESC
NEXT
OK
4451
OK
Executes the initialization of the PT-R and of
Start OK ?
its status. Once the initialization has been completed, the upper layer Menu screen will appear.
ESC
OK
CANCEL
D-95
D.Operation panel
3-12-2.Pickup Clamp, Trailing Edge Clamp Attachment screen
Pick up clamp
4450
Initialize
Put clamp on drum
Pick up clamp
Allows attaching of the trailing edge clamps onto the

drum.
Check ORG-EZ
Put clamp on drum
ESC
OK
Allows picking up of the trailing edge clamps.
NEXT
This command should be used when the trailing edge

clamps need to be taken out from the clamp arm for
cleaning.
4451
OK
Executes the pickup of the trailing edge clamps
Start OK ?
ESC
D-96
OK
or the Put clamp on drum operation. Once the

initialization has been completed, the upper
CANCEL
layer Menu screen will appear.

When a plate is discharged, secure the drum at
the position where the leading edge clamps open
and then execute Put clamp on drum.
D.Operation panel
3-12-3.ORG-EZ Check screen
4450
Check ORG-EZ
Initialize
Not used.
Pick up clamp
Check ORG-EZ
Put clamp on drum
ESC
NEXT
OK
4451
Start OK ?
ESC
OK
CANCEL
D-97
D.Operation panel
3-12-4.Front Sensor Offset screen
4451
Front sensor offset
Front sensor offset
Adjusts the positioning offsets at Home and Away

sides for the plate leading edge detection sensors au-
Centering test
tomatically.
For the adjustment method, refer to page B-60.
NVRAM backup
NVRAM restore
ESC
OK
NEXT
Pressing the
Front sensor offset
Press the OK key after selecting the plate type and

the screen for execution confirmation appears.
1050
Plate 1
Plate 2
Plate 3
Plate 4
Plate 5
ESC
OK
NEXT
4451
OK
Executes the automatic adjustment of the posi-
Start OK ?
ESC

key brings up the plate type screen.
OK
OK
tioning offsets at Home and Away sides for the

plate leading edge detection sensors.
CANCEL
The screen during the operation is as shown on

the left.
4452
Processing Now.
Please wait !
Once the adjustment has been completed, the

Menu screen will appear.
The offset value is input in Front offset that is
included in the Set media type screen.
D-98
D.Operation panel
3-12-5.Centering Test screen
4451
Centering test
Front sensor offset
Allows you to perform the centering operation.

OK
Pressing the
Centering test
Centering test
NVRAM backup
NVRAM restore
ESC
NEXT
OK

1050
Plate 1
Plate 2
Plate 3
Plate 4
Plate 5
ESC
OK
NEXT
4451
OK
Pressing the OK key after setting the plate

executes the centering operation.
Start OK ?
ESC
OK
CANCEL

the left.
4452
Processing Now.
Please wait !
Once the operation has been completed, the

screen shown on the left will appear and the op-
4050
Centering test
eration will be on standby.

Waiting
ESC
Completes the centering operation and disESC
charges the plate.
D-99
D.Operation panel
3-12-6.Adjust Displacement Sensor screen
4451
Front sensor offset

Centering test
Pressing the
NVRAM backup
NVRAM restore
ESC
OK
It is used when adjusting the position to install the displacement sensor.
NEXT
4451

key plate type and the screen for
OK
execution confirmation appears.
OK
Displays the screen for adjusting the position to
Start OK ?
ESC
OK
install the displacement sensor

Secure the sensor to the position at the point
that the buzzer sounds.
Allowable adjustment range when the black
CANCEL
tape for the displacement sensor is not affixed

to the drum (s/n: up to 100):
D7 5
Allowable adjustment range when the black
tape for the displacement sensor is affixed to
the drum. (s/n: 101 onward)
A0 5
The above-mentioned serial numbers (s/n) are s/

n of PT-R4000 (II).
ESC
4050
Float sensor offset
D4
ESC
D-100
D.Operation panel
3-12-7.NVRAM Backup screen
NVRAM backup
4451
Front sensor offset

Centering test
Pressing the
NVRAM backup
NVRAM backup
NVRAM restore
ESC
Allows storing of the NVRAM data in the flash

memory.
NEXT
OK
4451

key brings up the screen by which
OK
you can store the NVRAM data in the flash memory.
OK
Do you backup the data on NVRAM
in Flash-Memory ?
Executes NVRAM data storing in the flash

memory.
Always carry out this operation whenever you
replace the RCP board.
ESC
OK
CANCEL
This enables you to restore the NVRAM data.

Before performing this operation, be sure to
turn ON the DipSW bit 2 on the RCP board.
Also be sure to return the setting to the original
state after the operation has been completed.
the left.
4452
Processing Now.
Please wait !
D-101
D.Operation panel
3-12-8.NVRAM Data Restore screen
NVRAM restore
4451
Front sensor offset

Centering test
Allows restoring of data from the flash memory to the

NVRAM.
Pressing the
NVRAM backup
NVRAM restore
NVRAM restore

key brings up the NVRAM data reOK
store screen.
ESC
OK
NEXT
4451
OK
Do you overwrite the deta on NVRAM
with the data backup in Flash
-Memory ?
ESC
Executes NVRAM data restoring to the

NVRAM from the flash memory.
Always carry out this operation whenever you
OK
CANCEL
replace the RCP board.

This enables you to restore the NVRAM data.
Before performing this operation, be sure to
turn ON the DipSW bit 2 on the RCP board.
Also be sure to return the setting to the original
state after the operation has been completed.
Once data restoring has been complated, the
screen returns to the Menu screen.
D-102
D.Operation panel
3-12-9.Register Test screen
4452
Register test
Register test
Allows you to perform the centering and punching

operations of the plate as well as to check the registration.
Pressing the
Register test
ESC
NEXT
OK
1050
Plate 1
Plate 2
Plate 3
Plate 4
Plate 5
ESC
Place the plate that you wish to check the registration

onto the insertion table.
OK
NEXT
4451
OK
Loads the plate and performs centering and

punching operations.
Start OK ?
ESC
OK
OK
CANCEL

the left.
4452
Processing Now.
Please wait !
Once the operation has been completed, the

plate will be returned to the insertion table.
D-103
D.Operation panel
3-13.Special Action 2 screens
3052
Special action 2
Special action 2
Allows displaying of the maintenance jig command

screens.
Pressing the
Special action 2
ESC
4460
OK
NEXT
Initialize
Performs step-by-step initialization.

(Refer to D-105)
Mail test
Balancer test
Auto loader test
Tests the balancer operations.
Plate pad test

OK
command screens.
Initialize
Balancer test
ESC

key brings up the maintenance jig
OK
NEXT
(Refer to D-106)
Mail test
NEXT
NEXT
Tests the mail function of the remote maintenance.

(Refer to D-107)
Auto loader test
Tests the auto loader operations.

(Refer to D-108)
Plate pad test
Tests the plate pad unit operations.

(Refer to D-110)
4461
Paper pad test
Paper pad test
Tests the interleaf pad unit operations.
Multi auto loader test
(Refer to D-111)

ESC
D-104
OK
NEXT
Tests the multi auto loader operations.

(Refer to D-112)
D.Operation panel
3-13-1.Machine Initialization screen
4460
Initialize
Initialize
Allows executing of step-by-step initialization.

OK
Pressing the
Balancer test
Mail test
Initialize
Auto loader test
ization screen.
Plate pad test

ESC
key brings up the machine initial-
OK
NEXT
ESC

4461
Initialize
1:--2:Head,
3:2nd motor
4:Trans error check
5:Actuator
6:Main motor
7:Punch
8:Path up
9:Init. status
ESC
CLR
OK
1:--Not used.
2:Head
Initializes the recording head.
3:2nd motor
Initializes the sub shaft motor and returns it to
the origin.
ENT
4:Trans error check

Checks the transportation system errors.
5:Actuator
Initializes the transportation system actuators.
6:Main motor
Initializes the drum and then searches the balancers.
7:Punch
Initializes the punch system.
8:Path up
Raises the transportation section.
9:Init. status
Initializes the data that controls the sequence.
4464
OK
Starts the selected initialization.
Start OK ?
ESC
OK
Once the initialization has been completed, the

upper layer Menu screen will appear.
CANCEL
D-105
D.Operation panel
3-13-2.Balancer Testing screen
4460
Balancer test
Initialize
Allows testing of the balancer operations.

OK
Pressing the
Balancer test
Mail test
Balancer test

you can test the balancer operations.
Auto loader test

Plate pad test
ESC
OK
ESC
NEXT

4462
CLR
Balancer test
Printing No. :
Note :
No.0 is searching
ESC
OK
ENT
: Searches the balancers and displays their
positions.
1 to 15 : Moves the balancers to the appropriate positions depending on the plate size used in
the specified printer setting.
-1 to -15 : Displays the positions of balancers depending on the plate size used in the specified
printer setting.
4464
OK
Starts Starts the selected initialization.
Start OK ?
ESC
D-106
OK

screen for balancer operations will appear.
CANCEL
D.Operation panel
3-13-3.Mail Testing screen
4460
Mail test
Initialize
Allows testing of the mail function of the remote

maintenance.
Balancer test
Mail test
Pressing the
Auto loader test
Mail test
Plate pad test

ESC
OK
NEXT

key brings up the mail testing
OK
screen.
ESC

4469
CLR
Mail test
1
1-:Error
11-:Warning
21-:Request
31-:User Info
51-54:Relating light
55:Dummy communi.
ESC
OK
: Sends an error mail.

: Sends a warning mail.
21
31
: Sends a work request mail.

: Sends a user information mail.
51 to 54: Performs the pilot lamp test.

55
: Spare
ENT
4464
OK
Start OK ?
ESC
1
11
OK

mail testing screen will appear.
CANCEL
D-107
D.Operation panel
3-13-4.Auto Loader Testing screen
4460
Auto loader test
Initialize
Allows testing of the auto loader operations.

OK
Pressing the
Balancer test
Mail test
Auto loader test

you can carry out various auto loader tests.
Auto loader test

Plate pad test
ESC
OK
NEXT
ESC

4463
1:Initialize
2:Disch. paper
3:Trans plate(1/2)
4:Cont. loader seq
5:Cont. all seq
6:Trans plate(2/2)
7:Cont. Multi seq
ESC
CLR
Auto loader test
OK
ENT
1:Initialize
Executes the initialization sequence.
2:Disch. paper
Executes the interleaf discharge sequence.
3:Trans plate (1/2)
Transports a plate to the AT section.
4:Cont. loader seq
Executes the continuous operation of the SA-L
by itself.
(For individual unit adjustment)
The system assumes that one sequence has
been completed when the AT pass sensor turns
OFF and then ON again. It then starts the next
sequence.
5:Cont. all seq
Sequentially executes SA-L (MA-L) operation,
PT-Rs plate winding and discharge operations.
Before using this function in the MA-L, the desired cassette must be transported to the loader
section beforehand using 11-13: Load cassette
of Multi auto loader.
6:Trans plate (2/2)
Transports the plate at the AT section to the
transportation table of the PT-R.
7:Cont. Multi seq
Please do not use this command since it is only

used for debugging at the factory.
D-108
D.Operation panel
4464
OK
Start OK ?
ESC
OK

screen for balancer operations will appear.
CANCEL
D-109
D.Operation panel
3-13-5.Plate Pad Unit Testing screen
4460
Plate pad test
Initialize
Allows testing of the plate pad unit operations.

OK
Pressing the
Balancer test
Mail test
Plate pad test

you can carry out various plate pad unit tests.
Auto loader test

Plate pad test
ESC
OK
NEXT
ESC

4466
1:Init, 3:Separation
2:Down until H1 on
4:Move to waiting pos
5/6:Vacume On/Off
7:Zone 1 8:Zone 2
9:Zone 3 10:Zone4
10:Close
ESC
CLR
Plate pad test
OK
ENT
1:Init
Initializes the plate pad unit.
2:Down until H1 on
Moves the plate pad unit until the pressure sensor shows the set value (H1).
3:Separation
Executes the plate separation sequence.
4:Move to waiting pos
Moves the plate pad unit to the position to
which the interleaf pad is lowered.
5/6:Vacume On/Off
Turns the vacuum pump ON or OFF.
7:Zone 1
Opens the Zone 1 valve of the plate pad.
8:Zone 2
9:Zone 3
10:Zone 4
11:Close
Closes the plate pad valves.
4464
OK
Start OK ?
ESC
D-110
OK

plate pad unit testing screen will appear.
CANCEL
D.Operation panel
3-13-6.Interleaf Pad Unit Testing screen
4461
Paper pad test
Paper pad test
Allows testing of the interleaf pad unit operations.

OK
Pressing the
Paper pad test

you can carry out various interleaf pad unit tests.
ESC
OK
NEXT
ESC

4467
1:Init
3:Down metal
2:Judge 4:Suck paper
5:Up to nip
6/7:Vacume On/Off
8:Zone 1 9:Zone 2
10:Zone 3 11:Zone 4
12:Close
ESC
CLR
Paper pad test
OK
ENT
1:Init
Initializes the interleaf pad unit.
2:Judge
The paper pad is lowered to the paper/plate
judgment position and stopped.
3:Down metal
Moves the interleaf pad to the position where
the metal sensor turns ON
4:Suk paper
The paper suction is performed.
5:Up to nip
Moves the interleaf pad to the interleaf rollers
nipping position.
6/7:Vacume On/Off
Turns the vacuum pump ON or OFF.
8:Zone 1
Opens the Zone 1 valve of the interleaf pad.
9:Zone 2
10:Zone 3
11:Zone 4
12:Close
Closes the interleaf pad valves.
4464
OK
Start OK ?

interleaf pad unit testing screen will appear.
ESC
OK
CANCEL
D-111
D.Operation panel
3-13-7.Multi Auto Loader Testing screen
4461
Paper pad test
Allows testing of the multi auto loader operations.

OK
Pressing the

you can carry out various multi auto loader tests.
ESC
OK
NEXT
ESC

4468
CLR
Multi auto loader test 1

1:Initialize
2/3:Door Unlock/lock
4:Unload cassette
11-13:Load cassette
20-23:Lift position
5:C->Lift, 6:Lift->C
0
ESC
OK
1:Initialize
Initializes the MA-L.
2/3:Door Unlock/lock
Locks or unlocks the cassette door.
4:Unload cassette
Returns the cassette tray on the lift side to its

original position.
ENT
11-13:Load cassette
11: Moves the 1st slot cassette tray to the lift side.
12: Moves the 2nd slot cassette tray to the lift
side.
13: Moves the 3rd slot cassette tray to the lift side.
The cassette tray stands by at the loading position height on the lift side.
20-23:Lift positioning
20: Moves the lift to the loading position
height.
21: Moves the lift to the 1st slot cassette height.
22: Moves the lift to the 2nd slot cassette
height.
23: Moves the lift to the 3rd slot cassette
height.
5:C->Lift
Moves the cassette tray from the cassette storing side to the lift side.
6:Lift->C
Moves the cassette tray from the lift side to the
4464
cassette storing side.
Start OK ?
OK

ESC
D-112
OK
CANCEL

multi auto loader testing screen will appear.
E. Reference
E.Reference
PT-R4300(Ver1.00)Sequence
1.Sequence explanations (PT-R4300)

1-1.Initialization sequence
T h e p ro c e s sin g b e fo re
in itia lizin g
S e rvo P a c k a la rm
c h e c k in g
InitS eq1
T h e p ro c e s s in g o f
p la te o n tra n s p a s s
in itia liz in g
E rro r
It re s e ts S e rv o p a c k , if it
o c c u r s o v e r lo a d a la rm
It re tu rn s to th e
g e n e ra lly m o d e , if
lo o p g a in o f s p e e d
a n d in te g ra tio n
c o n s ta n t a re a h ig h s p e e d tu rn m o d e .
a c u tu a te rs in itia liz in g
A fte r to m a k e in itia lizin g

is o n c e e n d e d , it is n 't O ff
a p o w e r s u p p ly ?
No
Yes
S V C in itia lizin g
S e rv o re s e t
Yes
S e rvic e c a ll e rro r B
o c c u rs
No
It c h e c k s w h e th e r o r
n o t p la te is le ft in th e
e q u ip m e n t.
Ok
It c h e c k s lo a d a n d u n lo a d
c o n d itio n w h ic h is
m e m o riz e d in N v R a m
Is it in th e c la m p in g o n ly
w ith le a d in g c la m p s ?
E q u a l to o r m o re th a n 5
d e v ia tio n c o u n te rs ?
Yes
No
T h e s ta te a t w h ic h it
re m o ve s ta il c la m p s b y
d is c h a rg in g .
A d ju s tm e n t o f
a u to m a tic a lly O ffs e t
zero
No
D ru m : It d e c id e s o n th e
p o s itio n o f S q u e e z e
Yes
InitS eq2
It d e c id e s o n th e
ta rg e t p o s itio n o f
s q u e e z e if n o t b e in g
w ith in th e + -1 1 p u ls e
a n d it re trie s 5 tim e s .
E rro r
E x1 1 b ,E x1 3 b
E x1 6 7 ,E x1 6 e
E rro r
E x1 1 b ,E x1 3 b ,E x1 6 7
E x1 6 e ,E x1 7 5
E rro r
E x1 0 7 ,E x1 c 6
E x1 c 7
E rro r
E x1 1 b ,E x1 3 b
E x1 6 6 ,E x1 6 d
E rro r
E x1 1 b ,E x1 3 b ,E x1 6 6
E x1 6 d ,E x1 7 4
Yes
It lo w e rs s q u e e z e .
No
T h e s ta te a t w h ic h p la te
is tra n s la te d fro m th e
s u p p ly s id e b y th e
w in d in g ?
Yes
InitS eq1
No
T h e s ta te a t w h ic h p la te
is w ra p p e d a ro u n d d ru m
a n d ta il c la m p s p u t o n
drum .
It w a its 5 s e c o n d , a fte r it
s e rv o O N .
InitS eq3
D ru m : It d e c id e s o n th e
p o s itio n o f ta il c la m p s .
Yes
No
InitS eq4
It d e c id e s o n th e
ta rg e t p o s itio n o f ta il
c la m p if n o t b e in g
w ith in th e + -2 p u ls e
a n d it re trie s 5 tim e s .
Yes
E rro r
P ro c e s s in g o f p u n c h in g
It c lo s e s s h u tte r
No
InitS eq5
It lo w e rs t ra n s p a th
T o m a in p ro c e s s in g o f
in itia liz in g
E x1 1 1
E rro r
E x1 0 4 ,E x1 c 2 ,E x1 c 3
E x1 c 4 ,E x1 c 5 ,E x1 c b
It re tu rn s p la te to th e
d is c h a rg e s id e tra n s
pass
End
E-1
E.Reference
T he processin g o f actuaters
initializing
InitSeq2
Do the tail clam ps m atch a Yes

clam p arm ?
No
It closes shutter
C lamp bolts in the middle
p o siti o n
It raises clam p arm
It lo wers clam p arm
T o the d ru m lo ck p osition
of th e clam p bo lt
Erro r
Erro r
Erro r
Erro r
E x 1 0 5 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c7
Erro r
E x 1 0 6 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c7
Ex10a
E x 1 0 5 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c7
It closes th leading clam p s
It returns the lock p in of

drum
E x 1 0 e,E x 1 c 0 ,E x 1 c 1
Erro r
E x1 9b,E x19 c
Servo OFF
T he processing o f
actuaters initializing
It raises niproller
It m em orizes th at plate is
winded onto the drum in
Nv Ram
End
Erro r
Ex101
End
InitSeq3
T he processing o f
End
InitSeq4
E rro r r eco v e ry 4
End
InitSeq5
The punch
m echanizm is
initialized.
End
E-2
E.Reference
1-2.Main processing of initializing
Start
Parallel processing
C hecking of supply door

is open/close
Erro r
Interlock checking o f
fra m e co v er
Erro r
T he reg istered p unch

are Idled 5times.
Ex189
No
No
Yes
End?
E x 1 3 1 ,E x 1 3 2 ,E x 1 3 3
E x 1 3 4 ,E x 1 3 5 ,E x 1 3 6
Yes
B lower of drum resets

af ter th a t O N
T he processing o f
plate on trans p ass
initializing
T h e 2 n d e rro r?
Ex14c
It returns the side

align m ent m echan ism to
th e sta rti n g p o in t .
Erro r
Erro r
E x1 2d,E x13 f
B lower of drum is OFF

End
T he processing o f
Erro r

After to m ak e initializing
is once ended, it isn't Off
a power supply?
Yes
No
T he processing o f
SVC Initializing
Servo reset
Servo ON , it waits
5seconds
It adjusts an offset
autom atic zero if the
deviatio n cou nter is
equal to o r m ore th an
5.
Erro r
Is plate wrapped on drum ?
Yes
Drum : It decides on tail

clam p position(Nv R am
m em orized) in th e
p o siti o n
No
Do the tail clam ps m atch

a clam p arm ?
B alancer search
Erro r
Ex155
It d ecides o n the
target positio n of tail
clam p if n ot b ein g
within the + -2pulse
and it retries 5times.
Erro r

Servo OFF
It low ers tran s path

E x 1 2 8 ,E x 1 5 1 ,E x 1 9 f
E x 1 a0 ,E x 1 a1 ,E x 1 a2
T he B low er o peratio n
checking
Erro r
Drum : It decides on
leading clamp position in
the p osition .
It d ecides o n the
target positio n of
leading clam p if not
being within the +5pulse and it retries
5times.
It r etu r n s p l ate t o th e
discharge side of trans
pass
Sensor detected head is

ON
It raises trans path
Servo OFF
Ex14f

OF F
Erro r
Erro r
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
E x 1 6 5 ,E x 1 6 c
E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 165

E x 1 6 c,E x 1 7 3
Erro r
E x 1 7 c,E x 1 7 f
Ex18c
Drum vaccum pressure
checking
Erro r

B lower of drum is Off
Is a pu nch o f o ptio n
set t o O N ?
Yes
No
P H 6 1 H /A ,P H 6 2
Sensor checking
Erro r
E x1 7b,E x17 d,E x 17e
Ex186
ON
End
It waits 1seco nd
E-3
E.Reference
1-3.Processing of trans pass initializing

Start
B o th P H 5 4 an d P H 7 0
detect plate?
No
Yes
No
Is trans path at the

high est positio n?
Yes
C lutch of supply side is OFF
C lutch of discharge side is ON
T ran s m o to r: It tra n sf ers

66 0m m at speed o f
40 m m /s
Ex603
Is th ere plate o n sen sor of

PH54 only?
No
Yes
C lutch of supply side is OFF

C lutch of discharge side is ON
T ran s m o to r: I t re tu rn
plate u ntil P H5 4's O FF
at 40 m m /s.
Erro r
T ran s m o to r is stop ped.
Ex145
Isn't there plate o n senso r

of PH 59?
Yes
No
E x 1 ce
Ex14f

PH70 only?
Yes
Ex1b7
No
PH59?
Yes
Ex14f
No
Do sen sor o f PH 50 detect
p la te?
Yes
No
Erro r
It closes shu tter
It lo wers niproller.
End
Erro r
Ex102
Ex150
It op ens shu tter.
Erro r
Ex110
C lutch of supply side is ON

C lutch of discharge side is OFF
T ran s m o t o r: It ret u rn s p la te
until PH50's OFF at 50mm /s.
B ut, it stops even if it doesn't
OFF and it passes in the
(194 .5/50 )sec.
It closes shutter.
Erro r
Ex111
Erro r
It raises niproller
Ex150
T ran s m o to r: It tra n sf ers

31 .5m m at sp eed of
40 m m /s
Ex150
E-4
E.Reference
1-4.Processing of punch sequence

Start
Yes
D o it d e te ct an in terlea f
p a p e r?
Ex1c8
It lo w e rs n ip ro ller
Error
No
It lo w ers tra n s p ath a t th e
p u n ch p o sitio n .
Error
Sid e alig nm ent

starting p oin t re tu rn
Error
*1
E x 1 0 4 ,E x 1 c 2 ,E x 1 c 3
E x 1 c 4 , E x 1 c 5 ,E x 1 c b
Ex102
D o e s it d ete ct a n in te rle af
p a p e r?
It ra ises tra n s p ath
Yes
No
*1
E x 1 2 d ,E x 13 f
It occurs an erro r w ithin
the id ling of pu nch at
p late b efo re .
Ex1c8
Yes
No
Idling o f pun ch
It d rive s th e se t p u n c h
Error
Error
*1
Error
E x 1 3 1 ,E x 1 3 2 ,E x 1 3 3
E x 1 3 4 ,E x 1 3 5 ,E x 1 3 6
E x 1 3 1 ,E x 1 3 2 ,E x 1 3 3
E x 1 3 4 ,E x 1 3 5 ,E x 1 3 6
P arallel p ro ce ssin g
C lu tch of su pply side is O N

C lu tch of discharge side is O FF
Ex102
Sid e alig nm ent
Error
Error
It re tu rn b a ck p late to
trans pass
Error
It o p e n s sh u tter
Isn 't it p u n c h's O N a n d
retryin g ?
*1
No
Error
Yes
It strik es a set p u n ch
R e t ry
It ra is es n ip ro ller
E x 1 2 d ,E x 13 f
It clo se s sh u tte r.
Ex110
T ra n s m o to r: It tra n s
p late u n til O N o f P H 62
se ns or a t 7 0 m m /s
It raise s n ip ro lle r.
T im e o u t
Ex130
No
Is th e re p la te o n se n so r o f
PH62?
Error
It clo se s sh u tte r
Ex111
Yes
It raise s n ip ro ller an d
it tran s p la te to se ns e
ON of PH62.
Error
Is it p o ssib le to h a v e
w ith draw n p late b y
retrin g?
Error
Ex102
Error
It o p e n s sh u tter
Ex1ca
No
D o e s it d ete ct a n in te rle af
p a p e r?
Error
Yes
Yes
Ex110
No
E rro r r e c o v e ry 1
T ran s m o to r: if it's
0 .3 m m o f pla te th ick n e ss,
it tran s b y in term issio n
m al at 5 0 m m /s. If n o t it
trans by continuo usly at
5 0 m m /s
Ex101

End
T ra n s m o to r : It re t u r n s
p late u n til P H 5 0 's O F F a t
5 0 m m /s
T im e o u t
No
It adju sts side alig nm ent

ac co rd in g to th e p la te
size.
Error
Is th e re p la te o n se n so r o f
PH50?
Ex1c8
Yes
It clo se s sh u tte r
It waits 0.5 second .
Sid e alig nm ent m oto r:

It m o v e 3 m m in re v e rs e
at s pe ed of 5 m m /s
Error
It trans plate to shu tter
and it raises trans path
at th e sa m e tim e .
Error
E x 1 0 1 ,E x 1 0 3
Ex111
T h e w a itn g tim e
ac co rd in g to p late
Ex12f
Sid e alig nm ent m oto r:
It m o v e 3 m m a t s p e e d o f
5 m m /s
Error
A fter 0 .5 se c, tran s m o to r
is sto pped .
*1
Sid e alig nm ent
It w aits 2s ec on d
*1
B
E x 1 2 d ,E x 1 5 6 ,E x 1 5 7
E x 1 5 8 ,E x 1 c 9
E-5
E.Reference
1-5.Processing of winding sequence

Start
C
D o e s it d e tec t a lea f p a p er?
It lo w ers tra n s p ath .
Error
Error
Ex1c8
It closes lead ing clam p s
Error
T ra n s m o t o r : s to p
It o p en lea d in g c lam p s
T ra n s m o t o r : s to p
C lutch of supply sid e is O ff.
E x 1 0 4 ,E x 1 c 2 ,E x 1 c 3
E x 1 c 4 , E x 1 c 5 ,E x 1 c b
D rum : It decides o n the
leadin g clam p p osition
Error
S erv o O N
W hen the SV C status
do esn't R eady, it
adju sts and it retries
an au to m atic o ffset
ze ro if n ev e r retry in g
It retu rn s th e b oth side

dru m lo cking pin .
D rum : It decides o n the

po sition of squeeze
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
E x 1 6 5 ,E x 1 6 c
Error
No
It de cid e s o n th e
target squeeze
p o sitio n if n ot b ein g
w ithin+ -11p ulse an d it
retrie s
E x 1 1 b ,E x 13 b ,E x 1 6 5
Ex16c,Ex173
Error
L ead ing edg e detection
se nso r O N
Yes
E x 1 1 b ,E x 13 b ,E x 1 6 7
Ex16e,Ex175
Ex1c8
No
It low ers sq ueeze roller.

No
Error
L ead ing edg e detection

se nso r O F F
E x1b0
B low er of d rum is O N
It puts out the d rum

lock ing p in
It lo wers squeeze roller

to a ha lf
Error
Ex810
Yes
A re th ere ta il clam p s in th e
cla m p arm ?
E x 1 9 b ,E x 19 c
No
It decid es on target
leadin g clam p in the
w ithin + -3and it retries.
D o e s it d ete ct a n in terlea f
p a p e r?
Error
It adjusts an o ffset
au to m atic zero if th e
deviation coun ter is equal
to o r m o re th a n 5 .
Is th ere p late in th e su p p ly
side?
Yes
Ex10e,Ex1c0
Ex1c1
It raises squeeze roller
Error
E x 1 9 9 ,E x 1 9 a
E x 1 0 7 ,E x 1 c 6 ,E x 1 c
7
Servo O FF
It op e n s lea d in g c lam p s
It lo w e rs n ipro ller
Error
Error
E x 1 0 f ,E x 1 c 0
Ex1c1
D isp lac em e n t se n so r
checkin g.
Error
It d e cid es o n th e p os itio n
o f ta il clam p o f d ru m .
M id dle po sition o f clam p

bo lt
Error
Error
R ec ov e ry o f th e siz e
e rr o r
It m a ke s a c lam p b o lt a
dru m unlo cking position .
E x 1 1 2 ,E x 1 1 5 ,E x 1 1 b
E x 1 3 b ,E x 1 6 6 ,E x 1 6 d
C lutch of su pply side is O N

C lutch of discharge sid e is O FF
Error
Error
Ex102
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 1 c ,E x 1 2 7
E x 1 3 b ,E x 1 5 d
It o p e ns sh u tter
T he leading edg e
p o sitio n c h ec k ing
E x 1 b 9 ,E x 1 3 9
Ex110
Ex10a
T ra n s m o t o r: It tra n s p l a te
(1 30 + A )m m a t sp ee d 1 0 5 m m /s.
A is the revision v alue w hich is
p ec u lia r to th e m a ch in e.
It ra ise s n ipro ller
T h e v ac cu m p ressu re
ch e ck in g
Error
Error
Ex186
T ran s m o to r : d riv in g o f
sp eed 5 0m m /s
Ex101
D o e s it d ete ct a n in terlea f
p a p e r?
It d etec ted a n in te rle af

p a p e r?
Yes
Yes
No
No
T ra n s m o to r : s to p
It w aits 2secon ds
Ex1c8
It de cid e s o n th e
targ et tail cla m p
w ithin +-3 pulse and it
retrie s
Ex1c8
E-6
Error
E x 1 1 b ,E x 13 b ,E x 1 6 6
E x 1 6 d ,E x 1 7 4
E.Reference
Erro r
It m akes a clam p bolt a

drum unlocking position.
It closes shutter
It raises a clam p arm in th e
middle position.
E x 1 0 6 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c7
It m ak es a clam p b olt the
po sition of th e drum
locking.
Erro r


middle position.
Ex10a
locking.

Erro r
M o re th an retry tw o tim es?
No
Yes

middle position.
Ex1b2
It m em orizes th e d ru m
present p ositio n as th e
po sition w hich tail clam ps
were p ut on.
Erro r
Is tail clam ps locked up the

drum?
Erro r
T he blow er o peratio n
checking
Erro r
E x 1 0 5 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c7
Ex11d
Ex18c
End
E-7
E.Reference
1-6.Discharge Sequence
Start
Parallel op eration
T ran s m o to r: It re tu rn
plate at th e speed o f
125m m/s.
Erro r
It returns drum locking pin
Erro r
E x 1 0 4 ,E x 1 c 2 ,E x 1 c 3
E x 1 c4 ,E x 1 c5 ,E x 1 cb
C lutch of the discharge
side is OFF.
E x1 9b,E x19 c
Parallel op eration
Drum : It decides on the

po sition of tail clam p
It d ecides o n the
target tail clam p
po sition if not b ein g
within +-2pulse and it
retries
Do in g PH5 4 and PH 59
sensor Plate deing?
Erro r
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
E x 1 6 6 ,E x 1 6 d
If it becom es the po sition

of 1 50m m to a leading
clam p position, it is begun
to raise a squeeze roller
Erro r

po sition of lead in g clam p
T ran s m o to r : sto p
Erro r
E x1 1b,E x13 b,Ex 16 6

E x 1 6 d ,E x 1 7 4
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
E x 1 6 5 ,E x 1 6 c
Yes
No
It d ecides o n the
target leading clam p
po sition if not b ein g
within + -3 and it
retries until 5tim es.
Erro r
Ex143
Is there tail clam p in th e

clam p arm .
Yes
E x1 1b,E x13 b,Ex 16 5

E x 1 6 c,E x 1 7 3
Ex1b1
No
It m ak es a clam p bolt the
locking.
It puts out the drum

locking pin.
Erro r
Erro r
E x 1 9 9 ,E x 1 9 a
Ex10a

unlocking.
Erro r
C lutch of the supply side Off.

C lutch of the discharge side is ON
E x 1 0 6 ,E x 1 c 6 ,E x 1 c 7
Servo OFF
Erro r
Is it senso r of P H54 O FF?
It m akes a clam p bo lt
locking.
Yes
Ex11f
No
It o pens lead in g clam p s
Erro r
E x 1 0 f,E x 1 c 0 ,E x 1 c1

Drum blower OFF
Ex109
T ran s m o to r: It re tu rn s
un til P H54 O FFs at th e
speed of 160m m/s.
Erro r
C lutch of the supply side is OFF

C lutch of the discharge side is OFF
It raises a clamp arm in

the m idd le po sition .
Erro r
Ex11f
Yes
Is it senso r of P H59 O FF?

No

locking.
Is there p late to wind

con tinu ously?
E x 1 ce
Yes
No
It closes leading clam ps
Erro r
E x 1 0 e,E x 1 c0 ,E x 1 c1
E x 1 0 8 ,E x 1 c 6 ,E x 1 c 7
It retu rn s d ru m lo cking
pin
Is there tail clam p in th e
clam p arm ?
Erro r
Erro r
E x1 9b,E x19 c
Ex11d
End
E
E-8
E.Reference
E rro r rec o v ery 1
side of supply plate.
Erro r
It retried?
No
It op ens shu tter
Erro r
Ex110
Yes
It closes shu tter
It closes shu tter

position of squeeze
E x 1 0 2 ,E x 1 1 0 ,E x 1 4 6
It d ecides o n the
target squeeze
po sition if not b eing
within +-11 and it
retries.
Erro r
Ex111
Erro r
Erro r
Erro r
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
E x 1 6 7 ,E x 1 6 e
E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 167

E x 1 6 e,E x 1 7 5
E x 1 0 5 ,E x 1 c 6 ,E x 1 c 7
T ran s m o to r : st o p

It raises niproller
Erro r

C lutch on the supply side is
OF F
End
Ex101
Erro r
E rro r R e co v e ry 4

Do sen sor of PH5 4 d etect
p la te?
E x 1 0 e,E x 1 c0 ,E x 1 c1
Erro r
E x 1 0 3 ,E x 1 c 2 ,E x 1 c 3
E x 1 c4 ,E x 1 c5 ,E x 1 cb
Yes
Ex142
No
Erro r
E x 1 0 4 ,E x 1 c 2 ,E x 1 c 3
E x 1 c4 ,E x 1 c5 ,E x 1 cb

End
It discharg es plate to the

discharge side of pass.
End
Do in g PH5 0 senso r, plate
being?
Yes

position of leading clamp.
Erro r
It d ecides o n the
po sition if not b eing
within +-3 and it
retries.
Erro r
Ex000
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
E x 1 6 5 ,E x 1 6 c
E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 165

E x 1 6 c,E x 1 7 3
R ecov ery o f size error

p la te?
Yes
No
Erro r
Erro r
Drum : It decides on the tail
clam p po sition with Y size
of 650 m m in the p ositio n.
B ut it stops drum forcing
wh en plate p asses PH 50
senso r.
E x1 9b,E x19 c
E x 1 1 5 ,E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 1 c
E x 1 2 7 ,E x 1 3 b
Servo OFF
It o pens lead in g clam p s
Erro r
E x 1 0 f,E x 1 c 0 ,E x 1 c 1
End

clam p po sition with the
Ysize which calculated
fro m th e p o siti o n o f P H 5 0
senso r OF F in the positio n.
Erro r
E x1 1b,E x11 c
E x 1 2 7 ,E x 1 3 b
It closes shu tter
End
E-9
E.Reference
1-7.Drum high speed rotating sequence

The
acceleration
Deceleration
Erro r
T he all kind checking (* 1)
E x 1 4 c,E x 1 4 e,E x 1 5 f
E x 1 6 1 ,E x 1 6 2 ,E x 1 6 4
Ex18c
T u rn S to p co m m an d
It w aits for the sp eed

agreement signal and the
speed Zero signal to ON.
T he tim e out is 15 seco nds.
Drum h ig h speed rotation

error latch signal clear.
Erro r
Erro r
Vaccum pressure checking
Ex186
Erro r
E x 1 4 c,E x 1 4 e,E x 1 5 f
E x 1 6 1 ,E x 1 6 2 ,E x 1 6 4
Ex18c
Yes
E x 1 5 f,E x 1 6 4 ,E x 1 8 8
E x 1 a3 ,E x 1 a4

It waits 1seco nd
Loose plate checking is enable

Vaccum pressure checking is
enable
B it2,5 of address 05h are

ON
No
It sets sp eed loop gain and

In t eg ra tio n c o n stan t to
high speed rotational m ode

T he tim e out is 15 seco nds.
Start com mand of drum

high sp eed ro tatio n
T he b alancer po sito n
checking
Erro r
It clears drum high speed

rotation erro r latch sig nal
Ex15b
L oo se plate latch signal ch eck E r r o r
Loose plate latch signal disable
Ex15e
Erro r
It waits 2seconds
T he vaccum pressure
decline latch signal
checking
disable
*2
Erro r
*3
T h e E rr o r o f st o p p ed
tim eou t
Erro r
Ex188
Erro r
Ex183
Yes
B it4 of address fc00h is ON
Ex180
It clears SVC mode, a
distance, a speed register
No
Yes
Speed OK?
It m ak es speed loo p gain,

In t eg ra tio n c o n stan t to
generally m od e.
No
It waits until it reaches
specification speed.
Erro r
End
*2
Erro r
*3
Yes
Ex181
No
It waits 0.5 second until the

turn is stable.
Erro r
*2
Erro r
*3
Yes
Ex180
*1
Serv o sto p (L S 58-1,-2, S W 58 )
C ov er interlock (LS 57 -1,-2 ,-3)
A ctu a ter (P H 2 0 ,P H 1 1 -2 A ,P H 1 1 -2 H ,P H 3 0 ,P H 3 0 H )
Drum blower (INVAL M )
*2
*3
Drum sto p
Drum sto p
E x 1 5 e,E x 1 8 4 ,E x 1 8 5
E x 1 8 8 ,E x 1 a 3 ,E x 1 a 4
E x 1 4 c ,E x 1 4 e ,E x 1 5 f
E x 1 6 1 ,E x 1 6 2 ,E x 1 6 4
Ex18c
No
B it2 of address fc00h is
OF F
Yes
Ex181
No
End
E-10
E.Reference
1-8.Auto Balance Sequence
B alancer m ov em en t
processing
Start
It calcu lates the po sition of

balancer fro m plate size
and thickness.
Yes T h e m o v em en t d ista n ce o f
balancer w hich m o ves to
the 1st is within 3pulse?
No
It fixes th e order and the

po sition wh ich m oves
balancers (Home side)
T h e m o v em en t d ista n ce o f
Erro r
E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 168

E x 1 6 f,E x 1 7 6
Erro r
W h en bum p in g b y the
balancer m o vem ent, it
m o v es o n e to t h e
te m p o r ary p o sit io n .
Detection o f balan cer
E x 1 2 0 ,E x 1 9 d
B alancer search
Erro r
It puts out balancer pin
Yes
processing (H om e
Side)
Erro r
E x 1 9 9 ,E x 1 9 a
E x1 20 an d less than retry

two tim es?
Erro r
It m oves 1 st balan cer
No
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
E x 1 6 9 ,E x 1 7 0
Servo OFF
Erro r
It returns balancer pins.
E x1 9b,E x19 c
Erro r

balancers (Away side)
It renews the present drum

Po sition as the positio n of
balancer.
B alancer search
Yes
processing (Away
side)
E x 1 2 1 ,E x 1 9 e
Erro r
Ex19d and less than two

times.
No
Servo OFF
Yes
balanser which m oves to
the 2nd is within 3pulse?
No
It d oes the 1
processing
End
End
E-11
PT-R4000II (Ver4.0X)Sequence
E.Reference
2.Sequence explanations (PT-R4000II)

2-1.Initialization sequence
The processing before

initializing
Servo Pack alarm checking
InitSeq1
T he processing o f
plate on tran s p ass
initializing
Erro r
It resets Servo p ack , if it

occur sover load alarm
It re tu rn s to th e
generally mode, if
loop g ain of speed
and integration
con stant are a hig hspeed turn m ode.
T he processing o f
acutuaters initializing
a power supply?
No
Yes
T he processing o f
SVC initializing
Servo reset
Yes
Service call error B occurs

No
It checks wh eth er or
no t plate is left in the
equ ipm en t.
Ok
It checks load and unload

condition which is
m em orized in Nv R am
Is it in the clam ping o nly

with leading clamps?
E qu al to or m o re th an 5
dev iatio n co unters?
Yes
No
T he state at w hich it
removes tail clam ps by
discharging.
Ad ju stm en t of
autom atically Offset
zero
No

position of Squeeze
Yes
InitSeq2
It d ecides o n the
target positio n of
squeeze if not being
within the +-11pulse
Erro r
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
E x 1 6 7 ,E x 1 6 e
Erro r
E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 167

E x 1 6 e,E x 1 7 5
Erro r
E x 1 0 7 ,E x 1 c 6
E x 1 c7
Erro r
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
E x 1 6 6 ,E x 1 6 d
Erro r
E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 166

E x 1 6 d ,E x 1 7 4
Yes
It lowers squeeze.
No
InitSeq3
po sition of tail clam p s.
T he state at wh ich p late is

translated from th e sup ply
side by the winding?
Yes
InitSeq1
No
T he state at wh ich p late is

wrapped around drum and
tail clam ps put on drum.
It waits 5second, after it

servo ON .
Yes
No
InitSeq4
It d ecides o n the
Yes
Erro r
Processing o f p un ch in g
It closes shu tter
No
InitSeq5
T o m ain p ro cessing o f
initializing
Ex111
Erro r
E x 1 0 4 ,E x 1 c 2 ,E x 1 c 3
E x 1 c4 ,E x 1 c5 ,E x 1 cb
It r etu r n s p l ate to th e
discharge side trans
pass
End
E-12
E.Reference
T he processin g o f actuaters
initializing
InitSeq2
Do the tail clam ps m atch a Yes

clam p arm ?
No
It closes shutter
C lamp bolts in the middle
p o siti o n
T o the d ru m lo ck p osition
of th e clam p bo lt
Erro r
Erro r
Erro r
Erro r
E x 1 0 5 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c7
Erro r
E x 1 0 6 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c7
Ex10a
E x 1 0 5 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c7
It closes th leading clam p s
It returns the lock p in of

drum
E x 1 0 e,E x 1 c 0 ,E x 1 c 1
Erro r
E x1 9b,E x19 c
Servo OFF
T he processing o f
It raises niproller
It m em orizes th at plate is
winded onto the drum in
Nv Ram
End
Erro r
Ex101
End
InitSeq3
T he processing o f
End
InitSeq4
End
InitSeq5
The punch
m echanizm is
initialized.
End
E-13
E.Reference
2-2.Main processing of initializing

Start
Parallel processing
C hecking of supply door

is open/close
Erro r
Interlock checking o f
fra m e co v er
Erro r
T he reg istered p unch

are Idled 5times.
Ex189
No
No
Yes
End?
E x 1 3 1 ,E x 1 3 2 ,E x 1 3 3
E x 1 3 4 ,E x 1 3 5 ,E x 1 3 6
Yes
B lower of drum resets

af ter th a t O N
T he processing o f
plate on trans p ass
initializing
T h e 2 n d e rro r?
Ex14c
It returns the side

align m ent m echan ism to
th e sta rti n g p o in t .
Erro r
Erro r
E x1 2d,E x13 f

End
T he processing o f
Erro r

a power supply?
Yes
No
T he processing o f
SVC Initializing
Servo reset
Servo ON , it waits
5seconds
It adjusts an offset
autom atic zero if the
deviatio n cou nter is
equal to o r m ore th an
5.
Erro r
Is plate wrapped on drum ?
Yes
Drum : It decides on tail

clam p position(Nv R am
m em orized) in th e
p o siti o n
No
Do the tail clam ps m atch

a clam p arm ?
B alancer search
Erro r
Ex155
It d ecides o n the
Erro r

Servo OFF

E x 1 2 8 ,E x 1 5 1 ,E x 1 9 f
E x 1 a0 ,E x 1 a1 ,E x 1 a2
T he B low er o peratio n
checking
Erro r
Drum : It decides on
leading clamp position in
the p osition .
It d ecides o n the
target positio n of
leading clam p if not
being within the +5pulse and it retries
5times.
discharge side of trans
pass

ON
Servo OFF
Ex14f

OF F
Erro r
Erro r
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
E x 1 6 5 ,E x 1 6 c
E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 165

E x 1 6 c,E x 1 7 3
Erro r
E x 1 7 c,E x 1 7 f
Ex18c
Drum vaccum pressure
checking
Erro r

B lower of drum is Off
Is a pu nch o f o ptio n
set t o O N ?
Yes
No
P H 6 1 H /A ,P H 6 2
Sensor checking
Erro r
E x1 7b,E x17 d,E x 17e
Ex186
ON
End
It waits 1seco nd
E-14
E.Reference
2-3.Processing of trans pass initializing

Start
B o t h P H 5 4 an d P H 7 0
d etect p late?
No
Yes
No
Is trans p ath at the

h ig hest p ositi on ?
Yes
C lutch of supply side is O FF
C lutch of discharge side is O N
T ra n s m o to r: It tran sfers
6 45 m m a t sp eed o f
4 0m m /s
Ex603
Is th ere p late o n sen so r of

PH 5 4 o nly?
No
Yes
C lutch of supply side is O FF

C lutch of discharge side is O N
T ra n s m o to r: It re tu rn
p late u nti l P H 5 4's O FF
at 4 0 m m /s.
E r ro r
T ran s m o to r i s sto pp ed .
Ex145
T ra n s m o t o r : It t ra n s
p late 1 0m m at 4 0m m / s
E r ro r
T ran s m o to r i s sto pp ed .
Ex14f
Isn't the re p late on senso r
of PH54?
Yes
No
It retries at o n ce
Ex14f
Ex124
Is th ere p late o n sen so r of
PH 7 0 o nly?
Yes
Ex1b 7
No
D o sen so r o f PH 5 0 d etect
plate?
Yes
No
E r ro r
It closes sh utter
It lo w e rs n ip rol ler.
End
E r ro r
Ex102
Ex150
It op en s sh ut ter.
E r ro r
Ex110
C lutch of supply side is O N

C lutch of discharge side is O FF
T ra n s m o to r: It re tu rn s p l a t e
until PH 50's O FF at 50m m /s.
B ut, it stops even if it doesn't
O FF and it passes in the
(1 94 .5 /5 0)sec.
It closes shu tte r.
E r ro r
Ex111
E r ro r
It raises n iproll er
Ex150
T ra n s m o to r: It tran sfers
3 1.5 m m at sp eed o f
4 0m m /s
Ex150
E-15
E.Reference
2-4.Processing of punch sequence

S tart
Y es
D o it d etect an in te rleaf
p a p e r?
E x 1 c8
E r ro r
It lo w ers n ip ro ller
No
It lo w ers tran s p ath at th e
p u n ch p o sitio n .
E r ro r
S id e alig n m en t
sta rtin g p o in t retu rn
E r ro r
*1
E x 1 0 4 ,E x 1 c2 ,E x 1 c 3
E x 1 c4 ,E x 1 c 5 ,E x 1 c b
Ex102
D o es it de tect an in terle af
p a p e r?
It raises tran s pa th
Y es
No
*1
E x 1 2 d ,E x 1 3 f
It o ccu rs an erro r w ith in
th e id ling of punch at
p late b efo re.
E x 1 c8
Y es
No
Id lin g o f p u n ch
E r ro r
It driv es th e set pu nch
E r ro r
*1
E r ro r
E x 1 3 1 ,E x 1 3 2 ,E x 1 3 3
E x 1 3 4 ,E x 1 3 5 ,E x 1 3 6
E x 1 3 1 ,E x 1 3 2 ,E x 1 3 3
E x 1 3 4 ,E x 1 3 5 ,E x 1 3 6
S id e alig n m ent
sta rtin g p oint return
E r ro r
*1
Ex102
E r ro r
It op ens shu tter
E x1 2d ,E x 13 f
E r ro r
It retu rn back plate to

trans pass

C lutch of discharg e side is O F F
It raises n ip ro ller
Isn 't it p u n ch 's O N an d

re trying ?
No
It w aits 0 .5 seco n d
E r ro r
Y es
It strik es a set pu nch
Ex110
R e try
T ra n s m o to r: It tra n s
p late u n til O N o f P H 6 2
sen so r a t 4 0 m m /s
It closes shu tter.
T im e o ut
No
Is there p late on sen so r o f

PH62?
It raise s n ip ro ller.
Y es
It raise s n ip ro ller an d
it trans p late to sen se
ON of PH62.
Ex130
E r ro r
E r ro r
E r ro r
It closes sh utte r
E r ro r
It op ens shu tter
E r ro r
Ex110
E rro r rec o v e ry 1
T ran s m o to r: if it's
0 .3 m m o f p late th ic k n ess,
it tran s b y in term issio n
m a l at 5 0 m m /s. If n o t it
tran s by continuously at
5 0 m m /s
Ex101
Y es
Is it po ssible to hav e
w ithdraw n plate by
retring?
E x 1 ca
No
T ra n s m o to r : It re tu rn s
p late u n til P H 5 0 's O F F at
5 0m m /s
T im e o u t
Y es
Is it set punch's O N ?
No
No
It ad ju sts sid e align m en t

acc ord ing to th e plate
size.
Ex111
Ex102
E r ro r
It idles the se t p un ch .
Is there p late on sen so r o f

PH50?
Y es
It closes sh utte r
p a p e r?
Y es
It w aits 1 seco n d .
No
S id e alig n m en t m o to r:
It m o v e 3 m m in re v e rse
at speed o f 5m m /s
End
E r ro r
It tran s p late to sh u tter
an d it raises tran s p ath
at th e sam e tim e.
E r ro r
E x 1 0 1 ,E x 1 0 3
Ex111
T h e w aitn g tim e
acc ord ing to p late
E x 1 c8
Ex12f
S id e alig n m en t m o to r:
It m o v e 3 m m a t sp ee d o f
5 m m /s
E r ro r
A fter 0 .5 sec , tran s m o to r

is stopped.
*1
S id e alig n m ent
sta rtin g p oint return
It w a its 5 seco n d
*1
E rro r rec o v e ry 1
B
E-16
E x 1 2 d ,E x 1 5 6 ,E x 1 5 7
E x 1 5 8 ,E x 1 c9
E.Reference
2-5.Processing of winding sequence

S tart
C
Pa rallel p ro cessin g
D o es it d etect a leaf p ap er?
It lo w ers tran s path .
E r ro r
E r ro r
E x 1 c8
E x 1 0 4 ,E x 1 c2 ,E x 1 c 3
E x 1 c4 ,E x 1 c 5 ,E x 1 c b
E r ro r
T ra n s m o to r : st o p
It op en lead in g clam p s
T ra n s m o to r : st o p
C lutch of supply side is O ff.

D rum : It decides on th e
lead in g clam p p o sitio n
E r ro r
S e rv o O N
W h en th e SV C status
doesn 't R eady, it
ad justs an d it retries
an au to m atic offset
zero if ne ver retrying
It ad ju sts an o ffset
au to m atic zero if th e
deviation counter is equal
to o r m o re th an 5 .
No
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
E x 1 6 5 ,E x 1 6 c
It decides on targ et
lead in g clam p in th e
p o sitio n if n o t b ein g
w ith in +-3 an d it retries.
E r ro r
E x1 1b ,E x 13 b,E x1 65
E x 1 6 c ,E x 1 7 3
Y es
E x 1 0 e ,E x 1 c 0
E x 1 c1
It retu rn s the bo th side

drum locking pin.
D rum : It decides on the

position of squeeze
It d ecid es o n th e
targ et squeeze
w ith in + -11pulse and it
re tries
E r ro r
E x1 9b ,E x 19 c
E r ro r
E r ro r

Is th ere p late in th e sup p ly
side?
No
Ex810
L e adin g ed g e d etection
sen so r O N
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b ,E x 1 6 7
E x 1 6 e ,E x 1 7 5
Y es
p a p e r?
Y es
It lo w ers sq ueeze ro ller.
E r ro r
E x 1 c8
L e adin g ed g e d etection
sen so r O F F
No
A re th ere tail cla m p s in th e

clam p arm ?
No
Ex1b0
It raises squeeze roller
B lo w er o f d ru m is O N
It p u ts o u t th e d ru m
lo cking pin
E r ro r
E x 1 9 9 ,E x 1 9 a
E x 1 0 7 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c
7
Pa rallel p ro cessin g
S erv o O F F
It o p en s lea d in g clam p s
E r ro r
E r ro r
E x 1 0 f,E x 1 c0
E x 1 c1
It d ecid es o n th e p o sitio n
o f tail cla m p o f drum .
M iddle position of clam p

bolt
E r ro r
E r ro r
R ec ov ery of th e size
e rro r
It m ak es a c lam p b olt a
E x 1 1 2 ,E x 1 1 5 ,E x 1 1 b
E x 1 3 b ,E x 1 6 6 ,E x 1 6 d
The leading edge

p o sitio n ch eck in g
E r ro r
Ex102

C lutch of discharg e side is O F F
E x 1 b 9 ,E x 1 3 9
Ex10a
It op ens shu tter
E r ro r
Ex110
T he v acc um p re ssu re
ch eck in g
It w aits 5seconds
E r ro r

T ra n s m o to r: It tra n s p la te
(1 3 0 + A )m m at sp eed 70 m m /s.
A is th e revisio n v alu e w h ich is
p eculiar to th e m achin e.
Ex186
E r ro r
It d ete cte d an in terleaf

p a p e r?
Y es
No
T ran s m o to r : d riv in g o f
sp eed 50m m /s
Ex101
p a p e r?
Y es
No
T ra n s m o t o r : sto p
E x 1 c8
It d ecid es o n th e
targ et tail clam p
w ithin +-3pulse and it
re tries
E r ro r
It w aits 3seconds
D
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b ,E x 1 6 6
E x 1 6 d ,E x 1 7 4
C
E x 1 c8
E-17
E.Reference
Erro r

It closes shutter
middle position.
E x 1 0 6 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c7
locking.
Erro r


middle position.
Ex10a
locking.

Erro r
M o re th an retry tw o tim es?
No
Yes

middle position.
Ex1b2
It m em orizes th e d ru m
present p ositio n as th e
po sition w hich tail clam ps
were p ut on.
Erro r
Is tail clam ps locked up the

drum?
Erro r
Disp lacem en t senso r

checking.
Erro r
T he blow er o peratio n
checking
Erro r
T he b alancer po siton
checking
E x 1 0 5 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c7
Ex11d
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 1 c,E x 1 2 7
E x 1 3 b ,E x 1 5 d
Ex18c
Erro r
B alancer search
Auto balance sequence
End
E-18
E.Reference
2-6.Discharge Sequence
E
Start
Parallel o peratio n
T ran s m o to r: It retu rn
plate at th e sp eed o f
95m m /s.
E rro r
It low ers trans path
E rro r
E x 1 0 4 ,E x1 c 2 ,E x 1 c 3
E x 1 c 4, E x 1 c5 , E x 1 cb
Clutch of the discharge
side is OFF.
E x19 b,Ex1 9c
Parallel o peratio n

po sition of tail clam p
It d ecides o n th e
target tail clam p
po sition if no t b ein g
within +-2pulse and it
retries
D oin g PH 5 4 senso r Plate

deing?
E rro r
E x 1 1 b ,E x1 3 b
E x 1 6 6 ,E x1 6 d
If it becom es the p ositio n

of 150 m m to a leading
clam p position, it is begun
to raise a squeeze roller
E rro r

po sition o f leading clam p
E rro r
E x11 b,Ex1 3b,E x16 6

E x 1 6 d ,E x1 7 4
E x 1 1 b ,E x1 3 b
E x 1 6 5 ,E x1 6 c
Y es
No
It raises trans p ath
It d ecides o n th e
po sition if no t b ein g
within +-3 and it
retries until 5times.
E rro r
Ex143
Is th ere tail clam p in the
clam p arm .
Y es
E x11 b,Ex1 3b,E x16 5

E x 1 6 c, E x 1 7 3
Ex1b1
No
Is it sensor o f PH 54 O FF?
It m akes a clam p bo lt th e
po sition o f the drum
locking.
E rro r
Ex11f
No
Ex10a
It puts out the drum

locking pin.
It low ers clam p arm
Y es
E rro r
E x 1 9 9 ,E x1 9 a
E rro r
Servo OFF
It o pens lead ing clam ps
E rro r
E x 1 0 f, E x 1 c0 , E x 1 c1
E x 1 0 6 ,E x1 c 6 ,E x 1 c 7
unlocking.
E rro r
Clutch of the supply side Off.
Clutch of the discharge side is ON
It m akes a clam p bolt
locking.
T ran s m o to r: It retu rn s
un til PH 54 O FFs at the
speed of 80m m /s.
E rro r

Ex109
Ex11f
Drum blow er OFF
It raises a clam p arm in

the m id dle po sition .
T ran s m o to r: It tran sfer

p l at e 1 0 m m t o PH 5 4 's
O N at 48m m /s
E rro r
It low ers clam p arm

Y es
Is it sensor o f PH 54 O FF?
locking.
No
No
It retried?
Y es

E x 1 0 8 ,E x1 c 6 ,E x 1 c 7
Ex124
Is th ere tail clam p in the
clam p arm ?
E rro r
Ex11d
Is there p late to w in d
contin uou sly?
Y es
No
Clutch of the supply side is O FF
Clutch of the discharge side is OFF
It w aits 0 .5 second
It returns drum lockin g

pin
E rro r
E rro r
E x 1 0 e, E x 1 c0 , E x 1 c1
E x19 b,Ex1 9c
E
End
E-19
E.Reference
E rro r r ec o v ery 1
side of supply plate.
Erro r
It retried?
No
It op ens shu tter
Erro r
Ex110
Yes
It closes shutter
Erro r
It closes shutter

position of squeeze
E x 1 0 2 ,E x 1 1 0 ,E x 1 4 6
It d ecides o n the
target squeeze
po sition if not being
within +-11 and it
retries.
Ex111
Erro r
Erro r
Erro r
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
E x 1 6 7 ,E x 1 6 e
E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 167

E x 1 6 e,E x 1 7 5
E x 1 0 5 ,E x 1 c6 ,E x 1 c7
It raises niproller
Erro r

C lutch on the supply side is
OF F
End
Ex101
It closes leading clamps
Erro r
E rro r R e co v e ry 4

p la te?
E x 1 0 e,E x 1 c 0 ,E x 1 c 1
Erro r
E x 1 0 3 ,E x 1 c2 ,E x 1 c3
E x 1 c4 ,E x 1 c 5 ,E x 1 c b
Yes
Ex142
No
Erro r
E x 1 0 4 ,E x 1 c2 ,E x 1 c3
E x 1 c4 ,E x 1 c 5 ,E x 1 c b

End
It discharg es plate to the

discharge side of pass.
End
Do in g PH5 0 senso r, plate
being?
Yes

position of leading clamp.
Erro r
It d ecides o n the
target leading clamp
po sition if not being
within +-3 and it
retries.
Erro r
Ex000
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
E x 1 6 5 ,E x 1 6 c
E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 165

E x 1 6 c,E x 1 7 3
R ecov ery o f size error

p la te?
Yes
No
Erro r
Erro r
clam p po sition with Ysize
of 6 50 m m in the p osition .
B ut it stops drum forcing
wh en plate p asses PH5 0
senso r.
E x1 9b,E x19 c
E x 1 1 5 ,E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 1 c
E x 1 2 7 ,E x 1 3 b
Servo OFF
It o pens lead in g clam ps
End
Erro r
E x 1 0 f,E x 1 c 0 ,E x 1 c 1

clam p po sition with th e
Ysize which calculated
fro m th e p o siti o n o f P H 5 0
senso r OF F in the positio n.
Erro r
E x1 1b,E x11 c
E x 1 2 7 ,E x 1 3 b
It closes shutter
End
E-20
E.Reference
2-7.Drum high speed rotating sequence

The
acceleration
Deceleration
It waits in the stability tim e

of 0.5 seconds
T u rn S to p co m m an d
Erro r
E x 1 4 c,E x 1 4 e ,E x 1 5 f
E x 1 6 1 ,E x 1 6 2 ,E x 1 6 4
Ex18c

T he tim e out is 1 5 seco nds.
Drum h ig h speed rotation

error latch signal clear.
Erro r
Erro r
E x 1 4 c,E x 1 4 e ,E x 1 5 f
E x 1 6 1 ,E x 1 6 2 ,E x 1 6 4
Ex18c
Yes
E x 1 5 f,E x 1 6 4 ,E x 1 8 8
E x 1 a3 ,E x 1 a 4

It waits 1secon d
Erro r
Ex186
B it2,5 of address 05h are

ON
No
Loose plate checking is enable

Vaccum pressure checking is
enable

T he tim e out is 1 5 seco nds.
It sets sp eed loop gain and

In te g ra tio n c o n stan t t o
high speed rotational mode
Start com mand of drum

high speed ro tatio n
It clears drum high speed

rotation error latch sign al
Erro r
L oo se plate latch sig nal ch eck E r r o r

Loose plate latch signal disable
It waits 2seconds
Ex15e
*2
T he vaccum pressure
decline latch signal
checking
disable
Erro r
Erro r
Ex188
*3
T h e E rr o r o f st o p p ed
tim eou t
Yes
Erro r
Ex183
Ex180
No
It clears SVC mode, a
distance, a speed register
Yes
Speed OK?
No
It waits until it reaches
specification speed.
It m ak es speed loo p gain,

In te g ra tio n c o n stan t t o
generally m od e.
Erro r
*2
End
Erro r
*3
Yes
Ex181
No
It waits 1 second until the

turn is stable.
Erro r
*2
Erro r
*3
Yes
Ex180
No
B it2 of address fc00h is
OF F
*1
Serv o sto p (L S5 8-1,-2, S W 58)
C ov er interlock (L S 57-1,-2 ,-3 )
A ctu a ter (P H 2 0 ,P H 1 1 -2 A ,P H 1 1 - 2 H ,P H 3 0 ,P H 3 0 H )
Drum blower (INVAL M )
*2
*3
Drum sto p
Drum sto p
E x 1 5 e,E x 1 8 4 ,E x 1 8 5
E x 1 8 8 ,E x 1 a3 ,E x 1 a4
E x 1 4 c ,E x 1 4 e ,E x 1 5 f
E x 1 6 1 ,E x 1 6 2 ,E x 1 6 4
Ex18c
Yes
Ex181
No
End
E-21
E.Reference
2-8.Auto Balance Sequence
processing
Start
It calcu lates the po sition of

balancer fro m plate size
and thickness.
Yes T h e m o v em en t d ista n ce o f
No

balancers (Home side)
Erro r
E x1 1b,E x13 b,E x 168

E x 1 6 f,E x 1 7 6
Erro r
E x 1 2 0 ,E x 1 9 d
B alancer search
Erro r
It puts out balancer pin
Yes
processing (H om e
Side)
Erro r
E x 1 9 9 ,E x 1 9 a
E x1 20 an d less than retry

two tim es?
Erro r
It m oves 1 st balan cer
No
E x 1 1 b ,E x 1 3 b
E x 1 6 9 ,E x 1 7 0
Servo OFF
Erro r
It returns balancer pins.
E x1 9b,E x19 c
Erro r

balancers (Away side)
It renews the present drum

Po sition as the positio n of
balancer.
B alancer search
Yes
processing (Away
side)
E x 1 2 1 ,E x 1 9 e
Erro r
Ex19d and less than two

times.
No
Servo OFF
Yes
balanser which m oves to
the 2nd is within 3pulse?
No
It d oes the 1
processing
End
End
E-22
E.Reference
3. Part names and sensor positions
3-1. Front side of Main unit
PT-R4300
PH56
M55
LS57-2
M58
PH58
S0
PH55
PH11-2A
M11A
PH10A
PH10H
M11H
M41
ENC1
M2
PH11-1A
M1
LS4A
ENC1
LS4A
LS4H
LS56
LS57-2
M1
M2
M11A
M11H
M41
M55
M58
P1
PH2
PH10A
PH10H
PH11-1A
PH11-2A
PH55
PH56
PH58
S0
P1
PH2
LS4H
: Rotary encoder
: Front cover interlock switch
: AC servomotor
: Scanning pulse motor
: Balancer drive motor (Away)
: Balancer drive motor (Home)
: Vacuum pump
: DC motor for raising/lowering the transport path
: Motor for operation door
: Balancer weight detection sensor (Away)
: Balancer pin position detection sensor
: Balancer pin sensor
: Motor for Open/Close the operation door
: Power switch
E-23
E.Reference
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
PH56
M55
LS56
LS57-2
SL58
LS57-3
PH55
M11A
PH10A
PH10H
PH11-2A
M11H
M41
ENC1
M2
M1
PH11-1A
LS4A
ENC1
LS4A
LS4H
LS56
LS57-2
LS57-3
M1
M2
M11A
M11H
M41
M55
P1
PH2
PH10A
PH10H
PH11-1A
PH11-2A
PH55
PH56
SL58
E-24
P1
PH2
LS4H
: Rotary encoder
: Front cover interlock switch
: Right side cover interlock switch
: AC servomotor
: Scanning pulse motor
: Balancer drive motor (Away)
: Balancer drive motor (Home)
: Vacuum pump
: DC motor for raising/lowering the transport path
: Balancer weight detection sensor (Away)
: Balancer pin position detection sensor
: Balancer pin sensor
: Operation door solenoid
E.Reference
3-2. Back side of Main unit
PT-R4300
LS58-2
LS58-1
LS57-1
KA40
PH30A
PH30H
XT2
M30H
M30A
KA2
PH20
PH31H
PH31A
KA1
KA30MH
XT10
M20
KA1
KA2
KA30MA
KA30MH
KA40
LS57-1
LS58-1
LS58-2
M20
M30A
M30H
PH6
PH20
PH21
PH29A
PH29H
PH30A
PH30H
PH31A
PH31H
XT2
XT10
PH6
PH29H
PH29A
PH21 KA30MA BL40
: Relay for interlock power

: Relay for servomotor ON/OFF power
: Relay for M30A
: Relay for M30H
: Relay for gas suction blower ON/OFF power
: Interlock switch for rear cover
: Soft switch for drum slowdown
: Trailing edge clamp arm drive motor
: Leading edge clamp open/close motor (Away)
: Leading edge clamp open/close motor (Home)
: Sensor for detecting multiple plate feeding or loose plate
: Trailing edge clamp arm origin point sensor
: Trailing edge clamp arm end point sensor
: Leading edge clamp open/close origin point sensor (Away)
: Leading edge clamp open/close origin point sensor (Home)
: Leading edge clamp open/close end point sensor (Away)
: Leading edge clamp open/close end point sensor (Home)
: Terminal block
: AC outlet
E-25
E.Reference
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
SL58-2
SL58-1
SL57-1
PH30H
PH30A
KA40
M30H
XT2
M30A
KA2
PH31H
PH20
PH31A
KA1
XT10
M20
KA1
KA2
KA40
LS57-1
LS58-1
LS58-2
M20
M30A
M30H
PH6
PH20
PH21
PH29A
PH29H
PH30A
PH30H
PH31A
PH31H
XT2
XT10
E-26
PH6
PH29H PH29A
PH21 BL40
: Relay for interlock power

: Relay for servomotor ON/OFF power
: Relay for gas suction blower ON/OFF power
: Interlock switch for rear cover
: Trailing edge clamp arm drive motor
: Leading edge clamp open/close motor (Away)
: Leading edge clamp open/close motor (Home)
: Sensor for detecting multiple plate feeding or loose plate
: Leading edge clamp open/close origin point sensor (Away)
: Leading edge clamp open/close origin point sensor (Home)
: Leading edge clamp open/close end point sensor (Away)
: Leading edge clamp open/close end point sensor (Home)
: Terminal block
: AC outlet
E.Reference
3-3. Left side of Main unit
PT-R4300
R1
U6
CON-PTR4
KA3
LS57-4 PMD61
XT3
PMD50
PMD2
U5
S1&FU1
U3
TH1
U2
FAN2
RCP
U1
FAN1
XT4
U9
BZ1
U4
LS4A
SPX32
RB31
E1A
PIO(The back)
BZ1
CON-PTR4(2)
E1A
FAN2
FU1
LS4A
LS57-4
PMD2
PMD50
PMD61
R1
S1
U1
U2
U3
U4
U5
U6
U9
XT3
XT4
TH1
KA3
RCP
RB31
SPX32
PIO
: Buzzer
: CON-PTR4(2) board
: AC servo pack
: Fan
: Fuse for interlock circuits
: Interlock switch for left side cover
: Pulse motor driver (for M2 scanning motor)
: Pulse motor driver (for M50 plate transport motor)
: Pulse motor driver (for M61 plate side alignment motor)
: Enamel resistor
: Maintenance switch
: Switching regulator (5V_100W)
: Switching regulator (-15V_75W)
: Terminal block
: Terminal block
: Temperature sensor
: Relay for operation door interlock
: RCP2 board
: RB31 board
: SPX32 board
: PIO-PTR4(2) board
E-27
E.Reference
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
U7
U5
CON-PTR4
XT3
PMD50 PMD61
R1
PMD2
U6
TH1
U3
FAN2
U2
RCP
FAN1
U1
U4
XT4
BZ1
LS4A
SPX32
RB31
E1A
PIO(The back)
E-28
BZ1
CON-PTR4
E1A
FAN2
LS4A
PMD2
PMD50
PMD61
R1
U1
U2
U3
U4
U5
U6
U7
XT3
XT4
TH1
: Buzzer
: CON-PTR4 board
: AC servo pack
: Fan
: Pulse motor driver (for M2 scanning motor)
: Pulse motor driver (for M50 plate transport motor)
: Pulse motor driver (for M61 plate side alignment motor)
: Enamel resistor
: Terminal block
: Terminal block
RCP
RB31
SPX32
PIO
: RCP2 board
: RB31 board
: SPX32 board
: PIO-PTR4 board
E.Reference
3-4. Rite side of Main unit
PT-R4300
PANEL
SW58
LS56
PH58
M58
QF1
M11H
LS57-3
Z1
PH11-2H
SRGE
PH11-1H
XT1
XT10
CAL-Sens
S0
CAL-sens
ENC1
SRGE
LS57-3
LS56
M1
M11H
M58
PANEL
PH11-1H
PH11-2H
PH58
QF1
SW58
XT0
XT1
Z1
ENC1
M1
: Main switch
: Calibration sensor board
: Rotary encoder
: Serge protection board
: Interlock switch for right side cover
: Interlock switch for operation door
: AC servomotor
: Balancer drive motor
: Touch panel
: Balancer pin position detection sensor1 (Home)
: Circuit protector
: Drum rotation stop switch
: Terminal block (for AC input)
: Terminal block (for SAL/MAL connection)
: Power noise filter
E-29
E.Reference
PT-R400/PT-R4000II
PANEL
SW58
LS57-3
C1
C2
M11H
Z1
PH11-2H
PH11-1H
FV1
QF1
XT1
CAL-Sens
C1
C2
CAL-sens
ENC1
FV1
LS57-3
M1
M11H
PANEL
PH11-1H
PH11-2H
QF1
SW58
XT1
Z1
E-30
ENC1
M1
: Capacitor
: Capacitor
: Calibration sensor board
: Rotary encoder
: Surge absorber
: Interlock switch for right side cover
: AC servomotor
: Balancer drive motor
: Touch panel
: Circuit protector
: Drum rotation stop switch
: Terminal block
: Power noise filter
E.Reference
3-5. Top side of Main unit
PT-R4300
SL53
PH53
PH70
PH50
PH57
M52
PH52
PH54
PH56
PH59
M50
TH1
PH58
M55
PH51
LS56
M50
M52
M55
PH50
PH51
PH51
PH52
PH53
PH54
PH56
PH57
PH58
PH59
PH70
SL53
M58
TH1
M58
LS56

: Plate transport motor
: Nip rollor drive motor
: DC motor for raising/lowreing the transport path
: Sensor for detecting an interleaf on the back of the plate
: Amplifier for the sensor for detecting an interleaf on the back of
the plate
: Nip rollor origin sensor
: Plate pass sensor1 on the plate transport path
: Rotary solenoid for shutter
E-31
E.Reference
PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
SL53
PH53
PH70
PH50
PH57
LS57-3
M52
PH52
M50
PH54
PH56
TH1
M55
PH51
LS56
M50
M52
M55
PH50
PH51
PH51
PH52
PH53
PH54
PH56
PH57
PH70
SL53
TH1
E-32
LS56
SL58

: DC motor for raising/lowreing the transport path
: Amplifier for the sensor for detecting an interleaf on the back of
the plate
E.Reference
3-6. Transport unit of Main unit
PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
SL53
M52
SL59-2
M50
PH51
PH51
PH70
PH55
PH53
PH57
M50
M52
PH51
PH51
PH52
PH53
PH55
PH56
PH57
SL53
SL59-1
SL59-2
SL59-1
PH56

: Amplifier for the sensor for detecting an interleafe on the back
of the plate
: Transport clutch on the plate loading side
: Transport clutch on the plate unloading side
E-33
E.Reference
3-7. Plate side alignment of Main unit
PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
PH61A
PH61H
PH62
M61
PH61A
PH61H
PH62
PH63
M61
PH63
: Plate side alignment drive motor

: Sensor for detecting the Away side edge of a plate for side
alignment
: Sensor for detecting the Home side edge of a plate for side
alignment
: Plate edge detection sensor for the punch unit
: Side alignment origin sensor
3-8. Clamp arm unit of Main unit

PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
PH24-1
PH27-1
PH24-1
PH24-2
PH27-1
PH27-2
PH27-3
M24
E-34
PH27-2
M24
PH27-3
PH24-2
: Trailing edge clamp open/close position sensor

: Trailing edge clamp open/close position sensor
: Trailing edge clamp presence detection sensor
: Trailing edge clamp hook drive motor
E.Reference
3-9. Recording Head Unit PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II
Focus motor driver

Parabolic mirror
PM80
LS80
Zoom lens
PM81
Dew condensation
sensor
Cylindrical lens
Temperature
sensor
Stereographic
projection lens
No.1 Lens
Reflective mirror
Fan for Peltier element

Cooler for Peltier element
LD block
PH84
Stereographic
projection lens
Parabolic mirror
Fainal lens
PH86
PH85
PH82
PH83
Focus motor driver
E-35
E.Reference
3-10. RCP2 board (PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II)
X 166
X 163
X 162
X 161
X 150
X 160
U4
X 159
U13
U14
X 158
TEST
U15
R O M fo r d e b u g in g
X 157
U18
X 156
X 155
CPU
D IP S W 1
X 154
OFF ON
H L 1 -8
H L 9 -1 6
U62
X 153
H L 1 7 -2 4
RESET
H L 2 5 -3 2
ALTERA
X 164
PLL
H L 3 3 -4 0
X 167
X 151
H L 4 1 -4 2
X 152
H L 4 3 -5 1
Connectors marked with tint
E-36
are not used.
E.Reference
U4
U13
U14
U15
U18
X150
X151
X152
X153
X154
X155
X156
X157
X158
X159
X160
X161
X162
X163
X164
X166
X167
RESET
: Program ROM (flash memory)

: Program ROM (flash memory)
: NV RAM (to write data for exposure conditions, error logs and timer settings)
: User data, individual machine data (flash memory)
: User data, individual machine data (flash memory)
: Power supply (+5V, -5V)
: I/F with the PIO-CTP board
: I/F with the RB31 board
: Secondary scanning motors control signal
: I/F with the operation panel
: Not used
: PIF (RS-232C)
: I/F (RS-232C) with the primary scanning motor
: I/F (RS-232C) with the optical head
: I/F (RS-232C) for remote maintenance
: Not used
: Temperature sensor (for machine interior)
: AT unit
: Not used (RS-232C)
: Not used
:Not used
: Not used
: Reset switch
DIPSW1
:
No.1 :Validates the command input from the terminals. (However, this setting
prevents the PT-R4XXX from communicating with the downloader and
the remote maintenance PC.)
No.7: Prevents updating of the machine setting data when the software version
is updated.
No.8: Allows the PT-R4XXX to start up in the Boot mode. (In this mode, only
firmware downloading can be performed.)
TEST
: Short
Open
The ROM for debugging is used.

The Flash ROM is used.
E-37
E.Reference
3-11. RB31 board (PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II)
X 105
X 101
X 100
X 102
Test pattern
generation circuit
X 106
3P
6P
1P
Interlace
control ROM
Test pattern
ROM
X 103
7H
SW 1
H L 1 -5 0

X100
X101
X102
X103
X105
X106
SW1
E-38
are not used.
: Power supply (+5V)

: I/F with the RCP board
: I/F with the PIF
: Beam output to the recording head
: I/F with the SPX32
: Not used
: Reset switch
E.Reference
3-12. SPX32 board (PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II)
X 107
5D
2D
L E D 1 -2 7
are not used.
E-39
E.Reference
3-13. PIO-PTR4(2) board (PT-R4300)
X 111
X 112
TP1
X 110
TP3
TP2
TP4
TP5
TP6
X 122
X 113
TP7
TP9
TP8
T P 10
X 114
T P 11
T P 14
X 116
T P 18
X 125
T P 15
U32
T P 19
X 115
1 2
ALTERA
T P 20
X 118
J2
T P 21
T P 22
T P 24
LED1
19 20
T P 25
T P 26
T P 27
ALTERA
LED7
LED8
T P 28
T P 30
T P 34
X 120
X 117
T P 33
T P 32
T P 31
X 119
VR1
E-40
X 124
are not used.
E.Reference
X110
X111
X112
X113
X114
X115
X116
X117
X118
X119
X120
X122
X124
X125
U32
: Power supply (+5V, +5VE, +-15V, +-15VE, +24V, +24VE)

: Input signal (PH58, PH59, S1)
: I/F with the CON-PTR4 board
: Not used (for the auto loader)
: For debugging
: Primary scanning motor positioning signal output
: Test pin for debugging
: I/F for controlling the primary scanning motor
: Encoder input
: Blower vacuum pressure sensor input (digital signal)
: Loose plate detection sensor input (analog signal)
: Servo pack power supply (for the primary scanning motor) ON output
: Program ROM for hardware
E-41
E.Reference
PIO-PTR4 board (PT-R4000/PT-R4000II)
X 111
X 112
TP1
X 110
TP3
TP2
TP4
TP5
TP6
X 122
TP7
TP9
TP8
T P 10
X 114
T P 11
T P 14
X 116
T P 18
X 125
T P 15
U32
T P 19
X 115
1 2
ALTERA
T P 20
X 118
J2
T P 21
T P 22
T P 24
LED1
19 20
T P 25
T P 26
T P 27
ALTERA
LED7
LED8
T P 28
T P 30
T P 34
X 120
X 117
T P 33
T P 32
T P 31
X 119
VR1
E-42
X 124
are not used.
E.Reference
X110
X111
X112
X114
X115
X116
X117
X118
X119
X120
X122
X124
X125
U32
: power supply (+5V, +5VE, +-15V, +-15VE, +24V, +24VE)

: I/F with the CON-PTR4 board
: Not used (for the auto loader)
: For debugging
: Primary scanning motor positioning signal output
: Test pin for debugging
: I/F for controlling the primary scanning motor
: Encoder input
: Blower vacuum pressure sensor input (digital signal)
: Loose plate detection sensor input (analog signal)
: Servo pack power supply (for the primary scanning motor) ON output
: Program ROM for hardware
E-43
E.Reference
3-14. CON-PTR4 board (PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II)
LED2A
LED4A
LED6A
LED8A
LED10A
LED7H
LED14A
LED16A
LED14H
LED20A
LED22A
LED2H
LED4H
LED16H
LED30A
LED32A
LED34A
LED30H
LED32H
LED42A
LED44H
LED24H
LED26H
LED24A
TP2
LED1A
LED3H
LED5A
LED7A
LED9A
LED11A
LED13A
LED15A
LED13H
LED19A
LED21A
LED1H
LED3A
LED15H
LED29A
LED31A
LED33A
LED29H
LED17H
LED21H
LED43A
LED23H
LED25H
LED23A
X23
TP5
TP3
TP6 TP7 TP8
TP9
FU10
JP3
FU2
FU9
C07
C04
CB1
C06
FU11
C02
C03
C05
CO9
C08
TP4
CP1
CA4
JP1
JP2
CA1
CH1
CA2
CA3
CS1
X11
CP2
TP1
E-44
are not used.
E.Reference
CA1
CA2
CA3
CA4
CH1
CS1
CP1
CP2
CB1
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO47
CO5
CO6
CO7
CO8
CO9
FU1
FU2
FU3
FU4
FU5
FU6
FU7
FU8
FU9
FU10
FU11
LED1A
LED1H
LED2A
LED2H
LED3A
LED3H
LED4A
LED4H
LED5A
LED6A
: PH11-1A, PH11-2A, PH10A, PH30A, PH31A, PH21, PH24-1, PH24-2, PH27-1,

PH27-2, PH27-3
: PH56, PH57, PH61A, PH61H, PH63, PH62, PH70
: PH50, PH52, PH54, PH53, PH55
: PH29A, PH29H, PH51, LS28-1 to LS28-6, PD_READY, PD_ERROR, AT-ON
: PH11-1H, PH11-2H, PH10H, PH20, PH30H, PH31H, LS4H, LS4A, PH2
: LS57-1, LS57-2, LS57-3, LS58-1, LS58-2, SW58
: M60-1, M60-2, M60-3, M60-4, M60-5, M60-6
: SB60-1, SB60-2, SB60-3, SB60-4, SB60-5, SB60-6
: Drum suction blower ON/OFF, Inverter reset, Inverter alarm (INVALM)
Fan for the inverter (spare)
: M11A, M20, M30A, M24, M11H, M30H
: M52, SL53, SL59-1, SL59-2, SL58
: Blower pump, Alarm buzzer, Gas suction blower
: M50
: M61
: M2
: M55
: Not used
: Not used
: Nip rollor drive motor M52
: Balancer drive motor (Away) M11A
: Trailing edge clamp arm drive motor M20
: Leading edge clamp open/close motor (Away) M30A
: Trailing edge clamp hook drive motor M24
: Balancer drive motor (Home) M11H
: Leading edge clamp open/close motor (Home) M30H
: Motor for operation door M58 (PT-R4300)
: DC motor for raising/lowreing the transport path M55
: Solenoid for transport unit
Rotary solenoid for shutter SL53
Transport clutch on the plate loading side SL59-1
Transport clutch on the plate unloading side SL59-2
Operation door solenoid SL58 (PT-R4000/PT-R4000II)
: Vacuum pump M41
An automatic return type over-current protection element
: PH11-1A (Balancer pin position detection sensor 1 (Away))
: PH11-1H (Balancer pin position detection sensor 1 (Home))
: PH11-2A (Balancer pin sensor 2 (Away))
: PH11-2H (Balancer pin sensor 2 (Home))
: Processor ready (PD_READY)
: PH20 (Trailing edge clamp arm origin sensor
: PH21 (Trailing edge clamp arm end point sensor)
: Processor error (PD_ERROR)
: PH24-1 (Trailing edge clamp open/close position sensor 1)
: PH24-2 (Trailing edge clamp open/close position sensor 2)
E-45
E.Reference
LED7A
LED7H
LED8A
LED9A
LED10A
LED11A
LED13A
LED13H
LED14A
LED14H
LED15A
LED15H
LED16A
LED16H
LED17H
LED19A
LED20A
LED21A
LED21H
LED22A
LED22H
LED23A
LED23H
LED24A
LED24H
LED25H
LED26H
LED29A
LED29H
LED30A
LED30H
LED31A
LED32A
LED33A
LED34A
LED42A
LED43A
LED44A
E-46
: PH10A (Balancer weight detection sensor (Away))

: PH10H (Balancer weight detection sensor (Home))
: LS28-1 to LS28-6 (Hook lever switch) (PT-R4000 S/N35 or lower)
: PH27-1 (Trailing edge clamp presence detection sensor 1)
: PH30A (Leading edge clamp open/close origin sensor (Away))
: PH30H (Leading edge clamp open/close origin sensor (Home))
: PH31A (Leading edge clamp open/close end point sensor (Away))
: PH31H (Leading edge clamp open/close end point sensor (Home))
: PH50 (Plate pass sensor on the plate-loading path)
: LS4H (Scanning start point limiter)
: PH52 (Nip rollor origin sensor)
: LS4A (Scanning end point limiter)
: PH2 (Scanning origin sensor)
: PH54 (Plate pass sensor on the plate transport path)
: PH53 (Shutter origin sensor)
: PH55 (Transport path change lower limit sensor)
: PH51 (Sensor for detecting an interleaf on the back of the plate)
: PH56 (Transport path change upper limit sensor)
: Reserve input
: SB60-5 (Punch 5 origin sensor)
: PH61A (Sensor for detecting the Away side edge of a plate for side alignment)
: PH61H (Sensor for detecting the Home side edge of a plate for side alignment)
: PH63 (Side alignment origin sensor)
: PH62 (Plate edge detection sensor for the punch unit)
: PH70 (AT unit plate detection sensor)
: LS56 (Operation door interlock switch)
: PH57 (Transport path punch position sensor)
: PH29A (Plate top side detection sensor (Away))
: PH29H (Plate top side detection sensor (Home))
E.Reference
3-15. Laser Head CPU board (PT-R4300, PT-R4000, PT-R4000II)
X 820
X 819
+15V AG N D
24G A +24VB
-5 V
24G B
X 813
X 811
-1 5 V
X 812
X 815
X 814
X 810
+24VA
DGND
-5 V G
J P 1 -7
+5V
DSW 1
CLK1
CLK2
ALTERA
U2
VR2 VR1
SW 1
HL2 HL1
U2
: DATA ROM
X810
X811
X812
X813
X814
X815
X819
X820
SW1
VR1
VR2
: Image data from the RB31 board

: RS232C for command communication
: Calibration sensor input
: Laser diode block sensor input (from the laser head relay board)
: Focus motor drive output
: Zoom motor drive output
: Mother board connection
: Mother board connection
: CPU reset switch
: For the temperature sensor input adjustment (Resolution)
: For the temperature sensor input adjustment (Offset values)
JP1
JP2
JP3
JP4
JP5
JP6
JP7
: Switches the methods for resetting the CPU

: Switches the methods for command communication
E-47
E.Reference
3-16. Laser Head Driver board (PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II)
X 832
X 833
AGND
+24G P
DGND
+5V
+15V
-1 5 V
-5 V G
-5 V
+24V
X 831
VR2 VR1
X 830
X830
X831
X832
X833
: LD drive signal output

: Peltier element control signal connection
: Mother ba\oard connection
: Mother ba\oard connection
VR1 : For adjusting the Peltier elements control voltage to 0V

VR2 : For adjusting the Peltier elements control voltage to its maximum
value
Drive board and its supporting LD channels
Driver board 1
:26, 19, 12, 05, 06, 13, 20, 27
Driver board 2
:28, 21, 14, 07, 00, 15, 22, 29
Driver board 3
:08, 01, 30, 23, 16, 09, 02, 31
Driver board 4
:24, 17, 10, 03, 04, 11, 18, 25
(The driver boards are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4, from
the one closest to the CPU board)
E-48
E.Reference
3-17. Laser Head Mother board (PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II)
X 808
X 801
X 802 X 803
X 807
X 819
X 800
X 806
X 804 X 805
X 820
X 8 3 2 -1
X 8 3 3 -1
X 8 3 2 -2
X 8 3 3 -2
X 8 3 2 -3
X 8 3 3 -3
X 8 3 2 -4
X 8 3 3 -4
X800 : LD drive power supply (-5V)

X801 : Power supply input for substrate control
X802 : Cooler fans power supply for Peltier element
X803
X804
X805
X806
X807
X808
: Fan power supply (for cooling the driver board)

: Fan power supply (for cooling the driver board) (Not used)
: Fan power supply (for cooling the driver board)
: Head cover switch input
: Power supply control output for LD drive
: Power supply input for a peltier drive
X819_X820
X832-1_X833-1
X832-2_X833-2
X832-3_X833-3
X832-4_X833-4
: For CPU board

: For driver 1 board
E-49
E.Reference
3-18. Laser Head Relay board (PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-r4000II)
LD 1
X 840
X 844
X 849
X 843
X 842
X 841
TH1
X 845
XCH04 XCH11
XCH03 XCH10
X 847
X 848
XCH18 XCH25
XCH17 XCH24 XCH31
XCH02 XCH09 XCH16 XCH23 XCH30
XCH01 XCH08 XCH15 XCH22 XCH29
XCH00 XCH07
XCH14 XCH21 XCH28
XCH06 XCH13 XCH20 XCH27
XCH05
E-50
XCH12 XCH19 XCH26
E.Reference
X841
X842
X843
X844
X840
X849
LD1
: LD drive signal 1 input

: Sensor signal output (to CPU)
: Socket for inserting the short-circuit connector to prevent static
electricity
: -5V power supply monitor
X845
X847
X848
TH1
: Temperature sensor input for the LD block

: Sensor input for detecting tha Fin temperature on the Peltier unit
: Sensor input for detecting dew condensation in the LD block
XCH00 to XCH31 : LD (laser diode) channels
E-51
E.Reference
3-19. Laser Diode Array Block (PT-R4300/PT-R4000/PT-R4000II)
Ch11
Ch4
Ch25
Ch18
Ch31
Ch0
Ch5
Ch19
Ch12
E-52
Ch26
E.Reference
4. Maintenance software RMLight4

4-1.Outline
The RMLight4 maintenance software is installed in the following machines to perform data
downloading and uploading.
*PT-R8000
*PT-R8000II
*PT-R8600
*PT-R4000
*PT-R4000II
*PT-R4300
The RMLight maintenance software that has been used for the PT-R8000 and PT-R4000
cannot be used with the PT-R8600, PT-R8000II, PT-R4000 (Ver. 4.00 or later), PT-R4000II,
or PT-R4300.
4-2.Requirements
1) Terminal
Terminal environment
OS: Windows 95 or Windows 98
2) Cable
Cable specification
Specification : RS232C straight cable (Normal)
Model
Connection
: D-sub9P plug, D-sub9P plug

: All
3) RMLight4 maintenance software for PT-R

RMLight4.exe, RMLight.cfg
CATION!
The RMLight.cfg file is a cfg file for RMLight4 and is prepared for each machine type.
When using the RMLight.cfg file for another machine type, change the contents of
the file as noted below.
[ID]
Product="PT-RXXXX"
Vendor="SCREEN"
Protectcode="SUPERSONIC"
For PT-R4000
Product = PT-R4000
For PT-R4000II
Product = PT-R4000
For PT-R4300
Product = PT-R4300
For PT-R8000
Product = PT-R8000
For PT-R8000II
Product = PT-R8600
For PT-R8600
Product = PT-R8600
E-53
E.Reference
4-3.Terminal setting
Terminal setting is not necessary as it is set automatically.
4-4.Installation of RMLight4
1) Prepare the following two files. (Total: 49 kbyte)
RMLight4.exe, RMLight.cfg
CATION!
The RMLight.cfg file is a cfg file for RMLight4.
2) Save the above two files in the same directory on the terminal.
4-5.Connecting the terminal to the main unit

1) Connect the communication cable to the communication port of the terminal.
2) Connect the communication cable to the PC port, which is circled in the figure below.
Rear side of the main unit(PT-R4XXX)
E-54
E.Reference
4-6.Procedure for downloading the PT-R firmware
CATION!
1. Confirm that all DIP switches on the RCP board are off.
2. When the panel data is also downloaded at the same time, first download the panel
data.
3. Be sure to perform downloading while the main unit panel displays the following
screen, which appears immediately after the power is supplied to the main unit.
0101
P T- R 4 X X X
START
'01.05.01
V1.00
1) Prepare the following PT-R4XXX firmware files. There are two files for the PT-R4300 and
PT-R4000II and one file for the PT-R4000.
For PT-R4300 (Ver. 1.00, As of May 7, 2002)
F43_100.dat: Main firmware
S43_100.dat: Messages
For PT-R4000II (Ver. 4.03, As of April 4, 2002)
Fir4_403.dat: Main firmware
Str4_403.dat: Messages
For PT-R4000 (Ver. 3.05, As of April 4, 2002)
Fir4_305.dat: Main firmware
2) Execute RMLight4.exe. The window shown in step 3 appears.
3) Upload UserData and MachData by referring to 8-2 Procedure for data upload.
E-55
E.Reference
4) After UserData and MachData have been uploaded, click Download in the window below.
5) Select the data to be downloaded and click the Open button. The window shown in step 6
appears.
The figure above is an example of the PT-R4300 Ver. 1.00.

As mentioned earlier, there are two firmware files for the PT-R4000 (Ver. 4.00 or later) and the
PT-R4000II. You can install either file first.
The PT-R4000 requires one file only.
6) Click OK to start downloading of the selected data.
During downloading, the following window is displayed.
E-56
E.Reference
The following screen is displayed in the main unit panel during downloading.
7) When the data has been downloaded, the following window appears. Click OK to display
the window shown in step 8.
PT-R4300 Ver. 1.00

F43_100.dat (Approx. 12 min.)
S43_100.dat (Approx. 3 min.)
8) When the following window appears, turn the power supply to the main unit off and then on
again.
9) For the PT-R4000 (Ver. 4.00 or later) and the PT-R4000II, download the other file by
following from step 4 onwards.
Download for the PT-R4000 has been completed.
10) Download UserData and MachData that were uploaded in step 3 as necessary by referring to
4-8-3 Procedure for data download.
E-57
E.Reference
4-7.Procedure for downloading the PT-R panel data
CATION!
2. When the panel data is also downloaded at the same time, first download the panel
data.
3. Be sure to perform downloading while the main unit panel displays the following
screen, which appears immediately after the power is supplied to the main unit.
0101
P T- R 4 X X X
START
'01.05.01
V1.00
1) Prepare the following file for the PT-R panel data.

For PT-R4000 (Ver. 4.00, As of May 7, 2002)
PanelDif_v506_v500.dat
3) Click Download in the window below. The window shown in step 4 appears.
E-58
E.Reference
appears.
The figure above is an example of the PT-R4000 Ver. 3.01.
5) Click OK to start downloading of the selected data.
E-59
E.Reference
Download time
PT-R4000 Ver. 3.01: Approx. 4 min.
again.
E-60
E.Reference
4-8.Uploading or downloading the PT-Rs machine specific value data
4-8-1.Data types that can be uploaded or downloaded
Exposure condition settings, error logs, and consumable timer data cannot be uploaded.
CATION!
The NV RAM data (exposure conditions, error logs, and consumables timer) cannot be
uploaded.
To transfer the NV RAM data, refer to page C-72.
1) UserData
User data
Printing machine setting (1 to 15)
Plate setting (1 to 15)
Plate type setting (1 to 15, 30 to 45)
Punch data (punch name and Set punch data setting in the Service Maintenance screen)
2) MachData
The data saved in the following menus of the Service Maintenance screen.
Initialize data / Select brand
Input parameter / Set Correction data
Input parameter / Drum base position
Input parameter / Punch adjust
Input parameter / Calibration position
Input parameter / Set misc. data
Input parameter / Set resolution
Input parameter / Set weight
Input parameter / RH parameter / Auto calibration
3) HeadData
A binary file that is composed of the three data types (HeadData_CPU, HeadData_DRV1,
and HeadData_DRV2) described in 4, 5, and 6 below.
The recording head data of the PT-R4300, PT-R4000, PT-R4000II, PT-R8000, or PT-R8000II
are saved in HeadData.
Only the PT-R8600 can save each datum individually.
E-61
E.Reference
7) LogList
A list of the dates and times when the sequence log data Log 0 to Log 23 described in 8
below are obtained. A sample LogList is shown below.
0 08/28 08:47:00
1 08/27 16:21:01
2 08/27 16:13:51
3 08/27 15:00:42
4 08/27 14:09:34
5 08/27 13:45:45
6 08/27 12:18:03
7 08/24 15:46:00
8 08/23 17:19:00
9 32767 byte
10 08/23 16:44:17
11 empty
12 empty
13 32767 byte
14 08/23 15:41:00
15 08/23 13:51:00
16 08/23 09:52:00
17 08/23 08:54:00
18 32767 byte
19 08/22 13:22:00
20 08/17 10:53:27
21 08/17 10:14:58
22 08/16 18:16:21
23 empty
8) Log 0 to Log 23
Sequence log data. A maximum of 23 log data can be stored in the PT-Rs memory. Note
that the size of each log data is 33 kbyte.
E-62
E.Reference
4-8-2.Procedure for data upload
CATION!
2. Be sure to perform uploading while the main unit panel displays the following screen,
which appears immediately after the power is supplied to the main unit.
0101
P T- R 4 X X X
START
'01.05.01
V1.00
2)
Click Upload in the window below. The window shown in step 3 appears.
3) Select the data to be uploaded in the following window and click OK.
For data types, refer to the previous section (8-1). The window shown in step 4 appears.
E-63
E.Reference
4) Select the directory in which the data is to be saved, enter the file name, and then click the
Save button. The window shown in step 5 appears.
Default file name: type of data_date.dat

The sample window above is displayed when UserData is uploaded.
5) Click OK in the following window to start uploading of the data.
During uploading, the following window is displayed.
The following screen is displayed in the main unit panel during uploading.
E-64
E.Reference
6) When the data has been uploaded, the following window appears.
Upload time of each data

- UserData: Approx. 1.5 min.
- MachData: Approx. 30 sec.
- HeadData: Approx. 2.5 min.
- LogList: Approx. 10 sec.
- Log 0 to Log 23: Approx. 1 min. for each
For PT-R8600 only
-HeadData_CPU: Approx. 1 min.
-HeadData_DRV1: Approx. 1 min.
-HeadData_DRV2: Approx. 1 min.
CATION!
Do not rewrite or change the uploaded files.
When a file is downloaded, RMLight checks the file and confirms the type of data, then
automatically determines where to save the data.
E-65
E.Reference
4-8-3.Procedure for data download
CATION!
2. Be sure to perform uploading while the main unit panel displays the following screen,
which appears immediately after the power is supplied to the main unit.
0101
P T- R 4 X X X
START
'01.05.01
V1.00
3. Do not rewrite or change the uploaded files.

When a file is downloaded, RMLight checks the file and confirms the type of data,
then automatically determines where to save the data.
2) Click Download in the window below. The window shown in step 3 appears.
E-66
E.Reference
appears.
The sample window above is displayed when UserData is downloaded.

4) Click OK to start downloading.
E-67
E.Reference
- UserData: Approx. 1.5 min.

- MachData: Approx. 30 sec.
- HeadData: Approx. 2.5 min.
For PT-R8600 only
-HeadData_CPU: Approx. 2 min.
-HeadData_DRV1: Approx. 30 sec.
-HeadData_DRV2: Approx. 30 sec.
again.
E-68
0 .5 A
S1
L S 5 7 -1
LS56
U 9 (2 4 V /3 0 W )
XT0
L S 5 7 -2
L S 5 7 -3
L D D rive r
L S 5 7 -4
U 6 (5 V /3 0 0 W )
M a in S w itc h
RC
S1
KA1
S0
H ead CPU
S u rg e P ro te c to r B o a rd
SRGE
E 1A
U 4 (2 4 V /3 0 0 W )
24V
H ead
S e n s o r,L im it S w itc h ,P a n e l
Fan
XT1
U 5 (2 4 V /3 0 0 W )
A c tu a to r
U 3 (1 5 V /7 5 W )
C irc u it P ro te c to r
QF1
-1 5 V
15
A
15
A
KA3
P IO ,T e m p e ra tu re s e n s o r
KA1
U 2 (1 5 V /7 5 W )
+15V
N o is e F iltte r
Z1
5V
R C P 2 ,R B 3 1 ,P IO
U 1 (5 V /1 0 0 W )
5V
C O N ,H e a d C P U
E.Reference
L S 5 7 -1 : R e a r c o ve r in te rlo c k s w itc h
L S 5 7 -2 : F ro n t c o ve r in te rlo c k s w itc h
L S 5 7 -3 : H o m e c o ve r in te rlo c k s w itc h
L S 5 7 -4 : A w a y c o ve r in te rlo c k s w itc h
L S 5 6 : O p e ra tio n d o o r in te rlo c k s w itc h
S 1 : M a in te n a n c e k e y s w itc h
A C S e rv o D rive r
KA2
KA3
5. Power supply and interlocks (for PT-R4300)
FU1
S in g le p h a s e
A C 2 0 0 -2 4 0 V
5 0 /6 0 H z
E-69
F. Error list
F.Error list
PT-R4300 : Ver1.00
1. Error list (PT-R4300 : Ver1.00)

Ex101 : Nip roller does not ascend.
Ex102 : Nip roller does not descend.
Ex103 : Transport unit does not ascend.
Ex104 : Transport unit does not descend.
Ex105 : Trail clamp arm does not ascend.
Ex106 : Trail clamp arm does not descend.
Ex107 : Squeeze roller does not descend.
Ex108 : Squeeze roller does not ascend.
Ex109 : Trail clamp cannot be locked. PH24-1/2 or M24 is illegal.
Ex10a : Trail clamp cannot be unlocked. PH24-1/2 or M24 is illegal.
Ex10b : Balancer drive pin cannot be initialized.
Ex10c : The both of Home and Away side drive pin for the balancer can not be pulled
out.
Ex10d : The both of Home and Away side drive pin for the balancer can not be inserted.)
Ex10e : Bar for releasing the lead clamp does not ascend.
Ex10f : Bar for releasing the lead clamp does not descend.
Ex110 : Shutter does not open.
Ex111 : Shutter does not close.
Ex112 : Plate size (in the Y direction) is shorter than the set value.
Ex113 : When the plate is unloaded, the plate pass sensor (PH54-2) does not switch to
ON.
Ex114 : Not bring down squeeze at loading.
Ex115 : Plate size (in the Y direction) is longer than the set value.
Ex116 : Servo status is illegal.
Ex117 : Servo status is error.
Ex118 : Servo alarm.
Ex11a : Drum speed is set beyond the permitted rate of the servo controller.
Ex11b : Current drum's encoder pulse is beyond 4000.
Ex11c : Error has occurred during drum positioning.
Ex11d : When the clamp is locked, some tail clamps are detected on the clamp arm, or
when the clamp is unlocked, some tail clamps are not detected on the clamp
arm.
Ex11e : Drum's encoder pulse is beyond the permitted range after drum positioning.
Ex11f : Plate cannot be transferred into the transport unit.
Ex120 : Home side balancer pin cannot be detected before insertion
Ex121 : Home side balancer pin cannot be detected before pulled out (The balancer is
not moving).
Ex122 : Clamp arm and squeeze roller do not descend.
Ex123 : Trail clamp is half-locked.
Ex124 : The plate passing-sensor for unloading (PH54) does not switch to ON.
Ex125 : Time-out error has occurred when the squeeze roller ascends and clamp cam
F-1
PT-R4300 : Ver1.00
F.Error list
descends simultaneously.
Ex126 : There was no plate to move to the shutter.
Ex127 : Servo controller does not enter the "Ready" status.
Ex128 : The balancer search sensor has not detected a balancer.
Ex129 : Error has occurred on the Home side of the alignment plate (while the alignment
plate is returning to its origin).
Ex12a : Error has occurred on the Away side of the alignment plate (while the alignment
Ex12b : Error has occurred on the Home and Away sides of the alignment plate (while
the alignment plate is returning to its origin).
Ex12c : Error has occurred on the Home side of the alignment plate (while alignment is
performed).
Ex12d : Error has occurred on the alignment plate (while alignment is performed).
Ex12e : Error has occurred on the Home and Away sides of the alignment plate (when
alignment is performed).
Ex12f : Plate has not transferred to the punch unit.
Ex130 : Plate does not leave the punch unit.
Ex131 : Time-out error has occurred when Punch 1 is activated.
Ex139 : After a plate is transferred to the gripper clamp, the plate detection sensor
(PH29H/A) does not switch to ON.
Ex13a : When the clamp arm is lowered, the sensor (to detect whether the clamp arm
pins are hooked on the clamp properly) has been turned ON.(Home side)
Ex13b : The specified encoder pulse for the drum is beyond 4000.
Ex13c : The transport unit's Away side is not moving during its operation.
Ex13d : The transport unit's Home side is not moving during its operation.
Ex13e : Error has occurred on the Home side of the alignment plate (while the alignment
plate is finely returning to its origin).
Ex13f : Error has occurred on the Away side of the alignment plate (while the alignment
Ex140 : Error has occurred on the Home and Away side of the alignment plate (while the
alignment plate is returning to its origin).
Ex141 : A plate remains in the transport unit when the machine received a request
command.
Ex142 : A plate remains in the transport unit during error handling.
Ex143 : A plate remains on the discharge table in the transport unit.
Ex144 : A plate remains on the insertion table in the transport unit.
F-2
F.Error list
PT-R4300 : Ver1.00
Ex145 : Plate cannot be moved onto the discharge table during initialization.
Ex146 : Plate cannot be moved onto the insertion table.
Ex147 : Balancer search operation has not been completed properly.
Ex148 : When the transport unit descends, only the Home side Down sensor in the
transport unit is turned ON.
Ex149 : When the transport unit descends, only the Away side Down sensor in the
Ex14a : When the transport unit ascends, only the Home side UP sensor in the transport
unit is turned ON.
Ex14b : When the transport unit ascends, only the Away side UP sensor in the transport
unit is turned ON.
Ex14c : Front, rear or side cover is open.(Some interlock switches are OFF.)
Ex14d : A fuse on the relay board was blown. (home)
Ex14e : Thumbscrew is not tightened securely on the rear cover. (The servo stop switch
is ON.)
Ex14f : A plate exists on the discharge table in the transport unit during initialization.
Ex150 : A plate exists on the insertion table in the transport unit during initialization.
Ex151 : Number of balancers is not sufficient. (The number of balancers checked by the
balancer search sensor was one, two or three for both the Home and Away
sides.)
Ex152 : Clamp arm is not in the UP position.
Ex153 : A fuse on the relay board was blown. (away)
Ex154 : Blower is turned off, but signal does not change.
Ex155 : Tail clamps are missing during initialization.
Ex156 : The size check program of the cetering function detects that the measured plate
size is longer than the expected one.
size is shorter than the expected one.
Ex158 : Both of Home and Away size check sensors are on before starting the centering
program.
Ex159 : Auto-loader is stopped by a interlock OFF.
Ex15a : This hardware matching is illegal.
Ex15b : The balancer is not moved to the target position.
Ex15c : The drum can not be spun up because the Home-Upper sensor of the Lead
clamp release bar is off.
Ex15d : During plate loading, double plate loading is detected.
Ex15e : The loaded plate is detected to be floating while drum spinning.
Ex15f : The drum cannot be spun up because the Upper sensor of the clamp arm is off.
Ex160 : The drum can not be spined up because the Home-Upper sensor of the clamp
arm is off.
Ex161 : The drum cannot be spun up because the balancing pin on the (Away side) is
not in the waiting position.
Ex162 : The drum cannot be spun up because the balancing pin on the (Home side) is
F-3
PT-R4300 : Ver1.00
F.Error list

Ex163 : The drum cannot be spun up because the Upper sensor of the squeeze roller is
off.
Ex164 : The drum can not be spun up because the Away-Upper sensor of the Lead
Ex165 : The drum is rotated to the "lead clamp position", but the status of the Servo
controller (SVC) has not changed to "Ready".
Ex166 : The drum is rotated to the "tail clamp position", but the status of the Servo
Ex167 : The drum is rotated to the "squeeze position", but the status of the Servo
Ex168 : The drum is rotated to the "balance pin before inserted", but the status of the
Servo controller (SVC) has not changed to "Ready".
Ex169 : The drum is rotated to the "balance pin after inserted", but the status of the
Ex16a : The drum is rotated to the "pick up tail clamp position", but the status of Servo
Ex16b : The drum is rotated to the "plate removal position", but the status of the Servo
Ex16c : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the lead clamp.
Ex16d : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the tail clamp.
Ex16e : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the squeeze.
Ex16f : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the balance pin insertion.
Ex170 : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the balance pin pull out.
Ex171 : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the picking up tail clamp.
Ex172 : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the plate removal.
Ex173 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Lead clamp position)
Ex174 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Tail clamp position)
Ex175 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Squeeze position)
Ex176 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Balance pin before
inserted)
Ex177 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Balance pin after
inserted)
Ex178 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Pick up tail clamp)
Ex179 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Plate removal)
Ex17a : After verifying the removal of the plate, press the OK button.
When the OK button is pressed, initialization begins.
Ex17b : PH62A-sensor is illegal. The sensor detects a plate during initialization.
Ex17c : PH29H-sensor is illegal. The PH29H-sensor does not turn ON during
initialization.
Ex17d : PH61H-sensor is illegal. The sensor detects a plate during initialization.
Ex17e : PH61A-sensor is illegal. The sensor detects a plate during initialization.
Ex17f : PH29A-sensor is illegal. The PH29A-sensor does not turn ON during
F-4
F.Error list
PT-R4300 : Ver1.00
initialization.
Ex180 : Drum does not start rotating at high-speed.
Ex181 : Drum does not rotate at the specified high-speed.
Ex182 : Error has occurred after the drum rotated at the specified high-speed.
Ex183 : Drum cannot be stopped when rotating at high-speed.
Ex184 : Drum operation is stopped with an emergency stop command.
Ex185 : Drum operation is stopped with an abort command.
Ex186 : Drum's vacuum pressure is not sufficient. Please confirm connection of the
blower-hose, or the Vacuum-sensor is illegal.
Ex187 : Error has occurred on the blower, or the power supply of the blower is OFF.
Ex188 : Drum operation is stopped due to low pressure in the drum.
Ex189 : Door is open.
Ex18a : Door does not open.
Ex18b : Transport tasks: Parameter error
Ex18c : Error has occured on the blower. Please turn off this machine, and turn on after
waiting 10 seconds. Also, confirm whether or not the connector doesn't come
off.
Ex18d : The drum can not be spun up, because some of the interlock switches are OFF,
or some of the actuator's sensors are damaged, or the blower is damaged.
Ex18e : Door does not open, because some of the interlock switches are OFF(front
cover or rear cover is open).
Ex190 : Clamp arm does not descend.(Home side)
Ex191 : Clamp arm does not descend.(Away side)
Ex192 : Clamp arm does not ascend.(Home side)
Ex193 : Clamp arm does not ascend.(Away side)
Ex194 : When the clamp arm is lowered, the sensor (to detect whether the clamp arm
pins are hooked on the clamp properly) has been turned ON.(Away side)
Ex195 : Trail clamp cannot be locked.(Home side)
Ex196 : Trail clamp cannot be locked.(Away side)
Ex197 : Trail clamp cannot be unocked.(Home side)
Ex198 : Trail clamp cannot be unocked.(Away side)
Ex199 : Balancer drive pin cannot be inserted.(Home side)
Either of PH11-1H,PH11-2H or M11H is illegal.
Ex19a : Balancer drive pin cannot be inserted.(Away side)
Either of PH11-1A,PH11-2A or M11A is illegal.
Ex19b : Balancer drive pin cannot be pulled out.(Home side)
Ex19c : Balancer drive pin cannot be pulled out.(Away side)
Ex19d : Balancer pin cannot be detected before insertion.(Away side)
Ex19e : Balancer pin cannot be detected before pull out (the balancer is not
moving).(Away side)
Ex19f : The balancer search sensor has not detected a balancer.(Home side)
F-5
PT-R4300 : Ver1.00
F.Error list
Ex1a0 : The balancer search sensor has not detected a balancer.(Away side)
Ex1a1 : Number of balancers is not sufficient. (Home side)
Ex1a2 : Number of balancers is not sufficient. (Away side)
Ex1a3 : Soft-interlock or drum-stop swtich is OFF during drum spining.
Ex1a4 : The cover-interlock switch is OFF during drum spining.
Ex1a5 : The interlock switch-3 is OFF during drum spining.
Ex1a6 : A plate cannot be carried into the transport unit.
Ex1a7 : A plate cannot be carried to sensor PPH50-2.
Ex1a8 : Auto-loader is not turned on, or some interlock switches on Auto-loader are
OFF. Please turn on Auto-loader, or all interlock switch.
Ex1a9 : Cassete carrier was removed. Please set cassette carrier.
Ex1aa : The door of the cassette part is open.
Ex1ab : Maintenance-cover of Auto-loader was opend. Please clode
maintenance-cover.
Ex1ac : Bridge cover-2 was opened. Please clode bridge cover-2.
Ex1ad : An interleaf under a plate was detected. Or a plate size (in the Y direction) is
shorter than the set value.
Ex1ae : An interleaf was detected on a plate. Or a plate size (in the Y direction) is shorter
than the set value.
Ex1b0 : Trail clamp is not detected on the clamp arm before the plate loading.
Ex1b1 : Trail clamp is detected on the clamp arm before the plate unloading.
Ex1b2 : Trail clamp cannot be set correctly.
Ex1b3 : This plate can't be transed. Because something error has occured when the
transfering to AT.
Ex1b4 : This plate can't be transed. Because trans path position is down.
Ex1b6 : The bridge-passing sensor does not turn OFF.(for Jig mode)
Ex1b7 : A plate remains on the plate detection sensor(PH70).
Ex1b8 : When detects the front of a plate, the detection area is not brought.
Ex1b9 : When detects the front of a plate, the detection of Home or Away is not brought.
Ex1ba : PH11-2H-sensor is illegal. The PH11-2H-sensor does not turn ON during
initialization.
Ex1bb : PH11-2A-sensor is illegal. The PH11-2A-sensor does not turn ON during
initialization.
Ex1c0 : Lead clamp release bar cannot be driven. Either PH30H or PH31H is illegal.
Ex1c1 : Lead clamp release bar cannot be driven. Either PH30A or PH31A is illegal.
Ex1c2 : Trans path cannot be driven. Either PH55, PH56, or PH57 is illegal.
Ex1c3 : Trans path cannot be driven. Either PH56, or, PH57 is illegal.
Ex1c6 : Trail clamp arm cannot be driven. Either PH20 or PH21 is illegal.
Ex1c7 : Trail clamp arm cannot be driven. Either PH20 or M20 is illegal.
Ex1c8 : An interleaf was detected under a plate.
Ex1c9 : When centering alignment is performed, the plate set position is out of range.
F-6
F.Error list
PT-R4300 : Ver1.00
Ex1ca : Error has occured on the punching unit. The punch hole could not be opened
correctly.
Ex1cb : Opened shutter obstructs trans path driving.
Ex1cc : Trail clamp arm obstructs trans path driving.
Ex1cd : A plate remains in a maichine.
Ex1d0 : Transfer operation is halted with an abort command.
Ex1d1 : Transport tasks are being processed.
Ex1d2 : Transport tasks are not being processed.
Ex1d3 : Transport tasks: Message order error
Ex1d4 : Transport system is not initialized.
Ex1e0 : SVC user parameter breakdown
Ex1e1 : SVC user parameter setting error
Ex1e2 : SVC over-current
Ex1e3 : SVC detection of regenerative error
Ex1e4 : SVC postion error pulse overflow
Ex1e5 : SVC Main circuit voltage error detection
Ex1e6 : SVC overspeed
Ex1e7 : SVC overloaded (high load)
Ex1e8 : SVC overloaded (low load)
Ex1e9 : SVC stauts 99h
Ex1ea : SVC heat sink has overheated.
Ex1eb : SVC stauts b1h
Ex1ec : SVC is out of control.
Ex1ed : SVC phase error has been detected in the encoder.
Ex1ef : SVC A and B phase for the encoder has broke down.
Ex1f0 : SVC C phase for the encoder has broke down.
Ex1f1 : SVC some phases of power line is open.
Ex1f3 : SVC An instantaneous loss of power has occurred
Ex1f4 : SVC unknown error
Ex200 : Exposure operation is interrupted with an abort command.
Ex201 : Exposure processing task is now processing another command.
Ex202 : Cancellation was requested while processing was not being performed.
Ex203 : PGON is not asserted.
Ex204 : START signal is not asserted.
Ex205 : START signal is not negated.
Ex206 : Test pattern; Data is not transferred.
Ex207 : Test pattern; Data transfer is not completed.
Ex208 : Reset procedure for RB31 board is not completed.
Ex209 : The set value for the drum rotation speed is too large.
Ex20a : No plate edge is detected (when the plate edge sensor moves to the Away
side.)
Ex20b : No plate edge is detected (when the plate edge sensor is returning to the Home
F-7
PT-R4300 : Ver1.00
F.Error list
side.)
Ex20c : Recording head has traveled beyond the limit (on the Away side).
Ex20d : Recording head has traveled beyond the limit (on the Home side).
Ex20e : Recording head positioning range error
Ex20f : Recording head has not been positioned at its origin. (Origin sensor does not
turn OFF.)
Ex210 : Recording head has not been positioned at its origin. (Origin sensor does not
turn ON.)
Ex211 : Emergency stop is requested for the secondary-scanning motor.
Ex212 : Secondary-scanning motor is deactivated with an abort command.
Ex213 : Secondary scanning motor is illegal.
Ex214 : Exposure in the secondary scanning direction exceeds the effective image
output range.
Ex215 : FPGA sequence error.
Ex216 : Time-out error has occurred when the secondary scanning motor is activated.
Ex217 : EZ search has not detected the ORG sensor.
Ex218 : EZ search has not detected the EZ sensor.
Ex219 : When the CAL sensor search was executed, the maximum light intensity was
less than 50 mW.
Ex21a : Light intensity at the measurement starting point was at maximum when the
CAL sensor search was executed.
Ex21b : Light intensity at the measurement end point was at maximum when the CAL
sensor search was executed.
Ex21c : Over travel at recording head's Home side when the CAL sensor search was
executed.
Ex21d : Test pattern parameter error
Ex21e : PGON signal is not negated.
Ex21f : Secorndary direction origin point setup procedure failure.(The calibrated origin
point is not the same as logical origin point)
Ex220 : After an image data transfer from RIP is interrupted, it isn't resumed.
Ex221 : Drum rotation error was detected. This plate will be unloaded because it could
not be exposed correctly.
Ex300 : Both of plate pad and paper pad are not in original point.
Ex301 : After an interleaf is removed, plate cannot be detected.
Ex302 : An interleaf was detected on a plate. Or a plate size (in the Y direction) is shorter
than the set value.
Ex303 : Plate pad cannot be initialized.
Ex304 : Plate pad cannot carry a plate.
Ex305 : While carring a plate, the plate pad dropped the plate.
Ex306 : Paper pad cannot be initialized.
Ex307 : Air pressure in the plate pad does not go down.
Ex308 : Air pressure in the paper pad does not go down.
Ex309 : PCL time-out error has occurred when plate pad was moved.
F-8
F.Error list
PT-R4300 : Ver1.00
Ex30a : PCL time-out error has occurred when paper pad was moved.
Ex30b : Time-out error has occurred when plate pad was moved by stepping.
Ex30c : Time-out error has occurred when paper pad was moved by stepping.
Ex30d : A plate cannot be carried into the transport unit.
Ex30e : PH90 does not switch to ON while removing the interleaf.
Ex30f : PH90 does not switch to OFF while removing the interleaf.
Ex310 : Maintenance cover of auto-loader is open. Please close maintenance cover.
Ex311 : Bridge cover-2 of auto-loader is open. Please close bridge cover-2.
Ex312 : Cassette carrier is not set. Please set cassette carrier.
Ex313 : A plate remains in the bridge unit.
Ex314 : An interleaf remains in the paper exit.
Ex317 : Auto-loader is not turned on, or some interlock switches on Auto-loader are
Ex318 : A plate cannot be carried to the bridge-passing sensor.
Ex319 : The plate pad went down from the original point.
Ex31a : The paper pad went down from the original point.
Ex31b : Maintenance-cover of Auto-loader was opend. Please clode
maintenance-cover.
Ex31c : Bridge cover-2 was opened. Please clode bridge cover-2.
Ex31d : Door was opened. Please close the door.
Ex31e : Cassete carrier was removed. Please set cassette carrier.
Ex31f : The paper pad dropped the interleaf while carrying the it.
Ex320 : Plate pad dropped a plate before the plate pad reached the intermediate
sensor.
Ex321 : An interleaf in front of a plate was detected.
Ex322 : A plate remains on the sensor-2 of the bridge.
Ex323 : Intermediate sensor is OFF.
Ex324 : Power switch was turned off while Auto-loader was moving.
Ex325 : A plate cannot be carried to the intermediate sensor.
Ex326 : An interleaf under a plate was detected. Or a plate size (in the Y direction) is
Ex327 : The bridge-passing sensor does not turn OFF.(for Jig mode)
Ex32c : The nip-roller for paper discharge cann't be opened.
Ex341 : The interlock switch-3 is OFF.
Ex344 : A fuse on the relay board at home side has blown.
Ex345 : A fuse on the relay board at away side has blown.
F-9
PT-R4300 : Ver1.00
F.Error list

Ex360 : A plate remains on the bridge's sensor-1.
Ex361 : No plate exists on the bridge's sensor-3.
Ex363 : A plate size in the Y direction is too long when its transferring to the AT.
Ex364 : A plate size in the Y direction is too short when its transferring to the AT. Or an
interleaf in front of a plate was detected.
Ex365 : After the paper pad is descended, the metal sensor does not switch to ON.
Ex366 : Plate pad dropped the plate, before this initialize.
Ex367 : A teaching of plate size in the Y direction (1st) is finished.
Ex368 : A teaching of plate size in the Y direction (2nd) is finished.
Ex369 : This plate can't be transed. Because something error has occured when the
transfering to AT.
Ex36a : Air pressure in the plate pad does not go down after retry.
Ex36b : A plate remains on the insertion table in the transport unit.
Ex36c : This plate is judge as a paper during judgement operation.
Ex36d : This plate can't be transed. Because trans path position is down.
Ex380 : The door of the cassette part is open.
Ex381 : Time-out error has occurred when lift was initialized.
Ex382 : Time-out error has occurred when lift was moved.
Ex383 : Though the lift was initialized, the origin sensor is not ON.
Ex384 : The lift is not in the position where it is specified.
Ex385 : Already, there has been a cassette on the lift.
Ex386 : There are some cassettes which aren't being set properly.
Ex387 : MA-L can't be initialized because some cassettes are not in the lift or the
cassette properly.
Ex388 : There is no cassette in the specified cassette slot.
Ex389 : There is no cassette on the lift.
Ex38a : Lift has traveled beyond the limit (on the Up side).
Ex38b : Lift has traveled beyond the limit (on the Down side).
Ex38d : A cassette is already in the place to return a cassette.
Ex38e : A lift can't be raised and lowered because some cassettes are not in the lift or
the cassette properly.
Ex38f : Time-out error has occurred when a cassette was moved to cassette part.
Ex390 : Time-out error has occurred when a cassette was moved to lift.
Ex391 : Either plate pad or paper pad is not in original point.
Ex392 : An ineffective cassette number was indicated.
Ex393 : Cassette has traveled beyond the limit (on the Lift side).
Ex394 : Cassette has traveled beyond the limit (on the Cassette side).
Ex395 : MA-L can't be initialized because some cassettes can't be returned to the origin.
Ex396 : Though there is a cassette on the lift, the place to return the cassette isn't
F-10
F.Error list
PT-R4300 : Ver1.00
vacant.
Ex397 : Though the movement of the lift was finished, the lift position sensor at the
target position is not on.
Ex398 : MA-L Servo alarm
Ex399 : Time-out error has occurred when arm was moved.
Ex39a : Time-out error has occurred when a cassette was moved to cassette part by
arm.
Ex39b : Arm jut-out sensor (LS210E) is off.
Ex39c : A cassette is in illegal position of the cassette slot.
Ex39d : Arm is not in original point.
Ex39e : SQ210A sensor is illegal.
Ex400 : Plate has already been loaded.
Ex401 : Plate has not been loaded.
Ex403 : Dump interleaves from the collection box.
Ex600 : Either the conveyor, processor, or stocker is not turned on, or is in the busy
status or error status.
Ex602 : The plate cannot be transferred into the AT unit.
Ex603 : The plate cannot be transferred completely into the AT unit.
Ex606 : Error
Ex607 : Busy
Ex608 : Error
Ex609 : Busy
Ex60a : Error
Ex60b : Busy
Ex60c : Error occurred in ATM while a plate was carried to ATM.
Ex80c : The result of the calculation "Initial value + increment value * (repetition - 1)"
exceeds the upper limit value.
Ex80d : (The result of the calculation "Exposure starting point + (pattern width + gap) *
(repetition - 1)" exceeds the plate size.
Ex80e : The specified plate is not linked with the printing-machine's data.
Ex80f : Perform initialization at the service screen.
Ex810 : No plate is set at inlet of transport unit.
Ex811 : Plate (printer) size specified by the host computer is not registered.
Ex812 : Image size specified by host computer is larger than allowable output image
size.
Ex813 : Current offset of printing machine settings cause image to extend off plate.
Ex814 : Current paper-position of printing machine settings cause image to extend
outside of allowable exposure area.
Ex816 : Some LD is nearing the end of its usable life.
Please contact our office or agency and ask to replace them.
F-11
PT-R4300 : Ver1.00
F.Error list
Ex817 : There are some punch blocks, which have been used for more than the endurance time.
Ex819 : It failed to read the cassette number.
It considers that the cassette number is No.1.
Ex81a : Some LD's cannot be calibrated to the target power. These LD's be calibrated to
lower target power.
Ex81b : Some LD's cannot be calibrated to the target power. Temporary to work half
channels of recording head.
Ex81c : Some LD's cannot exposed by setting power due to be calibrated to lower target
power.
Ex81d : The temperature of the environment is greater than 28degrees.
Ex81e : The temperature of the environment is less than 18degrees.
Ex81f : Sensor for the temperature of the environment has not been connected.
Ex820 : Trail clamps are nearing the end of its usable life.
Ex821 : Trail clamps have been used for more than the endurance time.
Ex822 : Backup/restore of the data on NVRAM can't be performed, because the Dip-Sw
2 is not on.
Ex823 : The backup of the data on NVRAM is not in Flash-Memory.
Ex824 : Calibration must be done because there is some LD which doesn't reach the
target power.
But, LD calibration can not processed because temperature of LD block is too
low.
Ex825 : The direction where a connected conveyer can't be changed is set up in the
plate types setting.
Ex826 : No respons was returned from the conveyer.
Ex827 : An error was returned from the conveyer toward the switching command.
Ex828 : The conveyer can't be changed to the direction that is set up in the plate types
setting.
Ex82a : Since the light intensity of laser diodes is detected as having deviated more than
+-5% from the specified value, the equipment executes the calibration.
Ex82b : Communication with the RAS server was interrupted. (RAS server was turned
off, or RS-232C cable was drawn out)
Ex82c : No response come from DNS.
Ex82d : Communication with the RAS server has resume.
Ex82e : It failed in the connection to the rotating light server.
Ex82f : The name of the mail server isn't right.
Ex830 : It failed in the connection to the mail server.
F-12
F.Error list
PT-R4300 : Ver1.00
Ex831 : Mail account was rejected.

Ex832 : An error occurred in the transmission of DATA command.
Ex833 : An error occurred in the transmission of header.
Ex834 : An error occurred in the transmission of body.
Ex835 : An error occurred in the transmission of attached file.
Ex836 : An error occurred in the transmission of TO command.
Ex837 : A command was sent to the SMTP server. But, no answer was returned from
the server.
Ex839 : The cable between RB31 board and recording head is disconnected.
Ex880 : Servo pack: Time-out error occurred while receiving data.
Ex881 : Servo-Pack:Address error
Ex882 : Servo-Pack:Data error
Ex883 : Servo-Pack:Check sum error
Ex884 : Servo-Pack:Undefined error code
Ex885 : Servo-Pack:Number of received characters are insufficient.
Exe01 : Excessive current in the LD drive (driver 1 board)
Exe05 : Driver board temperature error or Head FPGA Version Error
Exe06 : -5 V power supply error
Exe07 : Calibration sensor is not connected.
Exe08 : Offset error in the calibration sensor
Exe09 : Irregular 5 V power supply
Exe0a : Irregular +15 V power supply
Exe0b : Irregular -15 V power supply
Exe0c : Irregular 24 V power supply
Exe0d : Cover switch is OFF.
Exe0e : BL command error (counter value is 0)
Exe0f : Zoom sensor is not detecting.
Exe10 : Focus sensor is not detecting.
Exe11 : Time has expired for home return.(Zoom or focus motor)
Exe12 : Power supply irregular while the motor is driving
Exe13 : Pulse motor has traveled beyond the limit. (Zoom or focus motor)
Exe14 : Irregular power supply(instantaneous loss)
Exe20 : Temperature of the LD block is greater than 28degrees.
Exe21 : Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit is greater than 35degrees.
Exe22 : Temperature of the radiating fin of the Peltier element is greater than 55
degrees.
Exe23 : Dew condensation error
Exe24 : Sensor for LD block has not been connected.
Exe25 : Sensor for the periphery of the optical unit has not been connected.
F-13
PT-R4300 : Ver1.00
F.Error list
Exe26 : Sensor for the radiating fin of the Peltier element has not been connected.
Exe27 : The dew condensation detection sensor has not been connected.
Exe28 : Temperature of the LD block is low.
Exe30 : Power supply error occurred when the recording head received the DW command.
Exe31 : Command error occurred when the recording head received the DW command.
Exe32 : Download error occurred when the recording head received the DP command.
Exe33 : Download error occurred when the recording head received the DF command.
Exe34 : Download address error occurred.
Exe35 : Error occurred when the recording head received the BU command.
Exe36 : Error occurred when the recording head received the BD command.
Exe40 : Writing error occurred when the recording head received the AC command.
Exe41 : Writing error on EEPROM
Exe42 : RAM error
Exe43 : ROM check sum error
Exe44 : FPGA error
Exe45 : Data error due to a divide-by-zero error
Exe60 : LD Current setting Error
Exe61 : The temperature of the LD block is greater than 28degrees.
(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit > 35degrees. Temperature of
the environment <= 28degrees.)",
(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit <= 35degrees. Temperature of
the environment > 28degrees.)",
the environment <= 28degrees.)",
Exe64 : The temperature at the periphery of the optical unit is greater than 35degrees.
(Temperature of the environment <= 28degrees.)
Exe65 : The temperature of the radiating fin is greater than 55degrees.
(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit>35degrees. Temperature of
the environment <= 28degrees.)
(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit >= 35degrees.)
Exe67 : The LD block has dew.
(Temperature of the LD block < 22degrees. Temperature at the periphery of
the optical unit >= 18degrees.)
the optical unit < 18degrees.)
Exe69 : The temperature of the LD block is less than 5degrees.
Exe6a : The temperature of the LD block is less than 5degrees.
F-14
F.Error list
PT-R4300 : Ver1.00
(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit < 17degrees. Temperature of

the environment >= 18degrees.)
Exe6b : The temperature of the LD block is greater than 28degrees.
Exe6c : The temperature of the LD block is greater than 28degrees.
the environment > 28degrees.)
Exe6d : The temperature of the LD block is greater than 28degrees.
Exe6e : The temperature inside the machine is greater than 35degrees.
Exe6f : The temperature of the radiating fin is greater than 55degrees.
(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit <= 35degrees.)
Exe71 : It is just before a recording head has dew.
(Temperature of the LD block < 22degrees. Temperature of the environment
>= 18degrees.)
(Temperature of the LD block < 22degrees. Temperature of the environment <
18degrees.)
Exe73 : The temperature of the LD block is in between 5degrees and 17degrees.
(Temperature of the environment >= 18degrees.)
(Temperature of the environment < 18degrees.)
Exea0 : Light intensity adjustment error 0ch
Exeaa : Light intensity adjustment error 10ch
Exeab : Light intensity adjustment error 11ch
Exeac : Light intensity adjustment error 12ch
Exead : Light intensity adjustment error 13ch
Exeae : Light intensity adjustment error 14ch
F-15
PT-R4300 : Ver1.00
F.Error list
Exeaf : Light intensity adjustment error 15ch

Exeb0 : Light intensity adjustment error 16ch
Exeba : Light intensity adjustment error 26ch
Exebb : Light intensity adjustment error 27ch
Exebc : Light intensity adjustment error 28ch
Exebd : Light intensity adjustment error 29ch
Exebe : Light intensity adjustment error 30ch
Exebf : Light intensity adjustment error 31ch
Exee0 : Incorrect command has been input.
Exee1 : The temperature of the LD block is greater than 28degrees.
Exee2 : Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit is greater than 35degrees.
(Temperature of the environment > 28degrees.)
Exee3 : The temperature of the radiating fin is greater than 55degrees.
Exee4 : It is just before a recording head has dew.
(Temperature of the LD block >= 22degrees.)
Exee5 : The temperature of the LD block is less than 5degrees.
the environment < 18degrees.)
Exef0 : Recording head processing task is now processing another message.
Exef2 : Recording head unit is not running.
Exef3 : Recording head data check sum error occurred when data was uploaded.
Exef4 : Recording head data address error occurred when data was uploaded.
Exef5 : LD calibration cannot process because temperature of LD block is too low.
Exef6 : A command was sent to the exposure head. But, no answer was returned from
the exposure head.
Exfa0 : System error(stack overflow).
Exfa1 : Floating point arithmetic error
Exfa2 : Divide-by-zero error
Exfa3 : System error (semaphore)
Exfb0 : Flash memory erase error
F-16
F.Error list
Exfb1 : Flash memory erase error (during verification).
Exfb2 : Flash memory write error.
Exfb3 : Incompatible flash memory
F-17
PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
F.Error list
PT-R4000II : Ver4.0X
2. Error list (PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X , PT-R4000II : Ver4.0X)

Ex103 : Transport unit does not ascend.
Ex104 : Transport unit does not descend.
Ex105 : Trail clamp arm does not ascend.
Ex106 : Trail clamp arm does not descend.
Ex107 : Squeeze roller does not descend.
Ex108 : Squeeze roller does not ascend.
Ex109 : Trail clamp cannot be locked. PH24-1/2 or M24 is illegal.
Ex10a : Trail clamp cannot be unlocked. PH24-1/2 or M24 is illegal.
Ex10b : Balancer drive pin cannot be initialized.
Ex10c : The both of Home and Away side drive pin for the balancer can not be pulled
out.
Ex10d : The both of Home and Away side drive pin for the balancer can not be inserted.)
Ex10e : Bar for releasing the lead clamp does not ascend.
Ex10f : Bar for releasing the lead clamp does not descend.
Ex112 : Plate size (in the Y direction) is shorter than the set value.
Ex113 : When the plate is unloaded, the plate pass sensor (PH54-2) does not switch to
ON.
Ex114 : Not bring down squeeze at loading.
Ex115 : Plate size (in the Y direction) is longer than the set value.
Ex116 : Servo status is illegal.
Ex117 : Servo status is error.
Ex118 : Servo alarm.
Ex11a : Drum speed is set beyond the permitted rate of the servo controller.
Ex11b : Current drum's encoder pulse is beyond 4000.
Ex11c : Error has occurred during drum positioning.
Ex11d : When the clamp is locked, some tail clamps are detected on the clamp arm, or
when the clamp is unlocked, some tail clamps are not detected on the clamp
arm.
Ex11e : Drum's encoder pulse is beyond the permitted range after drum positioning.
Ex11f : Plate cannot be transferred into the transport unit.
Ex120 : Home side balancer pin cannot be detected before insertion
Ex121 : Home side balancer pin cannot be detected before pulled out (The balancer is
not moving).
Ex122 : Clamp arm and squeeze roller do not descend.
Ex123 : Trail clamp is half-locked.
Ex124 : The plate passing-sensor for unloading (PH54) does not switch to ON.
Ex125 : Time-out error has occurred when the squeeze roller ascends and clamp cam
F-18
PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
F.Error list
descends simultaneously.
Ex126 : There was no plate to move to the shutter.
Ex127 : Servo controller does not enter the "Ready" status.
Ex128 : The balancer search sensor has not detected a balancer.
Ex129 : Error has occurred on the Home side of the alignment plate (while the alignment
Ex12a : Error has occurred on the Away side of the alignment plate (while the alignment
Ex12b : Error has occurred on the Home and Away sides of the alignment plate (while
the alignment plate is returning to its origin).
Ex12c : Error has occurred on the Home side of the alignment plate (while alignment is
performed).
Ex12d : Error has occurred on the alignment plate (while alignment is performed).
Ex12e : Error has occurred on the Home and Away sides of the alignment plate (when
alignment is performed).
Ex12f : Plate has not transferred to the punch unit.
Ex130 : Plate does not leave the punch unit.
Ex139 : After a plate is transferred to the gripper clamp, the plate detection sensor
(PH29H/A) does not switch to ON.
Ex13a : When the clamp arm is lowered, the sensor (to detect whether the clamp arm
pins are hooked on the clamp properly) has been turned ON.(Home side)
Ex13b : The specified encoder pulse for the drum is beyond 4000.
Ex13c : The transport unit's Away side is not moving during its operation.
Ex13d : The transport unit's Home side is not moving during its operation.
Ex13e : Error has occurred on the Home side of the alignment plate (while the alignment
Ex13f : Error has occurred on the Away side of the alignment plate (while the alignment
Ex140 : Error has occurred on the Home and Away side of the alignment plate (while the
alignment plate is returning to its origin).
Ex141 : A plate remains in the transport unit when the machine received a request
command.
Ex142 : A plate remains in the transport unit during error handling.
Ex143 : A plate remains on the discharge table in the transport unit.
Ex144 : A plate remains on the insertion table in the transport unit.
F-19
PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
F.Error list
Ex145 : Plate cannot be moved onto the discharge table during initialization.
Ex146 : Plate cannot be moved onto the insertion table.
Ex147 : Balancer search operation has not been completed properly.
Ex148 : When the transport unit descends, only the Home side Down sensor in the
Ex149 : When the transport unit descends, only the Away side Down sensor in the
Ex14a : When the transport unit ascends, only the Home side UP sensor in the transport
unit is turned ON.
Ex14b : When the transport unit ascends, only the Away side UP sensor in the transport
unit is turned ON.
Ex14c : Front, rear or side cover is open.(Some interlock switches are OFF.)
Ex14d : A fuse on the relay board was blown. (home)
Ex14e : Thumbscrew is not tightened securely on the rear cover. (The servo stop switch
is ON.)
Ex14f : A plate exists on the discharge table in the transport unit during initialization.
Ex150 : A plate exists on the insertion table in the transport unit during initialization.
Ex151 : Number of balancers is not sufficient. (The number of balancers checked by the
balancer search sensor was one, two or three for both the Home and Away
sides.)
Ex152 : Clamp arm is not in the UP position.
Ex153 : A fuse on the relay board was blown. (away)
Ex154 : Blower is turned off, but signal does not change.
Ex155 : Tail clamps are missing during initialization.
size is longer than the expected one.
size is shorter than the expected one.
Ex158 : Both of Home and Away size check sensors are on before starting the centering
program.
Ex159 : Auto-loader is stopped by a interlock OFF.
Ex15a : This hardware matching is illegal.
Ex15b : The balancer is not moved to the target position.
Ex15c : The drum can not be spun up because the Home-Upper sensor of the Lead
Ex15d : During plate loading, double plate loading is detected.
Ex15e : The loaded plate is detected to be floating while drum spinning.
Ex15f : The drum cannot be spun up because the Upper sensor of the clamp arm is off.
Ex160 : The drum can not be spined up because the Home-Upper sensor of the clamp
arm is off.
Ex161 : The drum cannot be spun up because the balancing pin on the (Away side) is
Ex162 : The drum cannot be spun up because the balancing pin on the (Home side) is
F-20
PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
F.Error list

Ex163 : The drum cannot be spun up because the Upper sensor of the squeeze roller is
off.
Ex164 : The drum can not be spun up because the Away-Upper sensor of the Lead
Ex165 : The drum is rotated to the "lead clamp position", but the status of the Servo
Ex166 : The drum is rotated to the "tail clamp position", but the status of the Servo
Ex167 : The drum is rotated to the "squeeze position", but the status of the Servo
Ex168 : The drum is rotated to the "balance pin before inserted", but the status of the
Ex169 : The drum is rotated to the "balance pin after inserted", but the status of the
Ex16a : The drum is rotated to the "pick up tail clamp position", but the status of Servo
Ex16b : The drum is rotated to the "plate removal position", but the status of the Servo
Ex16c : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the lead clamp.
Ex16d : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the tail clamp.
Ex16e : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the squeeze.
Ex16f : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the balance pin insertion.
Ex170 : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the balance pin pull out.
Ex171 : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the picking up tail clamp.
Ex172 : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for the plate removal.
Ex173 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Lead clamp position)
Ex174 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Tail clamp position)
Ex175 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Squeeze position)
Ex176 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Balance pin before
inserted)
Ex177 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Balance pin after
inserted)
Ex178 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Pick up tail clamp)
Ex179 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(Plate removal)
Ex17a : After verifying the removal of the plate, press the OK button.
When the OK button is pressed, initialization begins.
Ex17b : PH62A-sensor is illegal. The sensor detects a plate during initialization.
Ex17c : PH29H-sensor is illegal. The PH29H-sensor does not turn ON during
initialization.
Ex17d : PH61H-sensor is illegal. The sensor detects a plate during initialization.
Ex17e : PH61A-sensor is illegal. The sensor detects a plate during initialization.
Ex17f : PH29A-sensor is illegal. The PH29A-sensor does not turn ON during
F-21
PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
F.Error list
initialization.
Ex180 : Drum does not start rotating at high-speed.
Ex181 : Drum does not rotate at the specified high-speed.
Ex182 : Error has occurred after the drum rotated at the specified high-speed.
Ex183 : Drum cannot be stopped when rotating at high-speed.
Ex184 : Drum operation is stopped with an emergency stop command.
Ex185 : Drum operation is stopped with an abort command.
Ex186 : Drum's vacuum pressure is not sufficient. Please confirm connection of the
blower-hose, or the Vacuum-sensor is illegal.
Ex187 : Error has occurred on the blower, or the power supply of the blower is OFF.
Ex188 : Drum operation is stopped due to low pressure in the drum.
Ex18a : Door does not open.
Ex18b : Transport tasks: Parameter error
Ex18c : Error has occured on the blower. Please turn off this machine, and turn on after
waiting 10 seconds. Also, confirm whether or not the connector doesn't come
off.
Ex18d : The drum can not be spun up, because some of the interlock switches are OFF,
or some of the actuator's sensors are damaged, or the blower is damaged.
Ex18e : Door does not open, because some of the interlock switches are OFF(front
cover or rear cover is open).
Ex190 : Clamp arm does not descend.(Home side)
Ex191 : Clamp arm does not descend.(Away side)
Ex192 : Clamp arm does not ascend.(Home side)
Ex193 : Clamp arm does not ascend.(Away side)
Ex194 : When the clamp arm is lowered, the sensor (to detect whether the clamp arm
pins are hooked on the clamp properly) has been turned ON.(Away side)
Ex195 : Trail clamp cannot be locked.(Home side)
Ex196 : Trail clamp cannot be locked.(Away side)
Ex197 : Trail clamp cannot be unocked.(Home side)
Ex198 : Trail clamp cannot be unocked.(Away side)
Ex199 : Balancer drive pin cannot be inserted.(Home side)
Ex19a : Balancer drive pin cannot be inserted.(Away side)
Ex19b : Balancer drive pin cannot be pulled out.(Home side)
Ex19c : Balancer drive pin cannot be pulled out.(Away side)
Ex19d : Balancer pin cannot be detected before insertion.(Away side)
Ex19e : Balancer pin cannot be detected before pull out (the balancer is not
moving).(Away side)
Ex19f : The balancer search sensor has not detected a balancer.(Home side)
F-22
PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
F.Error list
Ex1a0 : The balancer search sensor has not detected a balancer.(Away side)
Ex1a1 : Number of balancers is not sufficient. (Home side)
Ex1a2 : Number of balancers is not sufficient. (Away side)
Ex1a3 : Soft-interlock or drum-stop swtich is OFF during drum spining.
Ex1a4 : The cover-interlock switch is OFF during drum spining.
Ex1a5 : The interlock switch-3 is OFF during drum spining.
Ex1a6 : A plate cannot be carried into the transport unit.
Ex1a7 : A plate cannot be carried to sensor PPH50-2.
Ex1a8 : Auto-loader is not turned on, or some interlock switches on Auto-loader are
Ex1a9 : Cassete carrier was removed. Please set cassette carrier.
Ex1aa : The door of the cassette part is open.
Ex1ab : Maintenance-cover of Auto-loader was opend. Please clode maintenance
cover.
Ex1ac : Bridge cover-2 was opened. Please clode bridge cover-2.
Ex1ad : An interleaf under a plate was detected. Or a plate size (in the Y direction) is
Ex1ae : An interleaf was detected on a plate. Or a plate size (in the Y direction) is shorter
than the set value.
Ex1b0 : Trail clamp is not detected on the clamp arm before the plate loading.
Ex1b1 : Trail clamp is detected on the clamp arm before the plate unloading.
Ex1b2 : Trail clamp cannot be set correctly.
Ex1b3 : This plate can't be transed. Because something error has occured when the
transfering to AT.
Ex1b4 : This plate can't be transed. Because trans path position is down.
Ex1b6 : The bridge-passing sensor does not turn OFF.(for Jig mode)
Ex1b7 : A plate remains on the plate detection sensor(PH70).
Ex1b8 : When detects the front of a plate, the detection area is not brought.
Ex1b9 : When detects the front of a plate, the detection of Home or Away is not brought.
Ex1ba : PH11-2H-sensor is illegal. The PH11-2H-sensor does not turn ON during
initialization.
Ex1bb : PH11-2A-sensor is illegal. The PH11-2A-sensor does not turn ON during
initialization.
Ex1c0 : Lead clamp release bar cannot be driven. Either PH30H or PH31H is illegal.
Ex1c1 : Lead clamp release bar cannot be driven. Either PH30A or PH31A is illegal.
Ex1c2 : Trans path cannot be driven. Either PH55, PH56, or PH57 is illegal.
Ex1c6 : Trail clamp arm cannot be driven. Either PH20 or PH21 is illegal.
Ex1c7 : Trail clamp arm cannot be driven. Either PH20 or M20 is illegal.
Ex1c8 : An interleaf was detected under a plate.
Ex1c9 : When centering alignment is performed, the plate set position is out of range.
F-23
PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
F.Error list
Ex1ca : Error has occured on the punching unit. The punch hole could not be opened
correctly.
Ex1cb : Opened shutter obstructs trans path driving.
Ex1cc : Trail clamp arm obstructs trans path driving.
Ex1d0 : Transfer operation is halted with an abort command.
Ex1d1 : Transport tasks are being processed.
Ex1d2 : Transport tasks are not being processed.
Ex1d3 : Transport tasks: Message order error
Ex1d4 : Transport system is not initialized.
Ex1e0 : SVC user parameter breakdown
Ex1e1 : SVC user parameter setting error
Ex1e2 : SVC over-current
Ex1e3 : SVC detection of regenerative error
Ex1e4 : SVC postion error pulse overflow
Ex1e5 : SVC Main circuit voltage error detection
Ex1e6 : SVC overspeed
Ex1e7 : SVC overloaded (high load)
Ex1e8 : SVC overloaded (low load)
Ex1e9 : SVC stauts 99h
Ex1ea : SVC heat sink has overheated.
Ex1eb : SVC stauts b1h
Ex1ec : SVC is out of control.
Ex1ed : SVC phase error has been detected in the encoder.
Ex1ef : SVC A and B phase for the encoder has broke down.
Ex1f0 : SVC C phase for the encoder has broke down.
Ex1f1 : SVC some phases of power line is open.
Ex1f3 : SVC An instantaneous loss of power has occurred
Ex1f4 : SVC unknown error
Ex200 : Exposure operation is interrupted with an abort command.
Ex201 : Exposure processing task is now processing another command.
Ex202 : Cancellation was requested while processing was not being performed.
Ex203 : PGON is not asserted.
Ex204 : START signal is not asserted.
Ex205 : START signal is not negated.
Ex206 : Test pattern; Data is not transferred.
Ex207 : Test pattern; Data transfer is not completed.
Ex208 : Reset procedure for RB31 board is not completed.
Ex209 : The set value for the drum rotation speed is too large.
Ex20a : No plate edge is detected (when the plate edge sensor moves to the Away
side.)
Ex20b : No plate edge is detected (when the plate edge sensor is returning to the Home
side.)
F-24
PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
F.Error list
Ex20c : Recording head has traveled beyond the limit (on the Away side).
Ex20d : Recording head has traveled beyond the limit (on the Home side).
Ex20e : Recording head positioning range error
Ex20f : Recording head has not been positioned at its origin. (Origin sensor does not
turn OFF.)
Ex210 : Recording head has not been positioned at its origin. (Origin sensor does not
turn ON.)
Ex211 : Emergency stop is requested for the secondary-scanning motor.
Ex212 : Secondary-scanning motor is deactivated with an abort command.
Ex213 : Secondary scanning motor is illegal.
Ex214 : Exposure in the secondary scanning direction exceeds the effective image
output range.
Ex215 : FPGA sequence error.
Ex216 : Time-out error has occurred when the secondary scanning motor is activated.
Ex217 : EZ search has not detected the ORG sensor.
Ex218 : EZ search has not detected the EZ sensor.
Ex219 : When the CAL sensor search was executed, the maximum light intensity was
less than 50 mW.
Ex21a : Light intensity at the measurement starting point was at maximum when the
CAL sensor search was executed.
Ex21b : Light intensity at the measurement end point was at maximum when the CAL
sensor search was executed.
Ex21c : Over travel at recording head's Home side when the CAL sensor search was
executed.
Ex21d : Test pattern parameter error
Ex21e : PGON signal is not negated.
Ex21f : Secorndary direction origin point setup procedure failure.(The calibrated origin
point is not the same as logical origin point)
Ex220 : After an image data transfer from RIP is interrupted, it isn't resumed.
Ex221 : Drum rotation error was detected. This plate will be unloaded because it could
not be exposed correctly.
Ex300 : Both of plate pad and paper pad are not in original point.
Ex301 : After an interleaf is removed, plate cannot be detected.
Ex302 : An interleaf was detected on a plate. Or a plate size (in the Y direction) is shorter
than the set value.
Ex303 : Plate pad cannot be initialized.
Ex304 : Plate pad cannot carry a plate.
Ex305 : While carring a plate, the plate pad dropped the plate.
Ex306 : Paper pad cannot be initialized.
Ex307 : Air pressure in the plate pad does not go down.
Ex308 : Air pressure in the paper pad does not go down.
Ex309 : PCL time-out error has occurred when plate pad was moved.
Ex30a : PCL time-out error has occurred when paper pad was moved.
F-25
PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
F.Error list
Ex30b : Time-out error has occurred when plate pad was moved by stepping.
Ex30c : Time-out error has occurred when paper pad was moved by stepping.
Ex30d : A plate cannot be carried into the transport unit.
Ex30e : PH90 does not switch to ON while removing the interleaf.
Ex30f : PH90 does not switch to OFF while removing the interleaf.
Ex310 : Maintenance cover of auto-loader is open. Please close maintenance cover.
Ex311 : Bridge cover-2 of auto-loader is open. Please close bridge cover-2.
Ex312 : Cassette carrier is not set. Please set cassette carrier.
Ex313 : A plate remains in the bridge unit.
Ex314 : An interleaf remains in the paper exit.
Ex317 : Auto-loader is not turned on, or some interlock switches on Auto-loader are
Ex318 : A plate cannot be carried to the bridge-passing sensor.
Ex319 : The plate pad went down from the original point.
Ex31a : The paper pad went down from the original point.
Ex31b : Maintenance-cover of Auto-loader was opend. Please clode maintenance
cover.
Ex31c : Bridge cover-2 was opened. Please clode bridge cover-2.
Ex31d : Door was opened. Please close the door.
Ex31e : Cassete carrier was removed. Please set cassette carrier.
Ex31f : The paper pad dropped the interleaf while carrying the it.
Ex320 : Plate pad dropped a plate before the plate pad reached the intermediate
sensor.
Ex321 : An interleaf in front of a plate was detected.
Ex322 : A plate remains on the sensor-2 of the bridge.
Ex323 : Intermediate sensor is OFF.
Ex324 : Power switch was turned off while Auto-loader was moving.
Ex325 : A plate cannot be carried to the intermediate sensor.
Ex326 : An interleaf under a plate was detected. Or a plate size (in the Y direction) is
Ex327 : The bridge-passing sensor does not turn OFF.(for Jig mode)
Ex32c : The nip-roller for paper discharge cann't be opened.
Ex344 : A fuse on the relay board at home side has blown.
Ex345 : A fuse on the relay board at away side has blown.
F-26
PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
F.Error list

Ex361 : No plate exists on the bridge's sensor-3.
Ex363 : A plate size in the Y direction is too long when its transferring to the AT.
Ex364 : A plate size in the Y direction is too short when its transferring to the AT. Or an
interleaf in front of a plate was detected.
Ex365 : After the paper pad is descended, the metal sensor does not switch to ON.
Ex366 : Plate pad dropped the plate, before this initialize.
Ex367 : A teaching of plate size in the Y direction (1st) is finished.
Ex368 : A teaching of plate size in the Y direction (2nd) is finished.
Ex369 : This plate can't be transed. Because something error has occured when the
transfering to AT.
Ex36a : Air pressure in the plate pad does not go down after retry.
Ex36b : A plate remains on the insertion table in the transport unit.
Ex36c : This plate is judge as a paper during judgement operation.
Ex36d : This plate can't be transed. Because trans path position is down.
Ex380 : The door of the cassette part is open.
Ex381 : Time-out error has occurred when lift was initialized.
Ex382 : Time-out error has occurred when lift was moved.
Ex383 : Though the lift was initialized, the origin sensor is not ON.
Ex384 : The lift is not in the position where it is specified.
Ex385 : Already, there has been a cassette on the lift.
Ex386 : There are some cassettes which aren't being set properly.
Ex387 : MA-L can't be initialized because some cassettes are not in the lift or the
cassette properly.
Ex388 : There is no cassette in the specified cassette slot.
Ex389 : There is no cassette on the lift.
Ex38a : Lift has traveled beyond the limit (on the Up side).
Ex38b : Lift has traveled beyond the limit (on the Down side).
Ex38d : A cassette is already in the place to return a cassette.
Ex38e : A lift can't be raised and lowered because some cassettes are not in the lift or
the cassette properly.
Ex38f : Time-out error has occurred when a cassette was moved to cassette part.
Ex390 : Time-out error has occurred when a cassette was moved to lift.
Ex391 : Either plate pad or paper pad is not in original point.
Ex392 : An ineffective cassette number was indicated.
Ex393 : Cassette has traveled beyond the limit (on the Lift side).
Ex394 : Cassette has traveled beyond the limit (on the Cassette side).
Ex395 : MA-L can't be initialized because some cassettes can't be returned to the origin.
Ex396 : Though there is a cassette on the lift, the place to return the cassette isn't
vacant.
F-27
PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
F.Error list
Ex397 : Though the movement of the lift was finished, the lift position sensor at the
target position is not on.
Ex398 : MA-L Servo alarm
Ex399 : Time-out error has occurred when arm was moved.
Ex39a : Time-out error has occurred when a cassette was moved to cassette part by
arm.
Ex39b : Arm jut-out sensor (LS210E) is off.
Ex39c : A cassette is in illegal position of the cassette slot.
Ex39d : Arm is not in original point.
Ex39e : SQ210A sensor is illegal.
Ex400 : Plate has already been loaded.
Ex401 : Plate has not been loaded.
Ex403 : Dump interleaves from the collection box.
Ex602 : The plate cannot be transferred into the AT unit.
Ex603 : The plate cannot be transferred completely into the AT unit.
Ex606 : Error
Ex607 : Busy
Ex608 : Error
Ex609 : Busy
Ex60a : Error
Ex60b : Busy
Ex60c : Error occurred in ATM while a plate was carried to ATM.
Ex80c : The result of the calculation "Initial value + increment value * (repetition - 1)"
exceeds the upper limit value.
Ex80d : (The result of the calculation "Exposure starting point + (pattern width + gap) *
(repetition - 1)" exceeds the plate size.
Ex80e : The specified plate is not linked with the printing-machine's data.
Ex80f : Perform initialization at the service screen.
Ex810 : No plate is set at inlet of transport unit.
Ex811 : Plate (printer) size specified by the host computer is not registered.
Ex812 : Image size specified by host computer is larger than allowable output image
size.
Ex813 : Current offset of printing machine settings cause image to extend off plate.
Ex814 : Current paper-position of printing machine settings cause image to extend
outside of allowable exposure area.
Ex816 : Some LD is nearing the end of its usable life.
Ex817 : There are some punch blocks, which have been used for more than the
F-28
PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
F.Error list
endurance time.
Ex819 : It failed to read the cassette number.
It considers that the cassette number is No.1.
Ex81a : Some LD's cannot be calibrated to the target power. These LD's be calibrated to
lower target power.
Ex81b : Some LD's cannot be calibrated to the target power. Temporary to work half
channels of recording head.
Ex81c : Some LD's cannot exposed by setting power due to be calibrated to lower target
power.
Ex81d : The temperature of the environment is greater than 28degrees.
Ex81e : The temperature of the environment is less than 18degrees.
Ex81f : Sensor for the temperature of the environment has not been connected.
Ex820 : Trail clamps are nearing the end of its usable life.
Ex821 : Trail clamps have been used for more than the endurance time.
Ex822 : Backup/restore of the data on NVRAM can't be performed, because the Dip-Sw
2 is not on.
Ex823 : The backup of the data on NVRAM is not in Flash-Memory.
Ex824 : Calibration must be done because there is some LD which doesn't reach the
target power.
But, LD calibration can not processed because temperature of LD block is too
low.
Ex825 : The direction where a connected conveyer can't be changed is set up in the
plate types setting.
Ex826 : No respons was returned from the conveyer.
Ex827 : An error was returned from the conveyer toward the switching command.
Ex828 : The conveyer can't be changed to the direction that is set up in the plate types
setting.
Ex82a : Since the light intensity of laser diodes is detected as having deviated more than
+-5% from the specified value, the equipment executes the calibration.
Ex82b : Communication with the RAS server was interrupted. (RAS server was turned
off, or RS-232C cable was drawn out)
Ex82c : No response come from DNS.
Ex82d : Communication with the RAS server has resume.
Ex82e : It failed in the connection to the rotating light server.
Ex82f : The name of the mail server isn't right.
Ex830 : It failed in the connection to the mail server.
Ex831 : Mail account was rejected.
F-29
PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
F.Error list
Ex832 : An error occurred in the transmission of DATA command.

Ex833 : An error occurred in the transmission of header.
Ex834 : An error occurred in the transmission of body.
Ex835 : An error occurred in the transmission of attached file.
Ex836 : An error occurred in the transmission of TO command.
Ex837 : A command was sent to the SMTP server. But, no answer was returned from
the server.
Ex880 : Servo pack: Time-out error occurred while receiving data.
Ex881 : Servo-Pack:Address error
Ex882 : Servo-Pack:Data error
Ex883 : Servo-Pack:Check sum error
Ex884 : Servo-Pack:Undefined error code
Ex885 : Servo-Pack:Number of received characters are insufficient.
Exe05 : Driver board temperature error or Head FPGA Version Error
Exe06 : -5 V power supply error
Exe07 : Calibration sensor is not connected.
Exe08 : Offset error in the calibration sensor
Exe09 : Irregular 5 V power supply
Exe0a : Irregular +15 V power supply
Exe0b : Irregular -15 V power supply
Exe0c : Irregular 24 V power supply
Exe0d : Cover switch is OFF.
Exe0e : BL command error (counter value is 0)
Exe0f : Zoom sensor is not detecting.
Exe10 : Focus sensor is not detecting.
Exe11 : Time has expired for home return.(Zoom or focus motor)
Exe12 : Power supply irregular while the motor is driving
Exe13 : Pulse motor has traveled beyond the limit. (Zoom or focus motor)
Exe14 : Irregular power supply(instantaneous loss)
Exe20 : Temperature of the LD block is greater than 28degrees.
Exe21 : Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit is greater than 35degrees.
Exe22 : Temperature of the radiating fin of the Peltier element is greater than
55degrees.
Exe23 : Dew condensation error
Exe24 : Sensor for LD block has not been connected.
Exe25 : Sensor for the periphery of the optical unit has not been connected.
Exe26 : Sensor for the radiating fin of the Peltier element has not been connected.
Exe27 : The dew condensation detection sensor has not been connected.
Exe28 : Temperature of the LD block is low.
F-30
PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
F.Error list
Exe30 : Power supply error occurred when the recording head received the DW command.
Exe31 : Command error occurred when the recording head received the DW command.
Exe32 : Download error occurred when the recording head received the DP command.
Exe33 : Download error occurred when the recording head received the DF command.
Exe34 : Download address error occurred.
Exe35 : Error occurred when the recording head received the BU command.
Exe36 : Error occurred when the recording head received the BD command.
Exe40 : Writing error occurred when the recording head received the AC command.
Exe41 : Writing error on EEPROM
Exe42 : RAM error
Exe43 : ROM check sum error
Exe44 : FPGA error
Exe45 : Data error due to a divide-by-zero error
Exe60 : LD Current setting Error
Exe61 : The temperature of the LD block is greater than degrees.
(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit > degrees. Temperature of the
environment <= 28degrees.)"
Exe62 : The temperature of the LD block is greater than degrees.
the environment > 28degrees.)"
the environment <= 28degrees.)"
Exe64 : The temperature at the periphery of the optical unit is greater than 35degrees.
the optical unit >= 18degrees.)
the optical unit < 18degrees.)
Exe69 : The temperature of the LD block is less than 5degrees.
Exe6a : The temperature of the LD block is less than 5degrees.
the environment >= 18degrees.)
Exe6b : The temperature of the LD block is greater than 28degrees.
F-31
PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
F.Error list

Exe6c : The temperature of the LD block is greater than 28degrees.
Exe6d : The temperature of the LD block is greater than 28degrees.
Exe6e : The temperature inside the machine is greater than 35degrees.
Exe6f : The temperature of the radiating fin is greater than 55degrees.
(Temperature of the LD block < 22degrees. Temperature of the environment
>= 18degrees.)
(Temperature of the LD block < 22degrees. Temperature of the environment <
18degrees.)
(Temperature of the environment >= 18degrees.)
(Temperature of the environment < 18degrees.)
Exeaa : Light intensity adjustment error 10ch
Exeab : Light intensity adjustment error 11ch
Exeac : Light intensity adjustment error 12ch
Exead : Light intensity adjustment error 13ch
Exeae : Light intensity adjustment error 14ch
Exeaf : Light intensity adjustment error 15ch
F-32
PT-R4000 : Ver3.0X
F.Error list

Exeba : Light intensity adjustment error 26ch
Exebb : Light intensity adjustment error 27ch
Exebc : Light intensity adjustment error 28ch
Exebd : Light intensity adjustment error 29ch
Exebe : Light intensity adjustment error 30ch
Exebf : Light intensity adjustment error 31ch
Exee0 : Incorrect command has been input.
Exee1 : The temperature of the LD block is greater than 28degrees.
Exee2 : Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit is greater than 35degrees.
(Temperature of the environment > 28degrees.)
Exee3 : The temperature of the radiating fin is greater than 55degrees.
Exee4 : It is just before a recording head has dew.
(Temperature of the LD block >= 22degrees.)
Exee5 : The temperature of the LD block is less than 5degrees.
the environment < 18degrees.)
Exef0 : Recording head processing task is now processing another message.
Exef2 : Recording head unit is not running.
Exef3 : Recording head data check sum error occurred when data was uploaded.
Exef4 : Recording head data address error occurred when data was uploaded.
Exef5 : LD calibration cannot process because temperature of LD block is too low.
Exef6 : A command was sent to the exposure head. But, no answer was returned from
the exposure head.
Exfa0 : System error(stack overflow).
Exfa1 : Floating point arithmetic error
Exfa2 : Divide-by-zero error
Exfa3 : System error (semaphore)
Exfb0 : Flash memory erase error
Exfb1 : Flash memory erase error (during verification).
Exfb2 : Flash memory write error.
Exfb3 : Incompatible flash memory
F-33
G. Supplement
G.Supplement
1. Punch List
Parts cord
U1250039-00
U1250040-00
U1250041-00
U1250042-01
U1250043-01
U1250044-01
U1250045-01
U1250046-01
U1250047-01
U1250048-00
U1250049-01
U1250050-01
U1250051-01
U1250052-01
U1250057-00
U1250108-00
U1250060-01
U1250061-01
U1250058-00
U1250063-01
U1250069-00
U1250104-00
U1250106-00
U1250107-00
U1250113-00
U1250119-00
U1250110-00
U1250121-00
U1250118-00
U1250120-00
U1250059-00
U1250111-00
U1250115-00
Parts Name
HB-S220
HB-S425
HB-S220/425
DS400
DS500
DS700
DS400/700
DS400/700
DS500/700
KM550
HB-W425
PC458
PC757
PC458/757
HB-S425(UU)
HB-S220(UU)
DS400/KM550(8/9)
DS400/KM550(7/9)
HB-S425+KM550
HB(W)425/393+KM550
HB/DS(W)425/400(11/8)
HB/DS(W)425/400(11/6.25)
HB(W)425/393+DS550
HB/DS(W)425/400(11/10)
HB(W)425/393+DS700
HB/DS(W)425/400(11/6)
PC737/KM550
PC458/KM550
HB/PC(W)425/457(11/11)
HB/PC(W)425/457(11/10)
HB/DS(W)425/400+KM550(10/9)
HB/DS(W)425/400+KM550(11/9)
DS/KM(W)500/550+HB425(10/11,8)
* U1250039-00 to U1250052-01 is Standard option
G-1
G.Supplement
G-2
G.Supplement
G-3
G.Supplement
G-4
G.Supplement
G-5
G.Supplement
G-6
G.Supplement
G-7
G.Supplement
G-8
G.Supplement
G-9
G.Supplement
G-10
G.Supplement
G-11
G.Supplement
2. Recommend parts list
2002-05-23 present
G-12
G.Supplement
2002-05-23 present
G-13
G.Supplement
2002-05-23 present
G-14
G.Supplement
2002-05-23 present
G-15
Plate Thermal Recorder
4300
SERVICE MANUAL
June,6,2002 Ver1.1
Publication
Quality Promotion Department
Media Technology Company
DAINIPPON SCREEN MFG.CO.,LTD.
Printed in Japan

Ptr4300 Sme v11 Servicemanual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ptr4300 Sme v11 Servicemanual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Plate Thermal Recorder

Quality Promotion Department

For your safety

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided

Please keep the following premises and expectations in mind.

C. Replacement & Adjustment

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

The following descriptions of safety precautions and operating

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

Switching operation of power supply

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

Power supply switch

Power supply switch

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

Processing after power failures

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

While these doors are open, releasing interlocks or performing

Front cover interlock switch

Front cover interlock switch

Back side cover

Right side cover

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

Forced drum stop switch

Forced drum stop switch

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

Do not turn on the PT-R4XXXs power supply or start operation

Wear clothing that

Hands are wet.

Safety boots are

Whenever you notice anything abnormal, report it immediately to

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

Maintenance must always be performed by specially trained and

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

Caution labels are attached to potentially hazardous parts or areas

Label indicating that the PT-R4XXX complies with CDRH

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

Label indicating that the PT-R4XXX is a Class 1 laser product.

Label indicating that the PT-R4XXX complies with FCC and

Label indicating that the PT-R4XXX complies with CE standards.

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

Label indicating that this unit contains laser radiation.

Label showing the location of an ground terminal.

Label indicating the technical classification of the laser head (for

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

Label warning that this equipment contains a high leakage current

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

For European model

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

Transport and installation

High Temperature and humidity

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

The laser diode is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Damage to

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL